Your email was sent successfully. Check your inbox.

An error occurred while sending the email. Please try again.

Proceed reservation?

Export
Filter
  • 1990-1994  (58)
  • 1980-1984  (98)
  • Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands  (156)
  • Social sciences.  (145)
  • Conflict of laws.  (11)
Datasource
Material
Language
Years
Year
  • 1
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401106894
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1 v)
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Introduction -- 2. Chemical Lists and List Descriptions -- 3. Cross-Reference Indexes of Chemical Names and Synonyms -- B. Regulatory Summaries -- Appendix: Key to RCRA “F”- and “K”- Series Wastes.
    Abstract: The Regulated Chemicals Directory"lM is meant to be a convenient source of information for everyone who needs to keep up-to-date regarding the regulations and recommendations that pertain to chemical substances. The RCD™ is designed to be the first reference book to consult when beginning compliance efforts. Every regulatory or advisory list used in the RCD™ is keyed to its source, to help readers who need more detailed information on regulations, recommendations, or guidelines readily locate source documents. Some organizations now center their compliance efforts on computerized information stored in cross-referenced databases. A unique feature of the RCDTM is the availability of an electronic version suitable for use on IBM-compatible personal computers, download onto mainframes and CD-ROM players. Both the print and electronic versions are updated with the same timeliness. For more information on the electronic versions of the Regulated Chemicals DirectoryTM, contact Chapman & Hall directly (One Penn Plaza, New York, NY 10119, fax-212-564-1505). Many companies working on product development need information on what may be regulated in the future. The RCD™ provides selected information on pending regulations and in-progress testing lists, which can provide a starting place for tracking future regulatory considerations. Information for the RCD™ is continually gathered and updated. Suggestions from readers for information that should be added to the RCD™ or for other ways to improve the book are welcomed by Chapman & Hall. - Patricia L. Dsida, Pres. ChemADVISOR® , Inc. ix Part A. Chemical Lists and Indexes Section 1.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Introduction2. Chemical Lists and List Descriptions -- 3. Cross-Reference Indexes of Chemical Names and Synonyms -- B. Regulatory Summaries -- Appendix: Key to RCRA “F”- and “K”- Series Wastes.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 2
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401095921
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. An Overview of the Evolution of the U.S. Pecan Industry -- 2. Pecan Production -- 3. Pecan Physiology and Composition -- 4. Pecan Processing -- 5. Mechanization of Post-Harvest Pecan Processing -- 6. Microbiology and Sanitation -- 7. Pecan Composition -- 8. Methods for Measurement of Pecan Quality -- 9. Structure and Performance of the Pecan Market -- Appendix: Further Reading.
    Abstract: Flavorwise and texturewise pecans are the "Queen of the Edible Nuts. " This has been verified by salters, bakers, confectioners and ice cream manufacturers in America and western Europe. Hickory nuts and macadamia nuts are close behind, but are available only in limited supply. Pecans are among the nuts highest in oil content. In general, the varieties of nuts with the highest oil content are also rich in flavor and tender in texture. Some varieties of pecans (i. e. , Schley and Curtis) have been shown to contain as much as 76% oil. The oil in pecans is highly unsaturated, which means it is desirable from a nutritional standpoint but that it is also highly susceptible to oxidation which can cause pecans to tum stale and rancid. Pecans used in confections, bakery goods, cereals, or in snacks are more subject to staleness and rancidity than most nuts because these products are often stored at ambient temperatures. For this reason, pecans are considered to be semi-perishable and are not used in some "fine" products due to their limited shelf-life. Research at the Georgia Experiment Station has shown that raw pecans or most pecan products may be held in good condition for more than 20 years if freezing is the mode of preservation. However, development of new products demands that pecans be stored at ambient temperatures for extended intervals. Pecan 'meat' is easily bruised during shelling and handling.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. An Overview of the Evolution of the U.S. Pecan Industry2. Pecan Production -- 3. Pecan Physiology and Composition -- 4. Pecan Processing -- 5. Mechanization of Post-Harvest Pecan Processing -- 6. Microbiology and Sanitation -- 7. Pecan Composition -- 8. Methods for Measurement of Pecan Quality -- 9. Structure and Performance of the Pecan Market -- Appendix: Further Reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 3
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401114929
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Edition 1
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One: Directory Section -- Glass Fibre Materials for the Composites Industry -- Glass Fibre Materials Other Than for the Composites Industry -- Optical Fibres & Cables -- Two: Data Section -- Section 1: Continuous Filament Yarns -- Glass Fibre Materials for the Composites Industry -- Section 2: Reinforcements for Thermosets -- Section 3: Reinforcements for Thermoplastics -- Section 4: Reinforcements for Cement & Gypsum -- Section 5: Tissues, Surfacing Veils, Mats & Fabrics -- Glass Fibre Materials Other Than for the Composites Industry -- Section 6: Filtration Materials -- Section 7: Insulation Materials -- Section 8: Glass Fibre Fabrics for Printed Circuit Boards -- Section 9: Miscellaneous Materials -- Materials for the Optical Fibre Industry -- Section 10: Fibres -- Section 11: Fibre Cables -- Section 12: Optical Fibre Cable Support Members -- Late Entries -- Index to Advertisers.
    Description / Table of Contents: One: Directory SectionGlass Fibre Materials for the Composites Industry -- Glass Fibre Materials Other Than for the Composites Industry -- Optical Fibres & Cables -- Two: Data Section -- Section 1: Continuous Filament Yarns -- Glass Fibre Materials for the Composites Industry -- Section 2: Reinforcements for Thermosets -- Section 3: Reinforcements for Thermoplastics -- Section 4: Reinforcements for Cement & Gypsum -- Section 5: Tissues, Surfacing Veils, Mats & Fabrics -- Glass Fibre Materials Other Than for the Composites Industry -- Section 6: Filtration Materials -- Section 7: Insulation Materials -- Section 8: Glass Fibre Fabrics for Printed Circuit Boards -- Section 9: Miscellaneous Materials -- Materials for the Optical Fibre Industry -- Section 10: Fibres -- Section 11: Fibre Cables -- Section 12: Optical Fibre Cable Support Members -- Late Entries -- Index to Advertisers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 4
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401115049
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1: Information management -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Spatial data systems -- 1.3 Decision making -- 1.4 Organisations and their objectives -- 1.5 The management of information -- 1.6 Information networks -- 1.7 Information systems -- 1.8 Geo-information systems -- 1.9 Spatial decision support systems -- 2: Data for geo-information systems -- 2.1 Data into information -- 2.2 Describing geographic location -- 2.3 Objects and hierarchies -- 2.4 Maps and cartographic representation -- 2.5 Considerations in using maps -- 2.6 Map-based geo-information systems -- 2.7 Data derived from spatial analysis -- 2.8 Address-based spatial information -- 2.9 Postcodes -- 2.10 Other spatial datasets -- 2.11 Attribute data -- 2.12 Metadata -- 3: Geo-information databases -- 3.1 Choosing the right data structure -- 3.2 Data structures and data models -- 3.3 Spatial data models -- 3.4 Spatial data structures -- 3.5 Problems of three dimensional data -- 3.6 Temporal data model -- 3.7 Database management systems -- 3.8 Physical and logical database design -- 3.9 DBMS structures -- 3.10 Standard query language (SQL) -- 3.11 Object-oriented databases -- 4: Integrated approaches to GIS -- 4.1 Benefits of information integration -- 4.2 Integrated data models -- 4.3 Information networks -- 4.4 Integration with existing databases -- 4.5 Open systems environment -- 4.6 Integration frameworks -- 4.7 Corporate solutions -- 4.8 Organisational issues -- 4.9 Implementation strategies -- 4.10 Benefits and costs -- 5: Low cost spatial information systems -- 5.1 Low cost strategies -- 5.2 Development of the microcomputer -- 5.3 Availability of software -- 5.4 Developing technologies -- 5.5 Stand alone solutions -- 5.6 Network solutions -- 5.7 Data availability -- 5.8 Human resourcing issues -- 5.9 Implementation issues -- 5.10 Low cost GIS users -- 6: Copyright and legal issues -- 6.1 Who owns the data? -- 6.2 Law related to information -- 6.3 Access to information -- 6.4 Data ownership and copyright -- 6.5 Added value information -- 6.6 Liability and GIS -- 6.7 Accuracy of information -- 6.8 Inappropriate map usage -- 6.9 Data availability and government policy -- 7: Standards for spatial information -- 7.1 The role of standards -- 7.2 Standards organisations -- 7.3 Data transfer standards -- 7.4 UK National Transfer Format -- 7.5 US Spatial Data Transfer Standard -- 7.6 DIGEST -- 7.7 ASRP Raster Standard -- 7.8 Other standards -- 7.9 Importance of standards -- 8: Analysis functions in GIS -- 8.1 Analysis in GIS -- 8.2 Manipulation versus analysis -- 8.3 Query and manipulation in integrated solutions -- 8.4 Statistical analysis -- 8.5 Modelling of spatial data -- 8.6 Models for managing derived data -- 8.7 Metadatabases and data dictionaries -- 8.8 Developing operating procedures for analytical processes -- 9: Graphical user interfaces -- 9.1 Human-computer interface -- 9.2 User-friendly GIS -- 9.3 Generic interface types -- 9.4 User interfaces for decision support systems -- 9.5 GIS-independent user interfaces -- 9.6 Specific applications of graphical user interfaces -- 9.7 Issues of communication -- 9.8 Help facilities -- 10: Visualisation -- 10.1 Cartographic visualisation -- 10.2 Perception and patterns -- 10.3 Map design issues -- 10.4 Colour and symbolisation -- 10.5 Typology and text placement -- 10.6 Interactive map specifications -- 10.7 Scientific visualisation -- 10.8 Terrain representation -- 10.9 Three dimensional visualisation -- 10.10 Perspective cartography -- 10.11 Visualisaton of temporal information -- 10.12 Virtual reality -- 11: Image-based spatial information systems -- 11.1 Image-based information systems -- 11.2 Vertical aerial photography -- 11.3 Photogrammetric data collection -- 11.4 Recent technical advances -- 11.5 Photo interpretation -- 11.6 Orthophotos -- 11.7 Digital photogrammetry -- 11.8 Seamless aerial photography -- 11.9 Changing role of aerial photography in GIS -- 11.10 Remote sensing -- 11.11 Image analysis -- 11.12 Role of remote sensing -- 11.13 Integrated image-based systems -- 12: Multimedia and hypermaps -- 12.1 The multimedia concept -- 12.2 Multimedia data -- 12.3 Digital video -- 12.4 Sound -- 12.5 Animation -- 12.6 Hypertext concept -- 12.7 Hyperdocuments -- 12.8 Hypertext user interfaces -- 12.9 Hypermaps -- 12.10 Cartographic representation in multimedia -- 12.11 Integrated geo-based multimedia solutions -- Appendix A: Acronyms -- Appendix B: A summary of the main GIS and related software that has been developed for microcomputers.
    Abstract: This book was inspired by the revolution in geographical information systems during the late 1970s and 1980s which introduced to many the concept of computer-based information systems for spatially referenced data. The map, the aerial photograph and the satellite image were wedded to a database of textual information through the rapidly developing technology of powerful graphics workstations. This brought the skills of the geographer to a wide range of disciplines and specialists. But this book is not about the basic concepts of geographical information systems themselves. It is not about hardware or software per se, nor the integral concepts of geo-referenced data handling built into such systems; these are to be found in a growing number of introductory texts on the subject. Instead the focus of this book is on of geo-information management. the much wider issues While an understanding of the systems, their capabilities and limitations is necessary, of greater importance to the long term application of geographical understanding to problem solving is the wider context of information handling. Spatial data are becoming increasingly important in understanding the issues that confront the world. Chapter 1 is a discussion of the general issues which relate to management and information systems. It concludes with review of spatial decision support systems which are of increasing importance to the GIS community.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1: Information management1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Spatial data systems -- 1.3 Decision making -- 1.4 Organisations and their objectives -- 1.5 The management of information -- 1.6 Information networks -- 1.7 Information systems -- 1.8 Geo-information systems -- 1.9 Spatial decision support systems -- 2: Data for geo-information systems -- 2.1 Data into information -- 2.2 Describing geographic location -- 2.3 Objects and hierarchies -- 2.4 Maps and cartographic representation -- 2.5 Considerations in using maps -- 2.6 Map-based geo-information systems -- 2.7 Data derived from spatial analysis -- 2.8 Address-based spatial information -- 2.9 Postcodes -- 2.10 Other spatial datasets -- 2.11 Attribute data -- 2.12 Metadata -- 3: Geo-information databases -- 3.1 Choosing the right data structure -- 3.2 Data structures and data models -- 3.3 Spatial data models -- 3.4 Spatial data structures -- 3.5 Problems of three dimensional data -- 3.6 Temporal data model -- 3.7 Database management systems -- 3.8 Physical and logical database design -- 3.9 DBMS structures -- 3.10 Standard query language (SQL) -- 3.11 Object-oriented databases -- 4: Integrated approaches to GIS -- 4.1 Benefits of information integration -- 4.2 Integrated data models -- 4.3 Information networks -- 4.4 Integration with existing databases -- 4.5 Open systems environment -- 4.6 Integration frameworks -- 4.7 Corporate solutions -- 4.8 Organisational issues -- 4.9 Implementation strategies -- 4.10 Benefits and costs -- 5: Low cost spatial information systems -- 5.1 Low cost strategies -- 5.2 Development of the microcomputer -- 5.3 Availability of software -- 5.4 Developing technologies -- 5.5 Stand alone solutions -- 5.6 Network solutions -- 5.7 Data availability -- 5.8 Human resourcing issues -- 5.9 Implementation issues -- 5.10 Low cost GIS users -- 6: Copyright and legal issues -- 6.1 Who owns the data? -- 6.2 Law related to information -- 6.3 Access to information -- 6.4 Data ownership and copyright -- 6.5 Added value information -- 6.6 Liability and GIS -- 6.7 Accuracy of information -- 6.8 Inappropriate map usage -- 6.9 Data availability and government policy -- 7: Standards for spatial information -- 7.1 The role of standards -- 7.2 Standards organisations -- 7.3 Data transfer standards -- 7.4 UK National Transfer Format -- 7.5 US Spatial Data Transfer Standard -- 7.6 DIGEST -- 7.7 ASRP Raster Standard -- 7.8 Other standards -- 7.9 Importance of standards -- 8: Analysis functions in GIS -- 8.1 Analysis in GIS -- 8.2 Manipulation versus analysis -- 8.3 Query and manipulation in integrated solutions -- 8.4 Statistical analysis -- 8.5 Modelling of spatial data -- 8.6 Models for managing derived data -- 8.7 Metadatabases and data dictionaries -- 8.8 Developing operating procedures for analytical processes -- 9: Graphical user interfaces -- 9.1 Human-computer interface -- 9.2 User-friendly GIS -- 9.3 Generic interface types -- 9.4 User interfaces for decision support systems -- 9.5 GIS-independent user interfaces -- 9.6 Specific applications of graphical user interfaces -- 9.7 Issues of communication -- 9.8 Help facilities -- 10: Visualisation -- 10.1 Cartographic visualisation -- 10.2 Perception and patterns -- 10.3 Map design issues -- 10.4 Colour and symbolisation -- 10.5 Typology and text placement -- 10.6 Interactive map specifications -- 10.7 Scientific visualisation -- 10.8 Terrain representation -- 10.9 Three dimensional visualisation -- 10.10 Perspective cartography -- 10.11 Visualisaton of temporal information -- 10.12 Virtual reality -- 11: Image-based spatial information systems -- 11.1 Image-based information systems -- 11.2 Vertical aerial photography -- 11.3 Photogrammetric data collection -- 11.4 Recent technical advances -- 11.5 Photo interpretation -- 11.6 Orthophotos -- 11.7 Digital photogrammetry -- 11.8 Seamless aerial photography -- 11.9 Changing role of aerial photography in GIS -- 11.10 Remote sensing -- 11.11 Image analysis -- 11.12 Role of remote sensing -- 11.13 Integrated image-based systems -- 12: Multimedia and hypermaps -- 12.1 The multimedia concept -- 12.2 Multimedia data -- 12.3 Digital video -- 12.4 Sound -- 12.5 Animation -- 12.6 Hypertext concept -- 12.7 Hyperdocuments -- 12.8 Hypertext user interfaces -- 12.9 Hypermaps -- 12.10 Cartographic representation in multimedia -- 12.11 Integrated geo-based multimedia solutions -- Appendix A: Acronyms -- Appendix B: A summary of the main GIS and related software that has been developed for microcomputers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 5
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401114967
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Sixth edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 Growth and nutrition -- 3 Zygomycotina and Mastigomycotina -- 4 Ascomycotina -- 5 Basidiomycotina -- 6 Deuteromycotina -- 7 Dispersal in fungi -- 8 Fungal genetics -- 9 Ecology of saprotrophic fungi -- 10 Fungi as plant pathogens -- 11 Fungi as mutualistic symbionts -- 12 Fungi and human affairs -- Further reading: Books on fungi.
    Abstract: This book has passed through a number of editions each involving some modifications while retaining the general character of the first. The most substantial changes occurred in the fifth (1983), but that is now out-of-date. Mycology has not been immune from the rapid evolution of biology in the past decade and the preparation was a long way beyond the capacity of the older writer (C.T.I.). So a younger one (H.J.H.) has collaborated with him. Substantial changes have been made throughout, particularly in relation to taxonomy but in general Chapters 1-7 have undergone relatively little revision. However, this is not true of Chapters 8-12 where the influence of the younger author is paramount. The basic idea of the book remains, namely to present fungi as living organisms profoundly affecting the lives of other kinds of living organisms, especially Man. Their study is of the greatest importance and what is more it is great fun. Many of the diagrams have been retained, but some have been redrawn and new ones added. Weare pleased to acknowledge the patience and artistic skills of Mrs Lindsay J. Wilson in producing these. Some coloured plates have also been introduced from photographs taken by H.J .H.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 Growth and nutrition -- 3 Zygomycotina and Mastigomycotina -- 4 Ascomycotina -- 5 Basidiomycotina -- 6 Deuteromycotina -- 7 Dispersal in fungi -- 8 Fungal genetics -- 9 Ecology of saprotrophic fungi -- 10 Fungi as plant pathogens -- 11 Fungi as mutualistic symbionts -- 12 Fungi and human affairs -- Further reading: Books on fungi.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 6
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401180900
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Fundamentals For All Capacitors -- Application Information -- 2 Ceramic Capacitors -- Application Information -- 3 Plastic Film Capacitors -- Application Information -- 4 Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors -- Production Technology -- Electro-mechanical Considerations -- 5 Tantalum Capacitors -- Tantalum Foil Style -- Wet Tantalum Style -- Solid Tantalum Style -- Application Information -- 6 Glass Capacitors -- Application Information -- 7 Mica Capacitors -- Application Information -- Appendix A Capacitor Selection Guidelines -- Ceramic -- Paper/Plastic Dielectric -- Aluminum Electrolytic -- Tantalum Electrolytic -- Glass -- Mica -- Trimmer Capacitors -- Appendix B Equations and Symbol Definitions -- Basic Capacitor Formulas -- Metric Prefixes -- Symbols.
    Abstract: A long and varied experience in many areas of electronic circuit design has convinced me that capacitors are the most misunderstood and misused electronic component. This book provides practical guidance in the understanding, construction, use, and application of capacitors. Theory, combined with circuit application advice, will help to under­ stand what goes on in each component and in the final design. All chapters are arranged with the theory of the dielectric type discussed first, followed by circuit application information. With all chapters arranged in the same manner, this will make reading and using this book for reference easier. A practical glossary of terms used in the capacitor industry is included. The first chapter covers basic information that applies to all types of capacitors. Each following chapter addresses a different capacitor dielectric. This book could have been titled: 'Everything You Wanted To Know About Capacitors, But Were Afraid To Ask .. .' ix Preface THE CAPACITOR HANDBOOK Chapter 1 Fundamentals For All Capacitors For all practical purposes, consider only the parallel plate capacitor as illustrated in Fig. 1.1-two conductors or electrodes separated by a dielectric material of uniform thickness. The conductors can be any material that will conduct electricity easily. The dielectric must be a poor conductor-an insulator. Conductor (Electrode) Dielectric ,;~;...--~ Conductor (Electrode) 1..-----Wire to Outside World Fig. 1.1 The Parallel-Plate Capacitor Fig. 1.2 illustrates the symbol for a capacitor used in schematic diagrams of electronic circuits. The symbol resembles a parallel-plate model.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Fundamentals For All CapacitorsApplication Information -- 2 Ceramic Capacitors -- Application Information -- 3 Plastic Film Capacitors -- Application Information -- 4 Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors -- Production Technology -- Electro-mechanical Considerations -- 5 Tantalum Capacitors -- Tantalum Foil Style -- Wet Tantalum Style -- Solid Tantalum Style -- Application Information -- 6 Glass Capacitors -- Application Information -- 7 Mica Capacitors -- Application Information -- Appendix A Capacitor Selection Guidelines -- Ceramic -- Paper/Plastic Dielectric -- Aluminum Electrolytic -- Tantalum Electrolytic -- Glass -- Mica -- Trimmer Capacitors -- Appendix B Equations and Symbol Definitions -- Basic Capacitor Formulas -- Metric Prefixes -- Symbols.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 7
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401121323
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1048 p)
    Edition: 10th edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: A -- B -- C -- D -- E -- F -- G -- H -- I -- J -- K -- L -- M -- N -- O -- P -- Q -- R -- S -- T -- U -- V -- W -- X -- Y -- Z.
    Abstract: This edition of over 60 000 entries, including significantly more than 20% new or revised material, not only updates its predecessor but also continues the policy of extending coverage to areas dealt with only sparsely in previous editions. Special attention has been paid to the Far East, Australasia and Latin America in general, and to the People's Republic of China in particular. The cross-referencing between a defunct organization and its successor (indicated by ex and now) introduced into the last edition, has been extended. Otherwise the policies adopted in previous editions have been retained. All kinds of organizations are included - international, national, governmental, individual, large or small - but strictly local organizations have been omitted. The subject scope includes activities of all kinds, in the fields of commerce and industry, education, law, politics, public administration, religion, recreation, medicine, science and technology. The country of origin of a national organization is given in brackets, unless it is the home country of the title language or can be deduced readily from the title itself. Acronyms of parent bodies of subsidiary organizations are also added in brackets. Equivalences are used to link acronyms in different languages for the same organization. A select bibliography guides the reader to specialist works providing more detailed information.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 8
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401123167
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xix, 460 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 The Wiggler Field and Electron Dynamics -- 3 Incoherent Undulator Radiation -- 4 Coherent Emission: Linear Theory -- 5 Coherent Emission: Nonlinear Theory -- 6 Sideband Instabilities -- 7 Coherent harmonic Radiation -- 8 Optical Guiding -- 9 OScillator Configurations -- 10 Electromagnetic-wave Wigglers -- 11 Chaos in Free-electron Lasers -- Author Index.
    Abstract: At the time that we decided to begin work on this book, several other volumes on the free-electron laser had either been published or were in press. The earliest work of which we were aware was published in 1985 by Dr T. C. Marshall of Columbia University [1]. This book dealt with the full range of research on free-electron lasers, including an overview of the extant experiments. However, the field has matured a great deal since that time and, in our judgement, the time was ripe for a more extensive work which includes the most recent advances in the field. The fundamental work in this field has largely been approached from two distinct and, unfortunately, separate viewpoints. On the one hand, free-electron lasers at sub-millimetre and longer wavelengths driven by low-energy and high-current electron beams have been pursued by the plasma physics and microwave tube communities. This work has confined itself largely to the high-gain regimes in which collective effects may play an important role. On the other hand, short-wavelength free-electron lasers in the infrared and optical regimes have been pursued by the accelerator and laser physics community. Due to the high-energy and low-current electron beams appropriate to this spectral range, these experiments have operated largely in the low-gain single-particle regimes. The most recent books published on the free-electron laser by Dr C. A.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 The Wiggler Field and Electron Dynamics -- 3 Incoherent Undulator Radiation -- 4 Coherent Emission: Linear Theory -- 5 Coherent Emission: Nonlinear Theory -- 6 Sideband Instabilities -- 7 Coherent harmonic Radiation -- 8 Optical Guiding -- 9 OScillator Configurations -- 10 Electromagnetic-wave Wigglers -- 11 Chaos in Free-electron Lasers -- Author Index.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 9
    ISBN: 9789401123020
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVI, 260 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Most politicians have jumped on the conservation bandwagon, and nobody running for public office these days can afford to take an overtly anti­ environment stand. The fascination that children have for nature, the gen­ erous donations people make to conservation organizations, the votes cast for 'Green Parties,' the continuing popularity of zoos and wildlife films, and the strong sales of books about the environment all provide evidence to politicians that the general public supports the idea of conservation. Conservation has become a major issue for governments. No longer is it necessary for conservationists to campaign for getting the cause on the agenda: it is already there, at least as a talking point. The issue now is how to convert this generalized interest into real action. And among the many priorities competing for attention, how is a govern­ ment (or a private organization) to decide wh at to do first? From a very limited budget - for budgets will always be limited - what is the package of activities that is most likely to lead to the results that the public wants? lan Spellerberg attempts to address these questions which are at the he art of modern conservation action. It is relatively easy to prescribe useful activities that will benefit both the environment and the public at large.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 10
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401128582
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction to Reliability and Risk Analysis -- 1.1 Historical perspective -- 1.2 Objectives of reliability and risk analyses -- 1.3 Subject areas. Modelling -- 1.4 Basic concepts -- 1.5 Planning, execution and use of reliability analysis -- 1.6 Planning, execution and use of risk analysis -- 1.7 Discussion -- 1.8 Problems -- 2 Basic Reliability and Risk Analysis Methods -- 2.1 Use of statistics -- 2.2 Failure mode and effect analysis -- 2.3 Fault tree analysis -- 2.4 Cause consequence analysis/Event tree analysis -- 2.5 Other reliability and risk analysis methods -- 2.6 Problems -- 3 Binary Models for Analysing System Reliability -- 3.1 Structural properties -- 3.2 Computing system reliability -- 3.3 Non-repairable systems -- 3.4 Repairable systems -- 3.5 Reliability importance measures -- 3.6 Dependent components -- 3.7 Problems -- 4 Multistate Models for Analysing System Reliability -- 4.1 Multistate monotone systems -- 4.2 Computing system reliability -- 4.3 A time dependent model -- 4.4 Discussion -- 4.5 Problems -- 5 Optimal Replacement Policies -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 General minimal repair, age replacement model -- 5.3 Block replacement model -- 5.4 On-condition replacement models -- 5.5 Problems -- 6 Safety Management -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Safety management in a company -- 6.3 Reliability management of a product -- 6.4 Problems -- 7 Some Applications -- 7.1 Risk analysis of an offshore oil and gas producing platform -- 7.2 Availability and life cycle costing in a gas project -- 7.3 Availability and life cycle costing related to a process instrumentation system -- 7.4 Discussion -- 7.5 Problems -- Appendicies -- A Probability Theory -- A.l Probabilities -- A.1.1 Probability concepts -- A.1.2 Rules for combining probabilities -- A.1.3 Conditional probabilities -- A.1.4 Independence -- A.2 Stochastic variables -- A.3 Some proofs -- A.3.1 Proof of formula (A.4) -- A.3.2 Probability calculations in event trees -- A.3.3 Proof of an error bound for the approximations (4.2) and (4.3). -- A.4 Problems -- B Stochastic Failure Models -- B.1 Non-repairable units -- B.1.1 Basic concepts -- B.1.2 Some common lifetime distributions -- B.2 Repairable units -- B.3 Binomial distribution -- B.4 Gamma function -- B.5 Problems -- C Statistical Analysis of Reliability Data -- C.1 Identification of lifetime distribution, Hazard plotting -- C.2 Estimation of parameters in lifetime distributions -- C.3 Statistical analysis of non-homogeneous Poisson processes -- C.4 Data sources -- C.5 Problems -- D Markov Models -- D.1 Introduction -- D.2 One component. No repair -- D.3 One repairable component -- D.4 Two repairable components -- D.5 Birth and death processes -- D.6 General formulation of a Markov process -- D.7 Problems -- E More on Stochastic Processes -- E.1 Renewal processes -- E.2 Renewal reward processes -- E.3 Regenerative processes -- E.4 Counting processes -- E.5 Proofs of some results in Chapters 3 and 5 -- E.5.1 Section 3.4.1 -- E.5.2 Section 3.4.2 -- E.5.3 Section 5.4 -- F An Algorithm for Calculating System Reliability -- G A Minimization Technique.
    Abstract: Analysis of reliability and risk is an important and integral part of planning, construction and operation of all technical systems. To be able to perform such analyses systematically and scientifically, there is usually a need for special methods and models. This book presents the most important of these. Particular emphasis has been placed on the ideas and the motivation for the use of the various methods and models. It has been an objective to compile a book which provides practising engineers and engineering graduates with the concepts and basic techniques for evaluating reliability and risk. It is hoped that the material presented will make them so familiar with the subject that they can carry out various types of analyses themselves and understand and make use of the more detailed applications and additional material which is available in the journals and publications associated with their own discipline. It has also been an objective to put reliability and risk analyses in context - how such analyses should be used in design and operation of components and systems. The material presented is modern and a large part of the book is at research level. The book focuses on analysis of repairable systems, not only non-repairable systems which have traditionally been given most attention in textbooks on reliability theory. Since most real-life systems are repairable, methods for analysing repairable systems are an important area of research. The book presents general methods, with most applications taken from offshore petro­ leum activities.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction to Reliability and Risk Analysis1.1 Historical perspective -- 1.2 Objectives of reliability and risk analyses -- 1.3 Subject areas. Modelling -- 1.4 Basic concepts -- 1.5 Planning, execution and use of reliability analysis -- 1.6 Planning, execution and use of risk analysis -- 1.7 Discussion -- 1.8 Problems -- 2 Basic Reliability and Risk Analysis Methods -- 2.1 Use of statistics -- 2.2 Failure mode and effect analysis -- 2.3 Fault tree analysis -- 2.4 Cause consequence analysis/Event tree analysis -- 2.5 Other reliability and risk analysis methods -- 2.6 Problems -- 3 Binary Models for Analysing System Reliability -- 3.1 Structural properties -- 3.2 Computing system reliability -- 3.3 Non-repairable systems -- 3.4 Repairable systems -- 3.5 Reliability importance measures -- 3.6 Dependent components -- 3.7 Problems -- 4 Multistate Models for Analysing System Reliability -- 4.1 Multistate monotone systems -- 4.2 Computing system reliability -- 4.3 A time dependent model -- 4.4 Discussion -- 4.5 Problems -- 5 Optimal Replacement Policies -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 General minimal repair, age replacement model -- 5.3 Block replacement model -- 5.4 On-condition replacement models -- 5.5 Problems -- 6 Safety Management -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Safety management in a company -- 6.3 Reliability management of a product -- 6.4 Problems -- 7 Some Applications -- 7.1 Risk analysis of an offshore oil and gas producing platform -- 7.2 Availability and life cycle costing in a gas project -- 7.3 Availability and life cycle costing related to a process instrumentation system -- 7.4 Discussion -- 7.5 Problems -- Appendicies -- A Probability Theory -- A.l Probabilities -- A.1.1 Probability concepts -- A.1.2 Rules for combining probabilities -- A.1.3 Conditional probabilities -- A.1.4 Independence -- A.2 Stochastic variables -- A.3 Some proofs -- A.3.1 Proof of formula (A.4) -- A.3.2 Probability calculations in event trees -- A.3.3 Proof of an error bound for the approximations (4.2) and (4.3). -- A.4 Problems -- B Stochastic Failure Models -- B.1 Non-repairable units -- B.1.1 Basic concepts -- B.1.2 Some common lifetime distributions -- B.2 Repairable units -- B.3 Binomial distribution -- B.4 Gamma function -- B.5 Problems -- C Statistical Analysis of Reliability Data -- C.1 Identification of lifetime distribution, Hazard plotting -- C.2 Estimation of parameters in lifetime distributions -- C.3 Statistical analysis of non-homogeneous Poisson processes -- C.4 Data sources -- C.5 Problems -- D Markov Models -- D.1 Introduction -- D.2 One component. No repair -- D.3 One repairable component -- D.4 Two repairable components -- D.5 Birth and death processes -- D.6 General formulation of a Markov process -- D.7 Problems -- E More on Stochastic Processes -- E.1 Renewal processes -- E.2 Renewal reward processes -- E.3 Regenerative processes -- E.4 Counting processes -- E.5 Proofs of some results in Chapters 3 and 5 -- E.5.1 Section 3.4.1 -- E.5.2 Section 3.4.2 -- E.5.3 Section 5.4 -- F An Algorithm for Calculating System Reliability -- G A Minimization Technique.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 11
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401123747
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 229 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The baculoviruses -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Isolation and host range -- 1.3 Structure and classification -- 1.4 Baculovirus replication in vivo -- 1.5 Baculovirus replication in vitro -- 1.6 Genetic engineering of baculovirus insecticides -- 2 The development of baculovirus expression vectors -- 2.1 Introduction and historical perspective -- 2.2 The merits of the baculovirus expression system -- 2.3 General principles for inserting foreign genes into the baculovirus genome -- 2.4 Baculovirus transfer vectors -- 2.5 Selection of recombinant viruses -- 3 Processing of foreign proteins synthesized using baculovirus vectors in insect cells -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Glycosylation -- 3.3 Phosphorylation, acylation and amidation -- 3.4 Proteolytic processing -- 3.5 Cellular targeting and secretion -- 3.6 Tertiary and quaternary structure formation -- 3.7 Expression of viral genes -- 3.8 Expression of bacterial and fungal genes -- 3.9 Post-transcriptional processing -- 4 Construction of transfer vectors containing the foreign gene -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Isolation of foreign gene coding sequences -- 4.3 Modifying the ends of DNA molecules -- 4.4 Preparation of the transfer vector -- 4.5 DNA ligations -- 4.6 Transformation of bacteria -- 4.7 Screening for recombinant baculovirus transfer vectors -- 4.8 Analysis of recombinant transfer vectors -- 4.9 Isolation of highly purified plasmid DNA (maxi-preps) -- 5 Insect cell culture media and maintenance of insect cell lines -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Cell lines -- 5.3 Culture media -- 5.4 Preparation of culture media -- 5.5 Glassware and disposable plasticware -- 5.6 Insect cell culture -- 5.7 A guide to Sf cell seeding densities for experimental work -- 5.8 Freezing, storage and recovery of insect cells in liquid nitrogen -- 5.9 A guide to adapting cells to serum-free media -- 6 Propagation, titration and purification of AcMNPV in cell culture -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Infection of cells with virus for experimental work -- 6.3 Titration of virus by plaque-assay -- 6.4 Plaque-picking and plaque-purification -- 6.5 Amplification of virus stocks -- 6.6 Large-scale production of virus for the purification of virus particles -- 6.7 Purification of infectious virus DNA -- 6.8 Titration of virus by TCID50 -- 7 Production and selection of recombinant virus -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Preparation of linear AcMNPV.lacZ (or AcMNPV.SC) DNA -- 7.3 Co-transfection of insect cells -- 7.4 Separation of parental and recombinant viruses by plaque-assay -- 7.5 Plaque-purification and amplification of recombinant virus stocks -- 7.6 Amplification and detection of recombinant viruses by limiting dilution and dot-blot hybridization -- 8 Characterization of recombinant viruses -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Analysis of recombinant virus genomes -- 8.3 Analysis of foreign gene expression by polyacrylamide gel electophoresis, using unlabelled or radiolabelled cell proteins -- 8.4 Analysis of recombinant protein synthesis in insect cells using immunological techniques -- 8.5 Analysis of post-translational processing events in insect cells -- 8.6 Analysis of transcription in recombinant virus-infected cells -- 9 Scaling up the production of recombinant protein in insect cells; laboratory bench level -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Large-scale culture of insect cells -- 9.3 The importance of highly infectious virus stocks -- 9.4 Multiplicity of infection -- 9.5 The optimum time to harvest virus-infected cells -- 9.6 Purification of recombinant protein from infected cell cultures -- 10 Propagation of baculoviruses in insect larvae -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Rearing insects in the laboratory -- 10.3 Infection of insect larvae with polyhedra from cell culture -- 10.4 Purification of polyhedra from infected larvae -- 10.5 Bioassays of polyhedra -- 10.6 Purification of virus particles and DNA from polyhedra -- 10.7 Isolation of virus particles from infected larvae to establish infections in cell culture -- 10.8 Preparation of semi-synthetic insect diet -- 11 Trouble-shooting guide -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Insertion of foreign gene coding sequences into transfer vectors -- 11.3 Cell culture -- 11.4 Preparation of virus stocks and infectious DNA -- 11.5 Co-transfections -- 11.6 Baculovirus plaque-assays -- 11.7 Screening for recombinant viruses -- 11.8 Instability of recombinant viruses -- 11.9 Poor yields of recombinant protein -- Appendix A list of selected suppliers -- References.
    Abstract: The decision to write a book about the practical aspects of the baculovirus expression system stems from the numerous phone calls for help we have had, and from the many visitors to our labora­ tories requiring assistance to find the elusive polyhedrin-negative virus containing their favourite gene. We have also organized two expression system workshops and from the manuals we wrote for these, it seemed a logical progression to extend them into book form. We appreciate that those who are 'old-hands' at the baculovirus expression system may have differing views on some of our procedures, but the methods in this book are presented in the light of our own experiences in the laboratory and from our practical workshops, and we hope that the book will be especially useful to those new to the system. The first three chapters give the background information to the baculovirus expression system, and includes advice on how to choose the right transfer vector and discusses the various methods that are available to select recombinant viruses. The practical chapters concentrate on those aspects which are novel to the baculovirus system (insect cell culture, virus amplification and titration, etc. ) and, in general, leave the standard molecular biological techniques to the other excellent laboratory manuals that are available. However, for completeness sake and to avoid constant reference to other manuals, we have included brief details of some standard techniques where they are integral to the success of the baculovirus protocols.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The baculoviruses1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Isolation and host range -- 1.3 Structure and classification -- 1.4 Baculovirus replication in vivo -- 1.5 Baculovirus replication in vitro -- 1.6 Genetic engineering of baculovirus insecticides -- 2 The development of baculovirus expression vectors -- 2.1 Introduction and historical perspective -- 2.2 The merits of the baculovirus expression system -- 2.3 General principles for inserting foreign genes into the baculovirus genome -- 2.4 Baculovirus transfer vectors -- 2.5 Selection of recombinant viruses -- 3 Processing of foreign proteins synthesized using baculovirus vectors in insect cells -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Glycosylation -- 3.3 Phosphorylation, acylation and amidation -- 3.4 Proteolytic processing -- 3.5 Cellular targeting and secretion -- 3.6 Tertiary and quaternary structure formation -- 3.7 Expression of viral genes -- 3.8 Expression of bacterial and fungal genes -- 3.9 Post-transcriptional processing -- 4 Construction of transfer vectors containing the foreign gene -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Isolation of foreign gene coding sequences -- 4.3 Modifying the ends of DNA molecules -- 4.4 Preparation of the transfer vector -- 4.5 DNA ligations -- 4.6 Transformation of bacteria -- 4.7 Screening for recombinant baculovirus transfer vectors -- 4.8 Analysis of recombinant transfer vectors -- 4.9 Isolation of highly purified plasmid DNA (maxi-preps) -- 5 Insect cell culture media and maintenance of insect cell lines -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Cell lines -- 5.3 Culture media -- 5.4 Preparation of culture media -- 5.5 Glassware and disposable plasticware -- 5.6 Insect cell culture -- 5.7 A guide to Sf cell seeding densities for experimental work -- 5.8 Freezing, storage and recovery of insect cells in liquid nitrogen -- 5.9 A guide to adapting cells to serum-free media -- 6 Propagation, titration and purification of AcMNPV in cell culture -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Infection of cells with virus for experimental work -- 6.3 Titration of virus by plaque-assay -- 6.4 Plaque-picking and plaque-purification -- 6.5 Amplification of virus stocks -- 6.6 Large-scale production of virus for the purification of virus particles -- 6.7 Purification of infectious virus DNA -- 6.8 Titration of virus by TCID50 -- 7 Production and selection of recombinant virus -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Preparation of linear AcMNPV.lacZ (or AcMNPV.SC) DNA -- 7.3 Co-transfection of insect cells -- 7.4 Separation of parental and recombinant viruses by plaque-assay -- 7.5 Plaque-purification and amplification of recombinant virus stocks -- 7.6 Amplification and detection of recombinant viruses by limiting dilution and dot-blot hybridization -- 8 Characterization of recombinant viruses -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Analysis of recombinant virus genomes -- 8.3 Analysis of foreign gene expression by polyacrylamide gel electophoresis, using unlabelled or radiolabelled cell proteins -- 8.4 Analysis of recombinant protein synthesis in insect cells using immunological techniques -- 8.5 Analysis of post-translational processing events in insect cells -- 8.6 Analysis of transcription in recombinant virus-infected cells -- 9 Scaling up the production of recombinant protein in insect cells; laboratory bench level -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Large-scale culture of insect cells -- 9.3 The importance of highly infectious virus stocks -- 9.4 Multiplicity of infection -- 9.5 The optimum time to harvest virus-infected cells -- 9.6 Purification of recombinant protein from infected cell cultures -- 10 Propagation of baculoviruses in insect larvae -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Rearing insects in the laboratory -- 10.3 Infection of insect larvae with polyhedra from cell culture -- 10.4 Purification of polyhedra from infected larvae -- 10.5 Bioassays of polyhedra -- 10.6 Purification of virus particles and DNA from polyhedra -- 10.7 Isolation of virus particles from infected larvae to establish infections in cell culture -- 10.8 Preparation of semi-synthetic insect diet -- 11 Trouble-shooting guide -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Insertion of foreign gene coding sequences into transfer vectors -- 11.3 Cell culture -- 11.4 Preparation of virus stocks and infectious DNA -- 11.5 Co-transfections -- 11.6 Baculovirus plaque-assays -- 11.7 Screening for recombinant viruses -- 11.8 Instability of recombinant viruses -- 11.9 Poor yields of recombinant protein -- Appendix A list of selected suppliers -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 12
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131209
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xii, 240 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 A simple factorial grazing experiment measured on 27 occasions -- 3 A 3 × 3 factorial with quantitative levels -- 4 Definable within-individual comparisons -- 5 Covariance -- 6 Pre-treatment observations in the design of experiments -- 7 Weighted regression, goodness-of-fit and related topics -- 8 Environmental variables -- 9 Correlation between series of random variables -- 10 Response (reaction) times -- Bibliographical note.
    Abstract: There are many excellent books on general statistical methods in agricul­ tural and biological research. These books cover a broad range of methods without going into detail on specialized topics. A number of topics including regression analysis, design of experiments, biological assay and categorical analysis have received in-depth treatment in specialized texts. Little appears in standard textbooks on experiments in which observations form sequences. The live weights of animals during a long-term experiment provide a familiar example of data forming a sequence, but many others occur: for example, moisture content of segments of soil cores, successive counts of insects in an orchard and hormone levels in blood over a period. Correla­ tions are likely to be found among the observations in all these examples. The book by Goldstein (1979) provided the first systematic coverage of the principles involved in longitudinal studies, but is mainly concerned with observational studies on humans. The main aims of this book are to provide research workers with methods of analysing data from comparative experiments with sequential obser­ vations and to demonstrate special features of the design of such experi­ ments. These aims are achieved by working through sets of data.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 A simple factorial grazing experiment measured on 27 occasions -- 3 A 3 × 3 factorial with quantitative levels -- 4 Definable within-individual comparisons -- 5 Covariance -- 6 Pre-treatment observations in the design of experiments -- 7 Weighted regression, goodness-of-fit and related topics -- 8 Environmental variables -- 9 Correlation between series of random variables -- 10 Response (reaction) times -- Bibliographical note.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 13
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131285
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (viii, 421 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Systems -- 1 Overview of manufacturing systems analysis in the technological age -- 2 Systems concepts -- Two Manufacturing -- 3 A conceptual model of a manufacturing system -- Three Systems Engineering -- 4 The general systems approach to problem-solving -- 5 Computer simulation in manufacturing systems analysis -- Four Manufacturing Systems -- 6 A design and evaluation methodology of manufacturing systems -- Appendices -- A Survey of traditional and current methods used for production planning and control of manufacturing systems -- A.1 Overview of production planning and control -- A.2 Traditional methodologies -- A.3 Integrated production planning and control -- A.4 Conclusion -- B Sample company document defining the system requirements for the control of supplies and services -- B.1 Introduction -- B.2 Objective -- B.3 Requirement of quality system -- C The PCModel instruction set -- C.1 Object movement -- C.2 Routeing control -- C.3 Arithmetic operation -- C.4 Data input/output -- References.
    Abstract: A technological book is written and published for one of two reasons: it either renders some other book in the same field obsolete or breaks new ground in the sense that a gap is filled. The present book aims to do the latter. On my return from industry to an academic career, I started writing this book because I had seen that a gap existed. Although a great deal of information appeared in the published literature about various technical aspects of advanced manufacturing technology (AMT), surprisingly little had been written about the systems con­ text within which the sophisticated hardware and software of AMT are utilized to increase efficiency. Therefore, I have attempted in this book to show how structured approaches in the design and evaluation of modern manufacturing plant may be adopted, with the objective of improving the performance of the factory as a whole. I hope this book will be a contribution to the newly recognized, multidisciplinary engineering function known as manufacturing sys­ tems engineering. The text has been designed specifically to demonstrate the systems aspects of modern manufacturing operations, including: systems con­ cepts of manufacturing operation; manufacturing systems modelling and evalua­ tion; and the structured design of manufacturing systems~ One of the major difficulties associated with writing a text of this nature stems from the diversity of the topics involved. I have attempted to solve this problem by adopting an overall framework into which the relevant topics are fitted.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Systems1 Overview of manufacturing systems analysis in the technological age -- 2 Systems concepts -- Two Manufacturing -- 3 A conceptual model of a manufacturing system -- Three Systems Engineering -- 4 The general systems approach to problem-solving -- 5 Computer simulation in manufacturing systems analysis -- Four Manufacturing Systems -- 6 A design and evaluation methodology of manufacturing systems -- Appendices -- A Survey of traditional and current methods used for production planning and control of manufacturing systems -- A.1 Overview of production planning and control -- A.2 Traditional methodologies -- A.3 Integrated production planning and control -- A.4 Conclusion -- B Sample company document defining the system requirements for the control of supplies and services -- B.1 Introduction -- B.2 Objective -- B.3 Requirement of quality system -- C The PCModel instruction set -- C.1 Object movement -- C.2 Routeing control -- C.3 Arithmetic operation -- C.4 Data input/output -- References.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 14
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401122948
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (IX, 255 p) , online resource
    Edition: Sixth Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Systems of units -- The Dictionary A-Z -- Appendices -- A. Fundamental physical constants -- B. Standardization committees and conferences -- C. Tables of weights and measures -- D. Conversion tables -- E. Conversion factors for SI and CGS units -- References.
    Abstract: units have been included. References, which now number approximately 650, have been brought up to date. The most recently accepted values of the physical constants have been provided. Our thanks go to all those who, since the fifth edition, have helped in this revision by suggestions. In particular the authors express their gratitude to Jane M. Jerrard who, with enthusiasm, put the text into a computer and eliminated the editorial scissors and paste and simplified the onerous and long task of producing a text from the fragmented material of the revision. In the preface to the fifth edition it was suggested that the book provided at that time the most complete and up-to-date information of its kind available. The authors again make the same claim for this sixth edition. H. G. JERRARD D. B. McNEILL Warsash Newtownards Southampton Northern Ireland England Preface to the first edition The intense specialization that occurs in science today has meant that scientists working in one field are often not familiar with the nomenclature used by their colleagues in other fields. This is particularly so in physics. This dictionary is designed to help overcome this difficulty by giving information about the units, dimensionless numbers and scales which have been used, or are still being used, throughout the world. Some four hundred entries are provided and these are supplemented by about five hundred references. The definition of each entry is given together with relevant historical facts.
    Description / Table of Contents: Systems of unitsThe Dictionary A-Z -- Appendices -- A. Fundamental physical constants -- B. Standardization committees and conferences -- C. Tables of weights and measures -- D. Conversion tables -- E. Conversion factors for SI and CGS units -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 15
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401123068
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVI, 224 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Mars in the Solar System -- 1.1 The orbit and movements of Mars -- 1.2 Dimensions and mass -- 1.3 The Martian seasons -- 1.4 The pattern of discovery -- 1.5 Albedo markings -- 2 Spacecraft Exploration Of The Red Planet -- 2.1 Early Mars missions -- 2.2 Mariner 9 -- 2.3 Soviet Mars exploration -- 2.4 The Viking missions -- 2.5 The Soviet Phobos mission -- 3 The Present Face of Mars -- 3.1 The topography of Mars -- 3.2 Physiographic provinces -- 3.3 Thermal inertia mapping -- 3.4 The stratigraphy of Mars -- 3.5 Summary -- 4 The Atmosphere and Weather -- 4.1 The composition of the atmosphere -- 4.2 Atmospheric pressure variations -- 4.3 Isotopic abundances in the atmosphere -- 4.4 Atmospheric circulation pattern -- 4.5 Clouds -- 5 The Interior of Mars -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The figure and gravity of Mars -- 5.3 Internal density profile -- 5.4 Composition of the interior -- 5.5 Differentiation of the Martian crust -- 6 The Ancient Cratered Terrain -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 The Martian cratering record -- 6.3 Martian impact basins -- 6.4 Morphology of impact craters -- 6.5 Crater ejecta morphology -- 6.6 Channelling on the cratered plateau -- 6.7 Intercrater plains -- 6.8 Volcanoes of the cratered plateau -- 6.9 The geological story as revealed by the upland rocks -- 7 The Central Volcanoes of Mars -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Volcano distribution -- 7.3 Classification of volcano types -- 7.4 Volcano ages -- 7.5 Highland paterae -- 7.6 Shield volcanoes and paterae -- 7.7 Martian shields -- 7.8 Older Tharsis volcanoes -- 7.9 Alba Patera -- 7.10 The shield volcanoes of Elysium -- 7.11 Apollinaris Patera -- 7.12 Central volcanism on Mars -- 8 The Plains of Mars -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Noachian and Early Hesperian plains -- 8.3 Hesperian-age flow plains -- 8.4 The Medusae Fossae plains -- 8.5 Tempe Terra plains province -- 8.6 Volcanic plains of Amazonian age -- 8.7 Plains deposits of Hellas -- 8.8 The northern plains -- 8.9 Plains and major resurfacing events in Martian history -- 9 The Equatorial Canyons -- 9.1 General features of Valles Marineris -- 9.2 Details of canyon physiography -- 9.3 General form of canyon walls -- 9.4 Wall retreat and landslide deposits -- 9.5 Wall retreat - tributary canyon development -- 9.6 Interior deposits -- 9.7 Formation of the canyon system -- 10 Martian Channels and Chaotic Terrain -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Valley networks in the ancient cratered terrain -- 10.3 Outflow channels -- 10.4 Fretted channels -- 10.5 Chaotic terrain -- 11 The Polar Regions, Wind And Volatile Activity -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Nature of the polar caps -- 11.3 Laminated polar deposits -- 11.4 High-latitude plains and dune fields -- 11.5 Wind activity on Mars -- 12 The Geological History of Mars -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The tectonic history of Mars -- 12.3 The evolution of Tharsis -- 12.4 Some final thoughts concerning Tharsis -- 12.5 The crustal dichotomy -- 12.6 The geological development of Mars -- 12.7 Climatic and volatile history -- 13 The Next Steps -- 13.1 Future Mars missions -- 13.2 Climate and the search for life -- 13.3 Epilogue -- Appendices -- A Astronomical Data -- B Phobos and Deimos -- C Model Chronologies for Mars -- D Stratigraphy of Martian Geological Features and Units.
    Abstract: As I write this short preface, the red orb of Mars is high in the eastern sky, and is brighter than it has been for many years. Last night my telescope again revealed the strange polar hood which is a feature of the planet at this time in its cycle. Because of its current prominence in the night sky, it is a very appropriate time to bring together and reappraise what we know of Mars and look forward to the next wave of planetary exploration. The initial notion of writing a book about Mars is an exciting one; the practicalities involved in working through and completing the project are, however, more than a trifle exacting. The first problem I encountered was the sheer vastness of the library of information about Mars which now exists. The second was the natural extension of the first, that is, how best to analyse it and reach widely acceptable interpretations. I have tried to write the story of Mars in a logical and unbiased way, however, we all have our individual prejudices, and I would be less than truthful if I did not admit to personal bias here and there. With this in mind, I apologise to any authors who may feel either misinterpreted or less than adequately acknowledged. The project is now completed and has been superbly prepared by Chapman & Hall.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Mars in the Solar System1.1 The orbit and movements of Mars -- 1.2 Dimensions and mass -- 1.3 The Martian seasons -- 1.4 The pattern of discovery -- 1.5 Albedo markings -- 2 Spacecraft Exploration Of The Red Planet -- 2.1 Early Mars missions -- 2.2 Mariner 9 -- 2.3 Soviet Mars exploration -- 2.4 The Viking missions -- 2.5 The Soviet Phobos mission -- 3 The Present Face of Mars -- 3.1 The topography of Mars -- 3.2 Physiographic provinces -- 3.3 Thermal inertia mapping -- 3.4 The stratigraphy of Mars -- 3.5 Summary -- 4 The Atmosphere and Weather -- 4.1 The composition of the atmosphere -- 4.2 Atmospheric pressure variations -- 4.3 Isotopic abundances in the atmosphere -- 4.4 Atmospheric circulation pattern -- 4.5 Clouds -- 5 The Interior of Mars -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The figure and gravity of Mars -- 5.3 Internal density profile -- 5.4 Composition of the interior -- 5.5 Differentiation of the Martian crust -- 6 The Ancient Cratered Terrain -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 The Martian cratering record -- 6.3 Martian impact basins -- 6.4 Morphology of impact craters -- 6.5 Crater ejecta morphology -- 6.6 Channelling on the cratered plateau -- 6.7 Intercrater plains -- 6.8 Volcanoes of the cratered plateau -- 6.9 The geological story as revealed by the upland rocks -- 7 The Central Volcanoes of Mars -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Volcano distribution -- 7.3 Classification of volcano types -- 7.4 Volcano ages -- 7.5 Highland paterae -- 7.6 Shield volcanoes and paterae -- 7.7 Martian shields -- 7.8 Older Tharsis volcanoes -- 7.9 Alba Patera -- 7.10 The shield volcanoes of Elysium -- 7.11 Apollinaris Patera -- 7.12 Central volcanism on Mars -- 8 The Plains of Mars -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Noachian and Early Hesperian plains -- 8.3 Hesperian-age flow plains -- 8.4 The Medusae Fossae plains -- 8.5 Tempe Terra plains province -- 8.6 Volcanic plains of Amazonian age -- 8.7 Plains deposits of Hellas -- 8.8 The northern plains -- 8.9 Plains and major resurfacing events in Martian history -- 9 The Equatorial Canyons -- 9.1 General features of Valles Marineris -- 9.2 Details of canyon physiography -- 9.3 General form of canyon walls -- 9.4 Wall retreat and landslide deposits -- 9.5 Wall retreat - tributary canyon development -- 9.6 Interior deposits -- 9.7 Formation of the canyon system -- 10 Martian Channels and Chaotic Terrain -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Valley networks in the ancient cratered terrain -- 10.3 Outflow channels -- 10.4 Fretted channels -- 10.5 Chaotic terrain -- 11 The Polar Regions, Wind And Volatile Activity -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Nature of the polar caps -- 11.3 Laminated polar deposits -- 11.4 High-latitude plains and dune fields -- 11.5 Wind activity on Mars -- 12 The Geological History of Mars -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The tectonic history of Mars -- 12.3 The evolution of Tharsis -- 12.4 Some final thoughts concerning Tharsis -- 12.5 The crustal dichotomy -- 12.6 The geological development of Mars -- 12.7 Climatic and volatile history -- 13 The Next Steps -- 13.1 Future Mars missions -- 13.2 Climate and the search for life -- 13.3 Epilogue -- Appendices -- A Astronomical Data -- B Phobos and Deimos -- C Model Chronologies for Mars -- D Stratigraphy of Martian Geological Features and Units.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 16
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401130820
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 327 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. What is eutrophication? -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Definition and origin of the term eutrophication -- 1.3 Links between eutrophication, biological changes and productivity in lakes -- 1.4 Eutrophication as a natural part of lake succession -- 1.5 Extent of artificial eutrophication -- 1.6 Eutrophication in rivers, estuaries and coastal waters -- 1.7 Measurement of eutrophication -- 2. The nutrients causing eutrophication, and their sources -- 2.1 The requirements of living cells for survival and growth -- 2.2 The important limiting nutrients -- 2.3 The supply of nitrogen and phosphorus to lakes -- 2.4 Relative importance of diffuse and point sources in catchments -- 2.5 Global aspects of nutrient runoff -- 2.6 Methods for estimating the magnitude of nutrient losses from catchments -- 3. The biochemical manifestations of eutrophication -- 3.1 The components of nutrient cycles in aquatic systems -- 3.2 The ultimate sinks of inflowing nitrogen and phosphorus -- 3.3 Changes in the cycles which occur as a consequence of enhanced nutrient inputs -- 3.4 The importance of the littoral zone in nutrient cycles -- 3.5 Seasonal patterns of nitrogen and phosphorus cycles in lakes -- 3.6 Important features of nutrient transformations in rivers and estuaries -- 4. The biological effects of eutrophication -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Production and species changes of algae and rnacrophytes -- 4.3 Effects of eutrophication upon rnacrophytes and attached algae -- 4.4 Production and species changes in zooplankton -- 4.5 Production and species changes of zoobenthos -- 4.6 Effects of eutrophication on fish and other vertebrates -- 4.7 Aquatic food-web considerations -- 4.8 Wider implications for wildlife and conservation -- 5. The engineering, economic and social effects of eutrophication -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Water supply -- 5.3 Fisheries management -- 5.4 Land drainage and weed control in rivers -- 5.5 Wildlife conservation -- 5.6 Public health hazards and nuisances -- 5.7 Other recreational aspects -- 6. Prediction and modelling of the causes and effects of eutrophication -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Experimental approaches to measures of eutrophication effects -- 6.3 The application of models in eutrophication assessment and prediction -- 6.4 Caution in the use of regression equations -- 6.5 Lake classification based on correlations and large data sets -- 6.6 Other lake classification indices -- 6.7 Dynamic models of lake ecosystems -- 6.8 Prediction without models -- 7. The reduction of causes and the management of effects of eutrophication -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Reduction of nutrient inputs to lakes -- 7.3 Evaluation of nutrient control measures -- 7.4 Control of nutrient concentrations within lakes -- 7.5 Management of lakes without nutrient reduction -- 8. A case study in restoration: shallow eutrophic lakes in the Norfolk Broads -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Historical perspective -- 8.3 Eutrophication of the Broads -- 8.4 Mechanisms of change -- 8.5 Effects of change -- 8.6 Restoration of Broadland -- 8.7 Lake sediment as a source of phosphorus -- 8.8 Changes in the storage of phosphorus in lake sediment following phosphorus control -- 8.9 Biological response to reduced nutrient loading -- 8.10 Nutrient reduction by isolation -- 8.11 Sediment removal and lake isolation -- 8.12 Biomanipulation as a restoration technique -- 8.13 The restoration of Broadland in the context of two stable communities -- References.
    Abstract: Eutrophication is a problem which became widely recognised by the scientific community in the 1940s and 1950s. It raised public concern, resulting in increased research effort and expenditure on management techniques through the 1960s and 1970s, recognised as a distinct problem of water pollution, though linked with the more gross effects of organic pollution. In the 1980s it became less fashionable - replaced in the public's eye and the politician's purse by newer problems such as acid rain. It remains however, one of the biggest and most widespread problems of fresh waters, particularly of lakes and an increasing problem for estuaries and coastal waters. It is one with which almost all water scientists and engineers in urbanised areas of the world have to cope. Technical methods for the reversal of eutrophication, such as nutrient removal, have been developed and applied successfully in some instances. They are not widespread however, and where they are feasible, they are often expensive and may be politically difficult to implement. In the last decade, attention has focussed upon less expensive lake manipula­ tion techniques, such as destratification and biomanipulation, which aim to minimise rather than elimininate the detrimental effects of eutrophication. These are becoming more widely applied. Prediction of the potential problems in lakes and catchments which have not yet suffered the full effects of eutrophication is now accurate enough to be of direct benefit to river basin management.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. What is eutrophication?1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Definition and origin of the term eutrophication -- 1.3 Links between eutrophication, biological changes and productivity in lakes -- 1.4 Eutrophication as a natural part of lake succession -- 1.5 Extent of artificial eutrophication -- 1.6 Eutrophication in rivers, estuaries and coastal waters -- 1.7 Measurement of eutrophication -- 2. The nutrients causing eutrophication, and their sources -- 2.1 The requirements of living cells for survival and growth -- 2.2 The important limiting nutrients -- 2.3 The supply of nitrogen and phosphorus to lakes -- 2.4 Relative importance of diffuse and point sources in catchments -- 2.5 Global aspects of nutrient runoff -- 2.6 Methods for estimating the magnitude of nutrient losses from catchments -- 3. The biochemical manifestations of eutrophication -- 3.1 The components of nutrient cycles in aquatic systems -- 3.2 The ultimate sinks of inflowing nitrogen and phosphorus -- 3.3 Changes in the cycles which occur as a consequence of enhanced nutrient inputs -- 3.4 The importance of the littoral zone in nutrient cycles -- 3.5 Seasonal patterns of nitrogen and phosphorus cycles in lakes -- 3.6 Important features of nutrient transformations in rivers and estuaries -- 4. The biological effects of eutrophication -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Production and species changes of algae and rnacrophytes -- 4.3 Effects of eutrophication upon rnacrophytes and attached algae -- 4.4 Production and species changes in zooplankton -- 4.5 Production and species changes of zoobenthos -- 4.6 Effects of eutrophication on fish and other vertebrates -- 4.7 Aquatic food-web considerations -- 4.8 Wider implications for wildlife and conservation -- 5. The engineering, economic and social effects of eutrophication -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Water supply -- 5.3 Fisheries management -- 5.4 Land drainage and weed control in rivers -- 5.5 Wildlife conservation -- 5.6 Public health hazards and nuisances -- 5.7 Other recreational aspects -- 6. Prediction and modelling of the causes and effects of eutrophication -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Experimental approaches to measures of eutrophication effects -- 6.3 The application of models in eutrophication assessment and prediction -- 6.4 Caution in the use of regression equations -- 6.5 Lake classification based on correlations and large data sets -- 6.6 Other lake classification indices -- 6.7 Dynamic models of lake ecosystems -- 6.8 Prediction without models -- 7. The reduction of causes and the management of effects of eutrophication -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Reduction of nutrient inputs to lakes -- 7.3 Evaluation of nutrient control measures -- 7.4 Control of nutrient concentrations within lakes -- 7.5 Management of lakes without nutrient reduction -- 8. A case study in restoration: shallow eutrophic lakes in the Norfolk Broads -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Historical perspective -- 8.3 Eutrophication of the Broads -- 8.4 Mechanisms of change -- 8.5 Effects of change -- 8.6 Restoration of Broadland -- 8.7 Lake sediment as a source of phosphorus -- 8.8 Changes in the storage of phosphorus in lake sediment following phosphorus control -- 8.9 Biological response to reduced nutrient loading -- 8.10 Nutrient reduction by isolation -- 8.11 Sediment removal and lake isolation -- 8.12 Biomanipulation as a restoration technique -- 8.13 The restoration of Broadland in the context of two stable communities -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 17
    ISBN: 9789401760713
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (III, 43 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Law ; Private international law. ; Conflict of laws. ; International law. ; Comparative law. ; Political science.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 18
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401122665
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (IX, 224 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Calendering and embossing -- Calendering -- Embossing -- 2 Coating and laminating -- 3 Drying and curing -- Electron beam -- Hot air -- Infrared -- Radio frequency -- Ultraviolet -- 4 Fabrication -- Binding and print finishing terms -- Cartons and carton styles -- Board definitions -- Cutting and creasing definitions -- Adhesive and adhesion terms -- Miscellaneous items -- 5 Web and sheet operations -- Cutting processes -- Sheeting and sheet transportation -- Web transportation.
    Abstract: The term 'converting' is in widespread use yet there is no general agreement on its precise definition and scope. The converting industry is notoriously diffuse, encompassing wide web coating operations in paper and plastics packaging, trimming, sheeting and the intricate details of high quality bound book production. A bewildering array of jargon is in use, much of it based on customs and practices passed down for several generations and, increasingly, on new terms originating from the USA or mainland Europe. This book aims to satisfy the wishes of many converters for a standard reference work which can be used for education and as an aid to communication. The dictionary gives definitions of terms which may be encountered in any of the diverse group of technologies that is included under the general heading 'converting' which is defined as 'the process of transforming one or more preformed raw materials, usually in web or sheet form, to a state suitable for end use or further processing'. Thus both calendering and coating are included but only with reference to operations which are carried out separately from the paper machine, otherwise known as 'off-machine processes'. Also in­ cluded are methods of production of cartons, books, finished and coated papers, boards and laminates, and many other items of relevance to the paper and board, film, laminating, packaging and allied industries.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Calendering and embossingCalendering -- Embossing -- 2 Coating and laminating -- 3 Drying and curing -- Electron beam -- Hot air -- Infrared -- Radio frequency -- Ultraviolet -- 4 Fabrication -- Binding and print finishing terms -- Cartons and carton styles -- Board definitions -- Cutting and creasing definitions -- Adhesive and adhesion terms -- Miscellaneous items -- 5 Web and sheet operations -- Cutting processes -- Sheeting and sheet transportation -- Web transportation.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 19
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401127226
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (ix, 320 p)
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Additional Information: Rezensiert in Klaits, Joseph [Rezension von: Harline, Craig E., The Rhyme and Reason of Politics in Early Modern Europe: Collected Essays of Herbert H. Rowen] 1994
    Series Statement: International Archives of the History of Ideas / Archives Internationales d’Histoire des Idées 132
    Keywords: Humanities ; History ; Social sciences ; History. ; Social sciences. ; Political science.
    Abstract: This volume brings together the best essays and reviews of Herbert H. Rowen, professor emeritus of Rutgers University, foreign member of the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences, and one of the first important English-speaking historians of the Dutch Republic since John Lothrop Motley. Many of the essays, though published previously, have not been readily available, while several appear here for the first time. They include close analysis of the Dutch Republic, French absolutism, the eighteenth-century Republic and the Atlantic Revolutions, and direct and indirect commentary on the task of the historian more generally. Also included are three essays and several reviews about the work of Herbert Rowen, which assess his particular contribution to historical studies. The leading characteristics of that work are reflected in the title of this collection: clarity and ease of expression, rigor of thought, and a focus on the intersection of political thought and practice in the early modern period
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 20
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401128940
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Sources and Composition of Whey and Permeate -- 2. Whey Processing -- 3. Demineralization -- 4. Whey Utilization -- 5. Whey Cheeses and Beverages -- 6. Ultrafiltration and Manufacture of Whey Protein Concentrates -- 7. Properties of Whey Protein Concentrates -- 8. Whey Protein Recovery and Whey Protein Fractionation.. -- 9. Lactose and Lactose Derivatives -- 10. Lactose Hydrolysis -- 11. Whey and Lactose Fermentation -- 12. Nutritional Aspects.
    Abstract: It would be difficult to imagine a more appropriate means of marking the Jubilee of the Dairy Research Laboratory, Division of Food Processing, CSIRO, than a publication on whey and lactose processing. The genesis of the Laboratory in 1939 was when the Australian dairy industry was very largely based on the supply of cream from farms to numerous butter factories, the skim milk being fed to pigs. By the mid-1940s, when Geof­ frey Loftus-Hills was appointed in charge ofthe fledgling Dairy Research Section, the main objective of the Section-the full utilization of the con­ stituents of milk for human food-had been firmly established. Over the next two decades progress towards this objective was exemplified by the scientific and technological contributions made in specialized milk powders for use in recombining and in the manufacture of casein and cheese. Meanwhile farming practices changed from cream production to the supply of refrigerated whole milk to the factories. By the late 1960s the increasing production of cheese and casein had re­ sulted in almost 2 million tonnes of whey per annum. This represented not only a waste disposal problem, but also under-utilization of over 100000 t of milk solids. The Laboratory had now grown to a staff of around 70, so it was possible to allocate some resources to this extra challenge.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Sources and Composition of Whey and Permeate2. Whey Processing -- 3. Demineralization -- 4. Whey Utilization -- 5. Whey Cheeses and Beverages -- 6. Ultrafiltration and Manufacture of Whey Protein Concentrates -- 7. Properties of Whey Protein Concentrates -- 8. Whey Protein Recovery and Whey Protein Fractionation. -- 9. Lactose and Lactose Derivatives -- 10. Lactose Hydrolysis -- 11. Whey and Lactose Fermentation -- 12. Nutritional Aspects.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 21
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401129206
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 309 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Series Statement: Environmental Management Series
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Descriptive Statistical Techniques -- 2 Environmetric Methods of Nonstationary Time-Series Analysis: Univaraute Methods -- 3 Regression and Correlation -- 4 Factor and Correlation Analysis of Multivariate Environmental Data -- 5 Errors and Detection Limits -- 6 Visual Representation of Data Including Graphical Exploratory Data Analysis -- 7 Quality Assurance for Environmental Assessment Activities.
    Abstract: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SERIES The current expansion of both public and scientific interest in environ­ mental issues has not been accompanied by a commensurate production of adequate books, and those which are available are widely variable in approach and depth. The Environmental Management Series has been established with a view to co-ordinating a series of volumes dealing with each topic within the field in some depth. It is hoped that this Series will provide a uniform and quality coverage and that, over a period of years, it will build up to form a library of reference books covering most of the major topics within this diverse field. It is envisaged that the books will be of single, or dual authorship, or edited volumes as appropriate for respective topics. The level of presentation will be advanced, the books being aimed primarily at a research/consultancy readership. The coverage will include all aspects of environmental science and engineering pertinent to manage­ ment and monitoring of the natural and man-modified environment, as well as topics dealing with the political. t:conomic, legal and social con­ siderations pertaining to environmental management.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Descriptive Statistical Techniques2 Environmetric Methods of Nonstationary Time-Series Analysis: Univaraute Methods -- 3 Regression and Correlation -- 4 Factor and Correlation Analysis of Multivariate Environmental Data -- 5 Errors and Detection Limits -- 6 Visual Representation of Data Including Graphical Exploratory Data Analysis -- 7 Quality Assurance for Environmental Assessment Activities.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 22
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401122863
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Índice -- Parte I: El Estado de Medio Ambiente -- Capítulo 1: Contaminación atmosférica -- Capítulo 2: Agotamiento del ozono -- Capítulo 3: Cambios climáticos -- Capítulo 4: Contaminación marina -- Capítulo 5: Recursos de agua dulce y calidad del agua -- Capítulo 6: Degradación de la tierra y desertificación -- Capítulo 7: Deforestación y degradación de los bosques -- Capítulo 8: Pérdida de diversidad biológica -- Capítulo 9: Peligros ambientales -- Capítulo 10: Productos químicos tóxicos y desechos peligrosos -- Parte II: Actividades de Desarrollo y Medio Ambiente -- Capítulo 11: Agricultura y producción alimentaria -- Capítulo 12: Industria -- Capítulo 13: Producción y uso de energia -- Capítulo 14: Transporte -- Capítulo 15: Turismo -- Parte III: Condiciones de Vida y Bienestar Humano -- Capítulo 16: Crecimiento demográfico y desarrollo humano -- Capítulo 17: Asentamientos humanos -- Capítulo 18: Salud humana -- Capítulo 19: Paz, seguridad y medio ambiente -- Parte IV: Percepciones, Actitudes y Medidas Adoptadas -- Capítulo 20: Percepciones y actitudes -- Capítulo 21: Medidas adoptadas -- Parte V: Problemas Planteados y Medidas Prioritarias -- Capítulo 22: Problemas planteados y medidas prioritarias -- Referencias.
    Description / Table of Contents: ÍndiceParte I: El Estado de Medio Ambiente -- Capítulo 1: Contaminación atmosférica -- Capítulo 2: Agotamiento del ozono -- Capítulo 3: Cambios climáticos -- Capítulo 4: Contaminación marina -- Capítulo 5: Recursos de agua dulce y calidad del agua -- Capítulo 6: Degradación de la tierra y desertificación -- Capítulo 7: Deforestación y degradación de los bosques -- Capítulo 8: Pérdida de diversidad biológica -- Capítulo 9: Peligros ambientales -- Capítulo 10: Productos químicos tóxicos y desechos peligrosos -- Parte II: Actividades de Desarrollo y Medio Ambiente -- Capítulo 11: Agricultura y producción alimentaria -- Capítulo 12: Industria -- Capítulo 13: Producción y uso de energia -- Capítulo 14: Transporte -- Capítulo 15: Turismo -- Parte III: Condiciones de Vida y Bienestar Humano -- Capítulo 16: Crecimiento demográfico y desarrollo humano -- Capítulo 17: Asentamientos humanos -- Capítulo 18: Salud humana -- Capítulo 19: Paz, seguridad y medio ambiente -- Parte IV: Percepciones, Actitudes y Medidas Adoptadas -- Capítulo 20: Percepciones y actitudes -- Capítulo 21: Medidas adoptadas -- Parte V: Problemas Planteados y Medidas Prioritarias -- Capítulo 22: Problemas planteados y medidas prioritarias -- Referencias.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 23
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401123648
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 398 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 History and development of probiotics -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 History -- 1.3 Composition of probiotic preparations -- References -- 2 Bacterial interactions in the gut -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Methods for studying bacterial interactions -- 2.3 Main types of bacterial interactions in the gut -- 2.3 Conclusions -- References -- 3 Metabolic interactions in the gut -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Mammalian intestinal metabolism -- 3.3 Gut bacterial metabolism -- 3.4 Conclusions -- References -- 4 Translocation and the indigenous gut flora -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Defence against bacterial translocation -- 4.3 Bacterial translocation in animal models with multiple deficiencies in host defences -- 4.4 Conclusion -- References -- 5 Gut flora and disease resistance -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Colonization resistance -- 5.3 Suppression of the multiplication of pathogens by the intestinal microflora -- 5.4 Mechanisms responsible for suppression of pathogens -- 5.5 Conclusions -- 5.6 The probiotic concept -- References -- 6 Factors affecting the microecology of the gut -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Definitions -- 6.3 Use of one or a limited number of bacterial strains in probiotic preparations -- 6.4 Ecological considerations -- 6.5 Recommendations for future developments -- References -- 7 Probiotics and the immune state -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Effect of orally administered lactic acid bacteria on immunity: non-specific and specific immune response -- 7.3 Effect of oral administration on the secretory immune system -- 7.4 Effect on the protection against enteric infections -- References -- 8 Genetit manipulation of gut microorganisms -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Microbes of potential interest -- 8.3 Molecular genetical studies -- 8.4 Stability of genetic determinants -- 8.5 Possible developments -- 8.6 Release of genetically modified microbes -- 8.7 Conclusions -- References -- 9 Selection of strains for probiotic use -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Aim of this chapter -- 9.3 First steps in the choice of microbial strains -- 9.4 Species and viability of probiotic microorganisms -- 9.5 Processing of viable microorganisms to end-products -- 9.6 Resistance to in vivo conditions -- 9.7 Adherence and colonization -- 9.8 Antimicrobial activity -- 9.9 Gene technology -- 9.10 Conclusion -- References -- 10 Probiotics for chickens -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 The normal intestinal flora of poultry -- 10.3 Host—microbial flora interactions -- 10.4 The application of probiosis to poultry -- 10.5 Lactic acid bacteria as probiotics -- 10.6 Competitive exclusion -- 10.7 Immunity -- 10.8 Bacteriophages -- 10.9 Summary -- References -- 11 Probiotics for pigs -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Special features of pigs relevant to the use of probiotics -- 11.3 Current use of probiotics -- 11.4 Efficacy -- 11.5 Functional characteristics of potential probiotic strains -- 11.6 General discussion -- References -- 12 Probiotics for ruminants -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Probiotics for young ruminants -- 12.3 Fungal feed additives for adult ruminants -- 12.4 Bacterial probiotics for adult ruminants -- 12.5 Future developments -- References -- 13 Probiotics for humans -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Colonization of the gastrointestinal tract -- 13.3 Current use of probiotics -- 13.4 Nutritional benefits of probiotics -- 13.5 Therapeutic benefits of probiotics -- 13.6 More recent developments in the area of probiotics and health -- 13.7 Properties required for probiotics to be effective in nutritional and therapeutic settings -- 13.8 Future development of probiotics for human use -- 13.9 Future applications of probiotics -- 13.10 Techniques for probiotic modification -- References -- 14 Problems and prospects -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Factors affecting the probiotic response -- 14.3 Future developments -- 14.4 Summary -- References.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 History and development of probiotics1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 History -- 1.3 Composition of probiotic preparations -- References -- 2 Bacterial interactions in the gut -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Methods for studying bacterial interactions -- 2.3 Main types of bacterial interactions in the gut -- 2.3 Conclusions -- References -- 3 Metabolic interactions in the gut -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Mammalian intestinal metabolism -- 3.3 Gut bacterial metabolism -- 3.4 Conclusions -- References -- 4 Translocation and the indigenous gut flora -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Defence against bacterial translocation -- 4.3 Bacterial translocation in animal models with multiple deficiencies in host defences -- 4.4 Conclusion -- References -- 5 Gut flora and disease resistance -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Colonization resistance -- 5.3 Suppression of the multiplication of pathogens by the intestinal microflora -- 5.4 Mechanisms responsible for suppression of pathogens -- 5.5 Conclusions -- 5.6 The probiotic concept -- References -- 6 Factors affecting the microecology of the gut -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Definitions -- 6.3 Use of one or a limited number of bacterial strains in probiotic preparations -- 6.4 Ecological considerations -- 6.5 Recommendations for future developments -- References -- 7 Probiotics and the immune state -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Effect of orally administered lactic acid bacteria on immunity: non-specific and specific immune response -- 7.3 Effect of oral administration on the secretory immune system -- 7.4 Effect on the protection against enteric infections -- References -- 8 Genetit manipulation of gut microorganisms -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Microbes of potential interest -- 8.3 Molecular genetical studies -- 8.4 Stability of genetic determinants -- 8.5 Possible developments -- 8.6 Release of genetically modified microbes -- 8.7 Conclusions -- References -- 9 Selection of strains for probiotic use -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Aim of this chapter -- 9.3 First steps in the choice of microbial strains -- 9.4 Species and viability of probiotic microorganisms -- 9.5 Processing of viable microorganisms to end-products -- 9.6 Resistance to in vivo conditions -- 9.7 Adherence and colonization -- 9.8 Antimicrobial activity -- 9.9 Gene technology -- 9.10 Conclusion -- References -- 10 Probiotics for chickens -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 The normal intestinal flora of poultry -- 10.3 Host-microbial flora interactions -- 10.4 The application of probiosis to poultry -- 10.5 Lactic acid bacteria as probiotics -- 10.6 Competitive exclusion -- 10.7 Immunity -- 10.8 Bacteriophages -- 10.9 Summary -- References -- 11 Probiotics for pigs -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Special features of pigs relevant to the use of probiotics -- 11.3 Current use of probiotics -- 11.4 Efficacy -- 11.5 Functional characteristics of potential probiotic strains -- 11.6 General discussion -- References -- 12 Probiotics for ruminants -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Probiotics for young ruminants -- 12.3 Fungal feed additives for adult ruminants -- 12.4 Bacterial probiotics for adult ruminants -- 12.5 Future developments -- References -- 13 Probiotics for humans -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Colonization of the gastrointestinal tract -- 13.3 Current use of probiotics -- 13.4 Nutritional benefits of probiotics -- 13.5 Therapeutic benefits of probiotics -- 13.6 More recent developments in the area of probiotics and health -- 13.7 Properties required for probiotics to be effective in nutritional and therapeutic settings -- 13.8 Future development of probiotics for human use -- 13.9 Future applications of probiotics -- 13.10 Techniques for probiotic modification -- References -- 14 Problems and prospects -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Factors affecting the probiotic response -- 14.3 Future developments -- 14.4 Summary -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 24
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131063
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (x, 266 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Botany -- 2 The cultivated hop -- 3 Production methods -- 4 Harvesting -- 5 Pests and diseases: historical review -- 6 Pests -- 7 Fungal diseases -- 8 Virus diseases -- 9 Varieties and breeding -- 10 The hop trade -- References.
    Abstract: It is 25 years since Dr Burgess wrote his invaluable book on hops and in the intervening period there have been very many advances in hop research and hop production techniques. When invited to produce a replacement for that book, therefore, the problem was not finding enough new material but deciding on what to include. People interested in reading about the hop are likely to fall into very diverse categories. Hop growers will be looking for practical advice on production methods while research workers with specialist knowledge in one field may want detailed information about research in other disciplines. In addition, there are many people for whom hops are of much more general interest and for them a source of basic information about the crop will be required. The aim has not been to produce a detailed growers' handbook, since techniques vary considerably from district to district and I believe that it is better to obtain advice from neighbouring growers or from specialist advisers than from any book. What I have attempted is to outline the basic principles upon which production methods should be based. At the same time, I have tried to include material that will be of general interest both to those who work with hops and to those to whom they might otherwise remain a complete mystery. In doing this my own personal interests have inevitably played an important part.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Botany2 The cultivated hop -- 3 Production methods -- 4 Harvesting -- 5 Pests and diseases: historical review -- 6 Pests -- 7 Fungal diseases -- 8 Virus diseases -- 9 Varieties and breeding -- 10 The hop trade -- References.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 25
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401131308
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction to the electronics industry -- 1.1 A history of the electronics industry -- 1.2 The electronics market -- 1.3 Electronics manufacturing company structure -- 1.4 Test engineering and quality assurance -- 2 Electronic components -- 2.1 Component interconnection methods -- 2.2 Electronic components -- 2.3 Component packaging -- 2.4 Cabling -- 2.5 Component quality assurance -- 3 Electronic design -- 3.1 Quality and reliability assessment -- 3.2 The product design process -- 3.3 Circuit design -- 3.4 Integrated circuit design -- 3.5 Circuit layout -- 4 Semiconductor device manufacture -- 4.1 Semiconductor materials -- 4.2 Clean room requirements -- 4.3 Silicon wafer manufacture -- 4.4 Photolithography -- 4.5 Layer fabrication processes -- 4.6 Bipolar junction transistor fabrication -- 4.7 Field effect transistor fabrication -- 4.8 Integrated circuit packaging and testing -- 5 Printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.1 Printed circuit board types -- 5.2 Printed circuit board substrate materials -- 5.3 Printed circuit board substrate manufacture -- 5.4 Printed circuit board fabrication procedures -- 5.5 Single-sided printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.6 Double-sided printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.7 Multilayer printed circuit board manufacture -- 6 Printed circuit board assembly -- 6.1 Hand assembly -- 6.2 Automatic component insertion -- 6.3 Assembly-related faults -- 6.4 Soldering techniques -- 6.5 Solder joint inspection and common soldering faults -- 6.6 Cleaning -- 6.7 Testing and reworking -- 7 Surface mount component assembly -- 7.1 Advantages of surface mount components -- 7.2 Surface mount component assembly -- 7.3 Adhesive application -- 7.4 Solder paste application -- 7.5 Component onsertion -- 7.6 Soldering techniques -- 7.7 Mixing surface mount with leaded components -- 7.8 Soldering quality -- 7.9 Testing -- 7.10 Reworking -- 8 Alternative technologies -- 8.1 Hybrid technology -- 8.2 Tape automated bonding -- 8.3 Silicon on silicon wafer-scale integration -- 8.4 Application-specific integrated circuits -- 8.5 Flexible circuits -- References -- Further reading.
    Abstract: The sequence of events which led to the writing of this book started at a seminar on Manufacturing Technology in the Electronics Industry given by the Institution of Production Engineers in 1987. The seminar identified that the field of manufacturing engineering for the electronics industry was effectively missing from the vast majority of production engineering degree courses. The reason for this was that production engineering departments typically spring from mechanical engineering departments. This leads to a mechanical bias in the practical aspects of such courses. The consequence of this was that electronics companies could not recruit graduates with both relevant production engineering and electronic engineering backgrounds. This necessitated either recruiting production engineering graduates and giving them the necessary electronic engineering training, or giving production engineering training to electronic engineering graduates. A consequence of the lack of courses in a subject is that there is also a lack of relevant textbooks in the area, as most textbooks are intended to tie into courses. In the field of manufacturing technology for the electronics industry, existing textbooks tend to be highly specialized and mainly concerned with the fabrication of semiconductor devices.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction to the electronics industry1.1 A history of the electronics industry -- 1.2 The electronics market -- 1.3 Electronics manufacturing company structure -- 1.4 Test engineering and quality assurance -- 2 Electronic components -- 2.1 Component interconnection methods -- 2.2 Electronic components -- 2.3 Component packaging -- 2.4 Cabling -- 2.5 Component quality assurance -- 3 Electronic design -- 3.1 Quality and reliability assessment -- 3.2 The product design process -- 3.3 Circuit design -- 3.4 Integrated circuit design -- 3.5 Circuit layout -- 4 Semiconductor device manufacture -- 4.1 Semiconductor materials -- 4.2 Clean room requirements -- 4.3 Silicon wafer manufacture -- 4.4 Photolithography -- 4.5 Layer fabrication processes -- 4.6 Bipolar junction transistor fabrication -- 4.7 Field effect transistor fabrication -- 4.8 Integrated circuit packaging and testing -- 5 Printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.1 Printed circuit board types -- 5.2 Printed circuit board substrate materials -- 5.3 Printed circuit board substrate manufacture -- 5.4 Printed circuit board fabrication procedures -- 5.5 Single-sided printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.6 Double-sided printed circuit board manufacture -- 5.7 Multilayer printed circuit board manufacture -- 6 Printed circuit board assembly -- 6.1 Hand assembly -- 6.2 Automatic component insertion -- 6.3 Assembly-related faults -- 6.4 Soldering techniques -- 6.5 Solder joint inspection and common soldering faults -- 6.6 Cleaning -- 6.7 Testing and reworking -- 7 Surface mount component assembly -- 7.1 Advantages of surface mount components -- 7.2 Surface mount component assembly -- 7.3 Adhesive application -- 7.4 Solder paste application -- 7.5 Component onsertion -- 7.6 Soldering techniques -- 7.7 Mixing surface mount with leaded components -- 7.8 Soldering quality -- 7.9 Testing -- 7.10 Reworking -- 8 Alternative technologies -- 8.1 Hybrid technology -- 8.2 Tape automated bonding -- 8.3 Silicon on silicon wafer-scale integration -- 8.4 Application-specific integrated circuits -- 8.5 Flexible circuits -- References -- Further reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 26
    ISBN: 9789401136549
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Opening Session -- Welcome Address -- Opening Address -- Areas Where Advanced Separation Techniques are Desirable -- Review of New Extractants Potentially Applicable to the Processing of Radioactive Liquid Wastes (Summary) -- The Truex Process: A Vital Tool for Disposal of U.S. Defense Nuclear Waste -- Session I Amines/Amides Based Extractants -- Highly Selective and Micellar Extraction of Uranyl and Alkaline-Earth Cations (Summary) -- Extraction of Metal Ions by Neutral ?-Diphosphoramides -- Treatment of Nuclear Waste Solutions Using A New Class of Extractants: Pentaalkyl Propane Diamides -- Research for Actinides Extractants from Various Wastes -- N,N Dialkylaliphatic Amides as Extractant of Platinum Group Metals -- Session II Bidentate Organophosphorus Extractants -- Application of the Teseo Process for Actinide Removal from Liquid Alpha Wastes Generated During UO2-PuO2 Fuel Fabrication Campaigns -- Separation of AM, EU and CE from Liquid Wastes with CMPO by Extraction Chromatography -- The Extraction of Actinides and Other Constituents from Highly Active Waste (HAW) by Trialkyl Phosphine Oxide (TRPO) -- Actinides Removal by Means of Octyl(Phenyl)-N,N-Diisobutyl Carbamoyl Methyl Phosphine Oxide (CMPO) Sorbed on Silica -- Application of the CMPO Extractant (Supported Liquid Membrane) for the Alpha Decontamination of Marcoule Reprocessing Concentrate -- Comparison Between CMPO and DHDECMP for Alpha Decontamination of Radioactive Liquid Waste -- Application of CMPO Containing Gels to Metal Extraction -- Session III The Calixarenes -- Potential Industrial Applications of Calixarenes -- Special Calixarenes, Synthesis and Properties -- Calixspherands as Ligands for the Complexation of Radioactive Rubidium-81 -- Research Activities on Calixarenes (Summary) -- Session IV The Crown-Ethers -- General Properties of Crown-Ethers and Their Potential for Applications in Analytical and Preparative Chemistry -- Possible Applications of Crown-Ethers to Metal Extraction Using Liquid Membrane Technology a Literature Survey -- Application of Crown-Ethers to Caesium and Strontium Removal from Marcoule Reprocessing Concentrate -- Session V Other Types of Extractants -- Synthesis of Macrocyclic Ligands and Their Application in the Separation of Rare Earths -- Separation of Actinides with Alkylpyridinium Nitrates -- Phosphonomethyl Substituted Phenols A New Class of Absorbers and Extractants for Metals -- Actinide Separations by High Pressure Cation Exchange — The Neptunium Case -- Separation of Metal Ions by Complexation-Ultrafiltration -- Session VI Inorganic Ion Exchangers/Absorbers -- Preparation and Properties of Hexacyanoferrates for the Removal of Caesium from Radioactive Waste Streams: A Review -- The Combination of Finely Divided Inorganic Ion Exchangers and Ultrafiltration for the Treatment of Low- and Medium-Level Waste -- Use of Hydrated Antimony Pentoxide (HAP) for Fission Product Removal from Irradiated U Solutions: Application to A Homogeneous Reactor Fuel Reprocessing -- Caesium Decontamination from MTR Waste Solution -- Selective ion Exchange for Chromium Recovery from Tannery Wastes -- Novel Organic, Inorganic and Modified Inorganic Materials for Waste Treatment -- The Eix Process for Radioactive Waste Treatment -- Conclusions -- Main Achievements of the Seminar -- List of Participants -- Index of Authors.
    Abstract: The purpose of this technical seminar was to evaluate the present state of the art in matter of advanced separation techniques like solvent extraction, ion-exchange, chemical precipitation, membrane and electrical processes for the treatment of radioactive liquid waste and a selection of some specific industrial non-radioactive effluents. Through this initiative, the organisers aimed at promoting the exchange of information between scientists from various origins (universities, research centres and industries) while contributing to the necessary overcoming of the artificial barriers which too often limit the "technology transfer" between the nuclear and non-nuclear sectors. Vll CONTENTS PREFACE ........................................ V ABBREVIATIONS ...................................... xiv OPENING SESSION WELCOME ADDRESS C. MANCINI (ENEA) .................................... 3 OPENING ADDRESS S. FINZI (CEC) ....................................... 7 AREAS WHERE ADVANCED SEPARATION TECHNIQUES ARE DESIRABLE G. GROSSI (ENEA), L. CECILLE (CEC) ....................... 11 REVIEW OF NEW EXTRACT ANTS POTENTIALLY APPLICABLE TO THE PROCESSING OF RADIOACTIVE LIQUID WASTES (Summary) P.R. DANESI, International Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna, Austria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . .
    Description / Table of Contents: Opening SessionWelcome Address -- Opening Address -- Areas Where Advanced Separation Techniques are Desirable -- Review of New Extractants Potentially Applicable to the Processing of Radioactive Liquid Wastes (Summary) -- The Truex Process: A Vital Tool for Disposal of U.S. Defense Nuclear Waste -- Session I Amines/Amides Based Extractants -- Highly Selective and Micellar Extraction of Uranyl and Alkaline-Earth Cations (Summary) -- Extraction of Metal Ions by Neutral ?-Diphosphoramides -- Treatment of Nuclear Waste Solutions Using A New Class of Extractants: Pentaalkyl Propane Diamides -- Research for Actinides Extractants from Various Wastes -- N,N Dialkylaliphatic Amides as Extractant of Platinum Group Metals -- Session II Bidentate Organophosphorus Extractants -- Application of the Teseo Process for Actinide Removal from Liquid Alpha Wastes Generated During UO2-PuO2 Fuel Fabrication Campaigns -- Separation of AM, EU and CE from Liquid Wastes with CMPO by Extraction Chromatography -- The Extraction of Actinides and Other Constituents from Highly Active Waste (HAW) by Trialkyl Phosphine Oxide (TRPO) -- Actinides Removal by Means of Octyl(Phenyl)-N,N-Diisobutyl Carbamoyl Methyl Phosphine Oxide (CMPO) Sorbed on Silica -- Application of the CMPO Extractant (Supported Liquid Membrane) for the Alpha Decontamination of Marcoule Reprocessing Concentrate -- Comparison Between CMPO and DHDECMP for Alpha Decontamination of Radioactive Liquid Waste -- Application of CMPO Containing Gels to Metal Extraction -- Session III The Calixarenes -- Potential Industrial Applications of Calixarenes -- Special Calixarenes, Synthesis and Properties -- Calixspherands as Ligands for the Complexation of Radioactive Rubidium-81 -- Research Activities on Calixarenes (Summary) -- Session IV The Crown-Ethers -- General Properties of Crown-Ethers and Their Potential for Applications in Analytical and Preparative Chemistry -- Possible Applications of Crown-Ethers to Metal Extraction Using Liquid Membrane Technology a Literature Survey -- Application of Crown-Ethers to Caesium and Strontium Removal from Marcoule Reprocessing Concentrate -- Session V Other Types of Extractants -- Synthesis of Macrocyclic Ligands and Their Application in the Separation of Rare Earths -- Separation of Actinides with Alkylpyridinium Nitrates -- Phosphonomethyl Substituted Phenols A New Class of Absorbers and Extractants for Metals -- Actinide Separations by High Pressure Cation Exchange - The Neptunium Case -- Separation of Metal Ions by Complexation-Ultrafiltration -- Session VI Inorganic Ion Exchangers/Absorbers -- Preparation and Properties of Hexacyanoferrates for the Removal of Caesium from Radioactive Waste Streams: A Review -- The Combination of Finely Divided Inorganic Ion Exchangers and Ultrafiltration for the Treatment of Low- and Medium-Level Waste -- Use of Hydrated Antimony Pentoxide (HAP) for Fission Product Removal from Irradiated U Solutions: Application to A Homogeneous Reactor Fuel Reprocessing -- Caesium Decontamination from MTR Waste Solution -- Selective ion Exchange for Chromium Recovery from Tannery Wastes -- Novel Organic, Inorganic and Modified Inorganic Materials for Waste Treatment -- The Eix Process for Radioactive Waste Treatment -- Conclusions -- Main Achievements of the Seminar -- List of Participants -- Index of Authors.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 27
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131025
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xxiii, 554 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Life-history Strategies -- 1 The life strategies of mites -- 2 Life-history evolution of spider mites -- 3 Life-cycle strategies in unpredictably varying environments: genetic adaptations in a colonizing mite -- 4 The evolutionary transformation of osmotic regulation in the life cycle of freshwater mites (Hydrachnidia) -- 5 Development and life-history strategies in mussel mites (Hydrachnellae: Unionicolidae) -- Two Reproduction -- 6 Spermatology in the Acari: systematic and functional implications -- 7 The distribution, mechanisms and evolutionary significance of parthenogenesis in oribatid mites -- 8 Indirect sperm transfer in prostigmatic mites from a phylogenetic viewpoint -- 9 Spermatophore deposition in relation to atmospheric humidity among terrestrial Parasitengonae (Prostigmata) -- 10 The role of Adlerocystis sp. in the reproduction of argasid ticks -- 11 A scanning electron-microscopy study of spermatogenesis in Pergamasus barbarus Berl. (Gamasida -- 12 Precise sex-ratio control in the pseudo-arrhenotokous phytoseiid mite, Typhlodromus occidentalis Nesbitt -- 13 Sex ratio, fitness and capacity for population increase in Pyemotes tritici (L.-F. and M.) (Pyemotidae) -- 14 Preliminary observations of ovoviviparity in the gallforming mite, Aceria caulobius (Nal.) (Eriophyidea: Eriophyidae) -- 15 Laboratory observations on duration of copulation and egg production of three phytoseiid species fed on pollen -- 16 Precopulatory mate guarding in the spider mite, Tetranychus cinnabarinus (Boisd.) (Tetranychidae) -- Three Diapause, Development and Trophic Relations -- 17 Physiological aspects of diapause in plant-inhabiting mites -- 18 Repeated induction and termination of diapause in the predacious mite, Amblyseius potentillae (Garman) (Phytoseiidae) -- 19 Inheritance of photoperiodic responses controlling diapause in the two-spotted spider mite, Tetranychus urticae Koch -- 20 Some observations on diapause in winter eggs of Panonychus ulmi (Koch) (Tetranychidae) -- 21 Reproduction, embryonic and postembryonic development of Trichouropoda obscurasimilis Hirschmann and Zirngiebl-Nicol 1961 (Anactinotrichida: Uropodina) -- 22 Resource allocation and utilization contrasts in Hypoaspis aculeifer (Can.) and Alliphis halleri (G. and R. Can.) (Mesostigmata) with emphasis on food source -- 23 The influence of different host plants on the reproductive potential of Tyrophagus putrescentiae (Schrank) and Tyrophagus neiswanderi Johnston and Bruce (Acaridae) -- 24 The relationship between house-dust mites and fungi -- 25 How plants maintain body-guards: plant exudate as a food source for phytoseiid mites -- Four Systematic, Morphology, Physiology and Behaviour -- 26 Distribution of characters and phylogenetic age — systematic problems in the higher taxa of the Oribatida -- 27 A new approach to the systematics of the genus Steganacarus (Oribatida) -- 28 The morphology of the immature stages of Phthiracaroidea (Oribatida) -- 29 A new interpretation of the epimeral theory of Grandjean -- 30 A comparison of the sclerotized parts of the reproductive organs of house-dust mites of the genus Dermatophagoides using scanning electron microscopy -- 31 Reproductive systems in Acaridida — some peculiar features -- 32 A respiratory apparatus in eggs of certain mites -- 33 Fine structure and functions of the mouthparts involved in the feeding mechanisms in Cenopalpus pulcher (Canestrini and Fanzago) (Tetranychoidea: Tenuipalpidae) -- 34 The alveolar salivary glands of the active phases of trombiculid mites (Trombiculidae) -- 35 Pigmentation in water mites of the genera Limnochares Latr. and Hydrodroma Koch (Hydrachnidia) -- 36 Biomass studies of water mites of the genera Limnochares Latr. and Hydrodroma Koch (Hydrachnidia) -- 37 The saltatory capacity of an oribatid mite -- 38 Thanatosis or feigning death in mites of the family Scutacaridae -- Five Field Studies and Applied Aspects -- 39 The effects of spider-mite feeding on plant performance in relation to biological control -- 40 Dispersion indices and constant precision sampling programmes for Panonychus ulmi (Koch) and Amblyseius andersoni (Chant) in Spanish apple orchards -- 41 Herbicides and the reproduction of Tetranychus urticae Koch -- 42 Phytoseiid mites associated with vines in Sicilian vineyards -- 43 Studies on mites associated with lucerne in Greece -- 44 Vertical distribution and life stages of oribatid communities on beech trees -- 45 Histiostoma murchiei Hughes and Jackson (Anoetidae) as a parasite in the cocoons of some Danish earthworms -- 46 Rearing deutonymphs of Iphidosoma fimetarium (J. Müller), a mesostigmatic mite associated with carabid beetles -- 47 Mites of the House mouse, Mus musculus L., in the north-eastern part of the Iberian Peninsula in Spain -- 48 Records of Ixodoidea from the Trentino-Alto Adige region in northern Italy -- 49 Seasonal and spatial variation in food intake by the oribatid mites of beech woodland soil -- 50 The effects of ploughing and rotary cultivation on soil mites with particular reference to the Mesostigmata -- 51 The influence of soil cultivation methods on the edaphic fauna, and especially the Gamasina (Mesostigmata), in two southern German vineyards with different cultural treatments -- 52 The density of Tarsonemida in cropped arable soil in relation to fertilizer and crop-protection treatments -- 53 Soil mites and acidification: a comparative study of four forest stands near Heidelberg -- 54 Reactions of mite populations to the influence of environmental chemicals in a beech-wood floor -- 55 Population studies on the house-dust mite. Euroglyphus maynei (Cooreman 1950) (Pyroglyphidae) -- 56 Management of mite development in the home -- 57 An indirect effect of cleaning on house-dust mites. (Dermatophagoides spp.) in carpets -- 58 Astigmatic and prostigmatic mites of grain stores, mills and sawmills in Finland -- Index to plant genera and species -- Index to animal genera and species -- Author index.
    Abstract: During the Inaugural Meeting of the European Association of Acarol­ ogists (EURAAC), held in Amsterdam in 1987, it was decided that the holding of a Symposium at regular intervals should be a major objective. With this in view, it was agreed that Professor Reinhart Schuster, the senior editor, be invited to accept the Presidency of the Association and, arising from that Office, to organize the first Symposium in Austria in 1988. There was strong support for a main theme focused on a particular aspect of acarology. From these discussions there emerged the proposal that emphasis be placed on aspects of reproduction, development and life-history strategies of the Acari. These were topics in the forefront of the discipline with exciting developments of interest not only to acarologists but to a wider audience because of the light they cast on fundamental processes in physiology, ecology and evolutionary biology. The object then was to invite a small number of key workers to present extended papers related to the main theme. There were seven of these all of which appear in the book. The remaining 51 contributions were offered papers a number of which fit within the framework of the Symposium theme.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Life-history Strategies1 The life strategies of mites -- 2 Life-history evolution of spider mites -- 3 Life-cycle strategies in unpredictably varying environments: genetic adaptations in a colonizing mite -- 4 The evolutionary transformation of osmotic regulation in the life cycle of freshwater mites (Hydrachnidia) -- 5 Development and life-history strategies in mussel mites (Hydrachnellae: Unionicolidae) -- Two Reproduction -- 6 Spermatology in the Acari: systematic and functional implications -- 7 The distribution, mechanisms and evolutionary significance of parthenogenesis in oribatid mites -- 8 Indirect sperm transfer in prostigmatic mites from a phylogenetic viewpoint -- 9 Spermatophore deposition in relation to atmospheric humidity among terrestrial Parasitengonae (Prostigmata) -- 10 The role of Adlerocystis sp. in the reproduction of argasid ticks -- 11 A scanning electron-microscopy study of spermatogenesis in Pergamasus barbarus Berl. (Gamasida -- 12 Precise sex-ratio control in the pseudo-arrhenotokous phytoseiid mite, Typhlodromus occidentalis Nesbitt -- 13 Sex ratio, fitness and capacity for population increase in Pyemotes tritici (L.-F. and M.) (Pyemotidae) -- 14 Preliminary observations of ovoviviparity in the gallforming mite, Aceria caulobius (Nal.) (Eriophyidea: Eriophyidae) -- 15 Laboratory observations on duration of copulation and egg production of three phytoseiid species fed on pollen -- 16 Precopulatory mate guarding in the spider mite, Tetranychus cinnabarinus (Boisd.) (Tetranychidae) -- Three Diapause, Development and Trophic Relations -- 17 Physiological aspects of diapause in plant-inhabiting mites -- 18 Repeated induction and termination of diapause in the predacious mite, Amblyseius potentillae (Garman) (Phytoseiidae) -- 19 Inheritance of photoperiodic responses controlling diapause in the two-spotted spider mite, Tetranychus urticae Koch -- 20 Some observations on diapause in winter eggs of Panonychus ulmi (Koch) (Tetranychidae) -- 21 Reproduction, embryonic and postembryonic development of Trichouropoda obscurasimilis Hirschmann and Zirngiebl-Nicol 1961 (Anactinotrichida: Uropodina) -- 22 Resource allocation and utilization contrasts in Hypoaspis aculeifer (Can.) and Alliphis halleri (G. and R. Can.) (Mesostigmata) with emphasis on food source -- 23 The influence of different host plants on the reproductive potential of Tyrophagus putrescentiae (Schrank) and Tyrophagus neiswanderi Johnston and Bruce (Acaridae) -- 24 The relationship between house-dust mites and fungi -- 25 How plants maintain body-guards: plant exudate as a food source for phytoseiid mites -- Four Systematic, Morphology, Physiology and Behaviour -- 26 Distribution of characters and phylogenetic age - systematic problems in the higher taxa of the Oribatida -- 27 A new approach to the systematics of the genus Steganacarus (Oribatida) -- 28 The morphology of the immature stages of Phthiracaroidea (Oribatida) -- 29 A new interpretation of the epimeral theory of Grandjean -- 30 A comparison of the sclerotized parts of the reproductive organs of house-dust mites of the genus Dermatophagoides using scanning electron microscopy -- 31 Reproductive systems in Acaridida - some peculiar features -- 32 A respiratory apparatus in eggs of certain mites -- 33 Fine structure and functions of the mouthparts involved in the feeding mechanisms in Cenopalpus pulcher (Canestrini and Fanzago) (Tetranychoidea: Tenuipalpidae) -- 34 The alveolar salivary glands of the active phases of trombiculid mites (Trombiculidae) -- 35 Pigmentation in water mites of the genera Limnochares Latr. and Hydrodroma Koch (Hydrachnidia) -- 36 Biomass studies of water mites of the genera Limnochares Latr. and Hydrodroma Koch (Hydrachnidia) -- 37 The saltatory capacity of an oribatid mite -- 38 Thanatosis or feigning death in mites of the family Scutacaridae -- Five Field Studies and Applied Aspects -- 39 The effects of spider-mite feeding on plant performance in relation to biological control -- 40 Dispersion indices and constant precision sampling programmes for Panonychus ulmi (Koch) and Amblyseius andersoni (Chant) in Spanish apple orchards -- 41 Herbicides and the reproduction of Tetranychus urticae Koch -- 42 Phytoseiid mites associated with vines in Sicilian vineyards -- 43 Studies on mites associated with lucerne in Greece -- 44 Vertical distribution and life stages of oribatid communities on beech trees -- 45 Histiostoma murchiei Hughes and Jackson (Anoetidae) as a parasite in the cocoons of some Danish earthworms -- 46 Rearing deutonymphs of Iphidosoma fimetarium (J. Müller), a mesostigmatic mite associated with carabid beetles -- 47 Mites of the House mouse, Mus musculus L., in the north-eastern part of the Iberian Peninsula in Spain -- 48 Records of Ixodoidea from the Trentino-Alto Adige region in northern Italy -- 49 Seasonal and spatial variation in food intake by the oribatid mites of beech woodland soil -- 50 The effects of ploughing and rotary cultivation on soil mites with particular reference to the Mesostigmata -- 51 The influence of soil cultivation methods on the edaphic fauna, and especially the Gamasina (Mesostigmata), in two southern German vineyards with different cultural treatments -- 52 The density of Tarsonemida in cropped arable soil in relation to fertilizer and crop-protection treatments -- 53 Soil mites and acidification: a comparative study of four forest stands near Heidelberg -- 54 Reactions of mite populations to the influence of environmental chemicals in a beech-wood floor -- 55 Population studies on the house-dust mite. Euroglyphus maynei (Cooreman 1950) (Pyroglyphidae) -- 56 Management of mite development in the home -- 57 An indirect effect of cleaning on house-dust mites. (Dermatophagoides spp.) in carpets -- 58 Astigmatic and prostigmatic mites of grain stores, mills and sawmills in Finland -- Index to plant genera and species -- Index to animal genera and species -- Author index.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 28
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401131384
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 224 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Maintenance policies -- 2 Organization of maintenance operations -- 3 Behaviour of physical equipment in service -- 4 Management of maintenance operations -- 5 Mathematics for maintenance: basic concepts and tools -- 6 Applications: case studies -- Exercises -- Annexe -- Maintenance software suppliers.
    Abstract: As the developments in engineering production techniques have resulted in an increasing dependence on automation, the increasing complexity of these systems has made the reliability of the machines a matter of great importance. An unexpected breakdown can be a very expensive experience for the company. Further, in the aerospace industry, problems of reliability, maintainability and availability are critical. For a long time industrial research and training centres have been interested primarily in the problems of design, manufacture and production; recently, however, there has been a growing interest in the study of maintenance and reliability. The concept of maintainability, for example, first appeared in 1954 in the US army. Since then a variety of techniques and methodologies have been developed and implemented to meet the challenge of the new needs. The aim of this book is to present these methods and investigate their effectiveness, and in so doing to help practising engineers gain a better understanding of the problems. The many examples and applications given here should make it a valuable teaching aid to students taking courses in engineering maintenance. This second edition has been revised and enlarged to take account of the most recent developments and illustrate their application to the solution of problems. It should also help to orient the reader to the modern concept of computer-aided maintenance. Introduction A maintenance service exists to keep equipment in running order and also to reduce the number of breakdowns.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Maintenance policies2 Organization of maintenance operations -- 3 Behaviour of physical equipment in service -- 4 Management of maintenance operations -- 5 Mathematics for maintenance: basic concepts and tools -- 6 Applications: case studies -- Exercises -- Annexe -- Maintenance software suppliers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 29
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401169677
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 225 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Design and Process Considerations -- 1.1 Overview -- 1.2 Assembly Packaging -- 1.3 Component Packaging -- 1.4 The Printed Wiring Assembly -- 1.5 Assembly and Solder Process -- 1.6 Cleaning Operation -- 1.7 Summary -- References -- 2 Flux Considerations with Emphasis on Low Solids -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Specifications -- 2.3 Flux Materials -- 2.4 Application Methods -- 2.5 Monitoring Techniques -- 2.6 Process Issues -- 2.7 Nonliquid Fluxes -- 2.8 Importance of Soldering Parameters -- 2.9 Summary and Trends -- References -- 3 Solvent Defluxing of Printed Wiring Board Assemblies and Surface Mount Assemblies: Materials, Processes, and Equipment -- 3.1 The Need for Cleaning -- 3.2 The Cleaning Process -- 3.3 Testing for Cleanliness -- 3.4 Environmental Concerns of Solvents -- 3.5 Conclusion -- References -- 4 Aqueous Defluxing: Materials, Processes, and Equipment -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Design Considerations -- 4.3 Process Considerations -- 4.4 Process Qualification and Control -- 4.5 Environmental Concerns -- References -- 5 Alternative Defluxing: Materials, Processes, and Equipment -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Methods and Equipment -- 5.3 Materials -- References -- 6 Defluxing for High Reliability Applications and General Environmental Issues -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Background -- 6.3 Cleanliness Requirements -- 6.4 Cleaning Materials -- 6.5 Cleaning Equipment -- 6.6 Cleanliness Verification -- 6.7 Environmental Issues -- 6.8 The Future of Cleaning -- 6.9 Conclusions -- References.
    Abstract: The impetus to create this book originated from several concerns. One of these was the perceived value to the industry of a collection in one volume of a wide range of information pertinent to the reasons and techniques for de fluxing printed wiring assemblies (PWAs). This book is expected to be of use not only to those engaged in the electronics packaging industry but also to those in related fields seeking information concerning viable methods of dealing with one of the en­ vironmental issues of our time: the destruction of the ozone layer surrounding and protecting the planet with which we have been entrusted. The volume of information relative to providing PW As free of residues ad­ versely impacting operation, reliability, and life of electronic products is grow­ ing, and it will continue to expand at an accelerated rate as we seek to match our technology needs and desires with our environmental responsibilities. At the time ofthis writing, which has spanned the latter portion of 1989 and early 1990, the issue of choosing a new approach to producing PW As free of detrimental residues while using environmentally acceptable manufacturing techniques ap­ peared to be the major concern of the vast majority of those involved in the printed wiring assembly industry. To many this meant the use of different clean­ ing media and/or process or equipment enhancements; to others it meant the elimination of the need to clean through materials or process changes.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 30
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401138581
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Reliability -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 What is Reliability? Why Want Reliability? Principles of Achieving Reliability -- 1.3 Quantifying Reliability -- 1.4 The Methods of Systems Reliability Synthesis -- 1.5 Need for Reliability Data -- 2 Principles of Reliability Data Bases -- 2.1 Purposes -- 2.2 Construction -- 2.3 Data Acquisition -- 2.4 Physical Implementation -- 2.5 Development and Operation -- 3 Analysis Methodologies -- 3.1 Restrictions Owing to Data Base Assumptions -- 3.2 Constant Fault-Rate or Failure-Rate Methods -- 3.3 Non-Constant Fault-Rate Methods; The Weibull Distribution -- 3.4 More General Data Structures -- 4 Some Achievements Due to the Development of Data Banks -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The Nuclear Industry -- 4.3 Aircraft Industry -- 4.4 Electronics Industry -- 4.5 Chemical Industry -- 4.6 Data -- 4.7 Computational Considerations -- 4.8 Data Needs or Requirements -- 4.9 Other Factors Worthy of Consideration -- 4.10 Staffing -- 5 Facts: Most Comprehensive Information System For Industrial Safety -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The TNO Organization -- 5.3 Looking Back on the Start of FACTS -- 5.4 Information Handling -- 5.5 Cause Classification -- 5.6 Data Base Structure -- 5.7 Storage of Original Documents -- 5.8 Applications and the Use of FACTS -- 5.9 New Advances in FACTS -- 5.10 Latest Developments -- 5.11 PC-FACTS -- 6 Reliability Data Collection In Process Plants -- 6.1 General Remarks -- 6.2 Data Collection -- 6.3 Data Treatment and Examples -- 6.4 Uncertainty, Applicability and Caution -- 7 The Centralized Reliability Data Organization (Credo); an Advanced Nuclear Reactor Reliability, Availability, and Maintainability Data Bank and Data Analysis Center -- 7.1 The Basis for CREDO -- 7.2 CREDO—An Historical Perspective -- 7.3 Data Initially Identified for Inclusion -- 7.4 CREDO Component Description and Classification -- 7.5 Design of Data Input -- 7.6 CREDO’S Data Base Management System -- 7.7 Statistical Data Analysis and Processing -- 7.8 CREDO Development Experience -- 7.9 Achievements and Future Directions of CREDO -- 8 The Fabrication Reliability Data Analysis System Dante-QC1 -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Concept of the DANTE Code System -- 8.3 Data Base Configuration -- 8.4 Processing Function -- 8.5 Application of DANTE for PIE Data Analysis -- 8.6 Future Directions -- 9 Reliability Data Banks at Electricite De France (EDF) -- 9.1 The Origins -- 9.2 History and Objectives of the EDF Data Banks -- 9.3 SRDF -- 9.4 Conclusion -- 10 IAEA’s Experience In Compiling A Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 IAEA’s Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 10.3 Problem Areas Connected with Generic Data Bases -- 10.4 Conclusion -- Appendix: Data Sources Included in the Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 11 The European Reliability Data System—Erds: Status And Future Developments -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 General Description of ERDS -- 11.3 The Component Event Data Bank (CEDB) -- 12 Development of A Large Data Bank -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The Data Bank System -- 12.3 Student Collection Scheme -- 12.4 The Item Inventory -- 12.5 Coded Storage -- 12.6 Output Data -- 12.7 Generic Reliability Data Output Enquiry and Reply Service -- 12.8 Reliability Improvements -- 13 Reliability Data Banks—Friend, Foe or A Waste of Time? -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 The Personalities -- 13.3 The DataBase Design -- 13.4 The Component Inventory Data -- 13.5 The Component History Data -- 13.6 Dependent Failures -- 13.7 Data Analysis -- 13.8 Pooled Reliability Data -- 13.9 The Successes -- 13.10 Conclusions -- 14 Developments -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Changes in Data Handling -- 14.3 Data Base Software -- 14.4 Methodology and Technology Led Changes -- 14.5 New Data Bases -- 14.6 R & M 2000 -- 14.7 Changes in Attitude -- 15 Overview; Into the Future -- 15.1 Forty Years of Always Being Wrong and Always Being Right -- 15.2 The Next Forty Years -- 15.3 Using External Data Sources and Making Up Data -- 15.4 Justifying a Reliability Data Base.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Reliability1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 What is Reliability? Why Want Reliability? Principles of Achieving Reliability -- 1.3 Quantifying Reliability -- 1.4 The Methods of Systems Reliability Synthesis -- 1.5 Need for Reliability Data -- 2 Principles of Reliability Data Bases -- 2.1 Purposes -- 2.2 Construction -- 2.3 Data Acquisition -- 2.4 Physical Implementation -- 2.5 Development and Operation -- 3 Analysis Methodologies -- 3.1 Restrictions Owing to Data Base Assumptions -- 3.2 Constant Fault-Rate or Failure-Rate Methods -- 3.3 Non-Constant Fault-Rate Methods; The Weibull Distribution -- 3.4 More General Data Structures -- 4 Some Achievements Due to the Development of Data Banks -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The Nuclear Industry -- 4.3 Aircraft Industry -- 4.4 Electronics Industry -- 4.5 Chemical Industry -- 4.6 Data -- 4.7 Computational Considerations -- 4.8 Data Needs or Requirements -- 4.9 Other Factors Worthy of Consideration -- 4.10 Staffing -- 5 Facts: Most Comprehensive Information System For Industrial Safety -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The TNO Organization -- 5.3 Looking Back on the Start of FACTS -- 5.4 Information Handling -- 5.5 Cause Classification -- 5.6 Data Base Structure -- 5.7 Storage of Original Documents -- 5.8 Applications and the Use of FACTS -- 5.9 New Advances in FACTS -- 5.10 Latest Developments -- 5.11 PC-FACTS -- 6 Reliability Data Collection In Process Plants -- 6.1 General Remarks -- 6.2 Data Collection -- 6.3 Data Treatment and Examples -- 6.4 Uncertainty, Applicability and Caution -- 7 The Centralized Reliability Data Organization (Credo); an Advanced Nuclear Reactor Reliability, Availability, and Maintainability Data Bank and Data Analysis Center -- 7.1 The Basis for CREDO -- 7.2 CREDO-An Historical Perspective -- 7.3 Data Initially Identified for Inclusion -- 7.4 CREDO Component Description and Classification -- 7.5 Design of Data Input -- 7.6 CREDO’S Data Base Management System -- 7.7 Statistical Data Analysis and Processing -- 7.8 CREDO Development Experience -- 7.9 Achievements and Future Directions of CREDO -- 8 The Fabrication Reliability Data Analysis System Dante-QC1 -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Concept of the DANTE Code System -- 8.3 Data Base Configuration -- 8.4 Processing Function -- 8.5 Application of DANTE for PIE Data Analysis -- 8.6 Future Directions -- 9 Reliability Data Banks at Electricite De France (EDF) -- 9.1 The Origins -- 9.2 History and Objectives of the EDF Data Banks -- 9.3 SRDF -- 9.4 Conclusion -- 10 IAEA’s Experience In Compiling A Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 IAEA’s Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 10.3 Problem Areas Connected with Generic Data Bases -- 10.4 Conclusion -- Appendix: Data Sources Included in the Generic Component Reliability Data Base -- 11 The European Reliability Data System-Erds: Status And Future Developments -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 General Description of ERDS -- 11.3 The Component Event Data Bank (CEDB) -- 12 Development of A Large Data Bank -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The Data Bank System -- 12.3 Student Collection Scheme -- 12.4 The Item Inventory -- 12.5 Coded Storage -- 12.6 Output Data -- 12.7 Generic Reliability Data Output Enquiry and Reply Service -- 12.8 Reliability Improvements -- 13 Reliability Data Banks-Friend, Foe or A Waste of Time? -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 The Personalities -- 13.3 The DataBase Design -- 13.4 The Component Inventory Data -- 13.5 The Component History Data -- 13.6 Dependent Failures -- 13.7 Data Analysis -- 13.8 Pooled Reliability Data -- 13.9 The Successes -- 13.10 Conclusions -- 14 Developments -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Changes in Data Handling -- 14.3 Data Base Software -- 14.4 Methodology and Technology Led Changes -- 14.5 New Data Bases -- 14.6 R & M 2000 -- 14.7 Changes in Attitude -- 15 Overview; Into the Future -- 15.1 Forty Years of Always Being Wrong and Always Being Right -- 15.2 The Next Forty Years -- 15.3 Using External Data Sources and Making Up Data -- 15.4 Justifying a Reliability Data Base.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 31
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401170765
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I. Modeling Consumer Demand for Food Safety and Nutrition -- 1. Consumer Demand for Food and Food Safety: Models and Applications -- 2. Modeling the Effect of Risk on Food Demand and the Implications for Regulation -- 3. A Model of the Demand and Supply of the Health Effects of Food Substances -- II. Application of Risk Assessment Methodology to Food Safety -- 4. Modeling Chronic Versus Acute Human Health Risk from Contaminants in Food -- 5. Conservatism in Risk Assessment and Food Safety Policy -- 6. Risk Assessment for Estimating the Economic Costs of Foodborne Disease Caused by Microorganisms -- 7. An Economic Framework for Assessing Foodbome Disease Control Strategies with an Application to Salmonella Control in Poultry -- III. Measurement of Consumer Response to Safety and Health Information -- 8. The Impact of Health Risk Information on Food Demand: A Case Study of Alar and Apples -- 9. Consumers’ Perceptions of Risks from Pesticide Residues and Demand for Certification of Residue-Free Produce -- 10. Consumer Reaction to the Introduction of Bovine Somatotropin -- 11. Information, Advertising, and Health Choices: A Study of the Cereal Market -- 12. Assessing the Effects of Diet/Health Awareness on the Consumption and Composition of Fat Intake -- IV. Analysis of the Supply of Food Safety -- 13. Firm Strategic Response to Food Safety and Nutrition Regulation -- 14. A Model of Firm Costs of Compliance with Food Labeling Regulations -- 15. An Economic Model of FDA’s Imported Foods Enforcement Program.
    Abstract: Public concern about the safety and healthfulness of the food supply grew markedly during the 1980s. Numerous government, academic, interest group, and media reports questioning the adequacy of the food safety regulatory system formed the basis for this increase in concern. While public concern focused most directly on pesticide residues in food, scientists emphasized the risks of illness associated with microbiological contamination of food. Much additional attention was focused on the food supply as a result of the striking consensus on dietary recommendations that emerged in the late 1980s based on increased scientific knowledge of linkages between diet and health. Relatively little research on the economic aspects of food safety and nutrition issues had been conducted up to the mid-1980s. These aspects are complex. On the consumer demand side, they include consumers' perceptions of the risks associated with particular food products, how demographic characteristics influence consumers' processing of risk information and subsequent changes in food demand behavior, and the monetary value consumers might place on changes in the risk profiles of products. The economic benefits and costs associated with current food consumption patterns are a major determinant of demand for improved food safety and dietary change through government regulation. While a more complete picture of risks, benefits, and costs has been emerging recently, much is yet unknown.
    Description / Table of Contents: I. Modeling Consumer Demand for Food Safety and Nutrition1. Consumer Demand for Food and Food Safety: Models and Applications -- 2. Modeling the Effect of Risk on Food Demand and the Implications for Regulation -- 3. A Model of the Demand and Supply of the Health Effects of Food Substances -- II. Application of Risk Assessment Methodology to Food Safety -- 4. Modeling Chronic Versus Acute Human Health Risk from Contaminants in Food -- 5. Conservatism in Risk Assessment and Food Safety Policy -- 6. Risk Assessment for Estimating the Economic Costs of Foodborne Disease Caused by Microorganisms -- 7. An Economic Framework for Assessing Foodbome Disease Control Strategies with an Application to Salmonella Control in Poultry -- III. Measurement of Consumer Response to Safety and Health Information -- 8. The Impact of Health Risk Information on Food Demand: A Case Study of Alar and Apples -- 9. Consumers’ Perceptions of Risks from Pesticide Residues and Demand for Certification of Residue-Free Produce -- 10. Consumer Reaction to the Introduction of Bovine Somatotropin -- 11. Information, Advertising, and Health Choices: A Study of the Cereal Market -- 12. Assessing the Effects of Diet/Health Awareness on the Consumption and Composition of Fat Intake -- IV. Analysis of the Supply of Food Safety -- 13. Firm Strategic Response to Food Safety and Nutrition Regulation -- 14. A Model of Firm Costs of Compliance with Food Labeling Regulations -- 15. An Economic Model of FDA’s Imported Foods Enforcement Program.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 32
    ISBN: 9789401165358
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1.1 Research Models in Mechanical Problems for Microelectronics and Fiber Optics -- 1.2 Theoretical Modeling -- 1.3 Analytical versus Numerical Modeling -- 1.4 Interaction with Experiment -- 1.5 Theoretical Modeling in Structural Analysis -- 1.6 Historical Sketch -- 1. Basic Principles of Engineering Elasticity -- 1. General Properties of Elastic Bodies -- 2. Equations and Conceptions -- 3. A View of Solution Procedures -- 4. The Elementary Problems -- 5. Strength Theories -- 6. Two-Dimensional Problem in Rectangular Coordinates -- 7. Two-Dimensional Problem in Polar Coordinates -- 8. Torsion -- 9. Fracture Mechanics -- 10. Plasticity -- 11. Viscoelasticity -- Questions and Problems -- 2. Fundamentals of Structural Analysis -- 12. Bending of Beams -- 13. The Variational and Energy Methods, and Some General Principles of Structural Analysis -- 14. Bending of Frames -- 15. Bending of Plates -- 16. Buckling -- 17. Numerical Methods -- 18. Experimental Techniques -- Questions and Problems -- Appendix: Tables of Beam Deflections.
    Abstract: This book contains the fundamentals of a discipline, which could be called Structural Analysis in Microelectronics and Fiber Optics. It deals with mechanical behavior of microelectronic and fiber-optic systems and is written in response to the crucial need for a textbook for a first in-depth course on mechanical problems in microelectronics and fiber optics. The emphasis of this book is on electronic and optical packaging problems, and analytical modeling. This book is apparently the first attempt to select, advance, and present those methods of classical structural mechanics which have been or can be applied in various stress-strain problems encountered in "high technology" engineering and some related areas, such as materials science and solid-state physics. The following major objectives are pursued in Structural Analysis in Microelectronic and Fiber-Optic Systems: Identify structural elements typical for microelectronic and fiber-optic systems and devices, and introduce the student to the basic concepts of the mechanical behavior of microelectronic and fiber-optic struc­ tures, subjected to thermally induced or external loading. Select, advance, and present methods for analyzing stresses and deflections developed in microelectronic and fiber-optic structures; demonstrate the effectiveness of the methods and approaches of the classical struc­ tural analysis in the diverse mechanical problems of microelectronics and fiber optics; and give students of engineering, as well as practicing engineers and designers, a thorough understanding of the main princi­ ples involved in the analytical evaluation of the mechanical behavior of microelectronic and fiber-optic systems.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.1 Research Models in Mechanical Problems for Microelectronics and Fiber Optics1.2 Theoretical Modeling -- 1.3 Analytical versus Numerical Modeling -- 1.4 Interaction with Experiment -- 1.5 Theoretical Modeling in Structural Analysis -- 1.6 Historical Sketch -- 1. Basic Principles of Engineering Elasticity -- 1. General Properties of Elastic Bodies -- 2. Equations and Conceptions -- 3. A View of Solution Procedures -- 4. The Elementary Problems -- 5. Strength Theories -- 6. Two-Dimensional Problem in Rectangular Coordinates -- 7. Two-Dimensional Problem in Polar Coordinates -- 8. Torsion -- 9. Fracture Mechanics -- 10. Plasticity -- 11. Viscoelasticity -- Questions and Problems -- 2. Fundamentals of Structural Analysis -- 12. Bending of Beams -- 13. The Variational and Energy Methods, and Some General Principles of Structural Analysis -- 14. Bending of Frames -- 15. Bending of Plates -- 16. Buckling -- 17. Numerical Methods -- 18. Experimental Techniques -- Questions and Problems -- Appendix: Tables of Beam Deflections.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 33
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401197144
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Representation of Mine Data -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Mine nomenclature -- 1.3 Subdivision of orebodies -- 1.4 Mine sections -- 1.5 Mine plans -- 1.6 Vertical longitudinal projections -- 1.7 Structure contour plans -- 1.8 Connolly diagrams -- 1.9 Dip contour maps -- 1.10 Structural unrolling — Palinspastic maps -- 1.11 2D and 3D block models -- 1.12 3D orebody projections -- 1.13 Histograms and cumulative frequency plots -- 1.14 Rose diagrams -- 1.15 Stereographic projections -- 1.16 Computer software -- 2 Mine Sampling -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Characterization of mineral deposits for sampling purposes -- 2.3 Grade elevation -- 2.4 Possible locations for underground sampling -- 2.5 Channel sampling -- 2.6 Chip sampling -- 2.7 Grab sampling -- 2.8 Percussion/blast-hole sampling -- 2.9 Diamond drill sampling -- 2.10 Prospect sampling -- 2.11 Continuous sampling for open-pit operations -- 2.12 Sampling of unconsolidated surficial deposits -- 2.13 The application of copper-sensitive paints -- 2.14 Grade analysis by fluorescence and spectrometric techniques -- 2.15 Sampling theory -- 2.16 Bulk sampling of gold ores -- 3 Ore-Reserves by ‘Classical Methods’ -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Classification of reserves and resources -- 3.3 Determination of potentially economic intersections -- 3.4 Mine/deposit reserves -- 3.5 Statistical estimators of grade -- 3.6 Ore-reserves by panel/section methods (underground operations) -- 3.7 Ore reserves by triangulation -- 3.8 Ore reserves by polygons -- 3.9 Ore reserves by block matrices -- 3.10 Contour methods -- 3.11 Inverse distance weighting methods (IDW) -- 3.12 Orebody modelling using IDW methods -- Appendix 3.1 USBM/USGS Classification of Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.2 APEO Classification of Reserves -- Appendix 3.3 AIMM/AMIC Classification of Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.4 Coal Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.5 Ore reserve calculation — worked example -- Appendix 3.6 Program listing for SGORE -- 4 Geostatistical Ore-Reserve Estimation -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The application of geostatistics -- 4.3 The theory of regionalized variables -- 4.4 Regularization and orebody subdivision -- 4.5 Production of the semi-variogram -- 4.6 Semi-variogram models -- 4.7 Semi-variogram phenomena in the spherical scheme -- 4.8 Model fitting in the spherical scheme -- 4.9 1D regularization (spherical scheme) -- 4.10 Block reserve estimates by kriging -- 4.11 Global reserve evaluation by kriging -- 4.12 Grade—tonnage curve -- 4.13 Kriging variances and ore-reserve classification -- 4.14 Extension variances in the spherical scheme -- 4.15 Volume—variance relationship -- 4.16 Indicator kriging (IK) -- Appendix 4.1 Determination of confidence limits for log-transformed data -- Appendix 4.2 Worked example — de Wijsian scheme -- Appendix 4.3 Mathematical basis of point kriging -- Appendix 4.4 Mathematical basis of block kriging -- Appendix 4.5 Extension variance graphs and tables for the spherical scheme -- 5 Design and Evaluation of Open-Pit Operations -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Design of open-pit operations -- 5.3 Evaluation of open-pit operations -- 5.4 Economic optimization of pit designs -- 6 Financing and Financial Evaluation of Mining Projects -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Financial aspects unique to mining projects -- 6.3 Capitalization of mining projects -- 6.4 Financial model of a mining project -- 6.5 Financial evaluation techniques -- 7 Grade Control -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Open-pit operations -- 7.3 Underground operations -- 8 Ore-Evaluation Case Histories -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Case history — White Pine Copper Mine, Michigan, USA -- 8.3 Case history — Evaluation of the J-M Pt-Pd Reef, Stillwater, Montana -- 8.4 Case history — East Ore Zone, Teck-Corona Gold Mine, Hemlo Canada -- 8.5 Case history — opencast coal mining in South Wales (R. MacCallum — British Coal) -- 8.6 Case history — Boulby Potash Mine, Cleveland, UK -- 8.7 Case history — exploration and evaluation of a glacial sand and gravel deposit (P. Brewer and P. Morse — Tarmac Roadstone, Northwest Limited) -- 8.8 Case history — limestone aggregates — The Tytherington Limestone Quarries, ARC Ltd -- 8.9 Cement — Cement Quality Limestones at Los Cedros, Venezuela (Blue Circle Industries PLC) -- 8.10 Case history — Navan Zn-Pb Mine, Eire (Tara Mines Ltd).
    Abstract: Although aspects of mineral deposit evaluation advantages and disadvantages of each technique are covered in such texts as McKinstry (1948), so that a judgement can be made as to their Peters (1978), Reedman (1979) and Barnes applicability to a particular deposit and the min­ (1980), no widely available in-depth treatment of ing method proposed or used. Too often, a lack the subject has been presented. It is thus the of this expertise results in the ore-reserve calcula­ intention of the present book to produce a text tion being undertaken at head-office or, indeed, by the survey department on the mine, and being which is suitable for both undergraduate and treated as a 'number crunching' or geometric postgraduate students of mining geology and exercise divorced from geology. It is essential mining engineering and which, at the same time, that mine ore-reserves are calculated at the mine is of use to those already following a professional by those geologists who are most closely associ­ career in the mining industry. An attempt has ated with the local geology and who are thus best been made to present the material in such a way able to influence and/or constrain the calculation.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Representation of Mine Data1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Mine nomenclature -- 1.3 Subdivision of orebodies -- 1.4 Mine sections -- 1.5 Mine plans -- 1.6 Vertical longitudinal projections -- 1.7 Structure contour plans -- 1.8 Connolly diagrams -- 1.9 Dip contour maps -- 1.10 Structural unrolling - Palinspastic maps -- 1.11 2D and 3D block models -- 1.12 3D orebody projections -- 1.13 Histograms and cumulative frequency plots -- 1.14 Rose diagrams -- 1.15 Stereographic projections -- 1.16 Computer software -- 2 Mine Sampling -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Characterization of mineral deposits for sampling purposes -- 2.3 Grade elevation -- 2.4 Possible locations for underground sampling -- 2.5 Channel sampling -- 2.6 Chip sampling -- 2.7 Grab sampling -- 2.8 Percussion/blast-hole sampling -- 2.9 Diamond drill sampling -- 2.10 Prospect sampling -- 2.11 Continuous sampling for open-pit operations -- 2.12 Sampling of unconsolidated surficial deposits -- 2.13 The application of copper-sensitive paints -- 2.14 Grade analysis by fluorescence and spectrometric techniques -- 2.15 Sampling theory -- 2.16 Bulk sampling of gold ores -- 3 Ore-Reserves by ‘Classical Methods’ -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Classification of reserves and resources -- 3.3 Determination of potentially economic intersections -- 3.4 Mine/deposit reserves -- 3.5 Statistical estimators of grade -- 3.6 Ore-reserves by panel/section methods (underground operations) -- 3.7 Ore reserves by triangulation -- 3.8 Ore reserves by polygons -- 3.9 Ore reserves by block matrices -- 3.10 Contour methods -- 3.11 Inverse distance weighting methods (IDW) -- 3.12 Orebody modelling using IDW methods -- Appendix 3.1 USBM/USGS Classification of Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.2 APEO Classification of Reserves -- Appendix 3.3 AIMM/AMIC Classification of Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.4 Coal Resources and Reserves -- Appendix 3.5 Ore reserve calculation - worked example -- Appendix 3.6 Program listing for SGORE -- 4 Geostatistical Ore-Reserve Estimation -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The application of geostatistics -- 4.3 The theory of regionalized variables -- 4.4 Regularization and orebody subdivision -- 4.5 Production of the semi-variogram -- 4.6 Semi-variogram models -- 4.7 Semi-variogram phenomena in the spherical scheme -- 4.8 Model fitting in the spherical scheme -- 4.9 1D regularization (spherical scheme) -- 4.10 Block reserve estimates by kriging -- 4.11 Global reserve evaluation by kriging -- 4.12 Grade-tonnage curve -- 4.13 Kriging variances and ore-reserve classification -- 4.14 Extension variances in the spherical scheme -- 4.15 Volume-variance relationship -- 4.16 Indicator kriging (IK) -- Appendix 4.1 Determination of confidence limits for log-transformed data -- Appendix 4.2 Worked example - de Wijsian scheme -- Appendix 4.3 Mathematical basis of point kriging -- Appendix 4.4 Mathematical basis of block kriging -- Appendix 4.5 Extension variance graphs and tables for the spherical scheme -- 5 Design and Evaluation of Open-Pit Operations -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Design of open-pit operations -- 5.3 Evaluation of open-pit operations -- 5.4 Economic optimization of pit designs -- 6 Financing and Financial Evaluation of Mining Projects -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Financial aspects unique to mining projects -- 6.3 Capitalization of mining projects -- 6.4 Financial model of a mining project -- 6.5 Financial evaluation techniques -- 7 Grade Control -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Open-pit operations -- 7.3 Underground operations -- 8 Ore-Evaluation Case Histories -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Case history - White Pine Copper Mine, Michigan, USA -- 8.3 Case history - Evaluation of the J-M Pt-Pd Reef, Stillwater, Montana -- 8.4 Case history - East Ore Zone, Teck-Corona Gold Mine, Hemlo Canada -- 8.5 Case history - opencast coal mining in South Wales (R. MacCallum - British Coal) -- 8.6 Case history - Boulby Potash Mine, Cleveland, UK -- 8.7 Case history - exploration and evaluation of a glacial sand and gravel deposit (P. Brewer and P. Morse - Tarmac Roadstone, Northwest Limited) -- 8.8 Case history - limestone aggregates - The Tytherington Limestone Quarries, ARC Ltd -- 8.9 Cement - Cement Quality Limestones at Los Cedros, Venezuela (Blue Circle Industries PLC) -- 8.10 Case history - Navan Zn-Pb Mine, Eire (Tara Mines Ltd).
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 34
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401179508
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Introduction to Cleanroom Technology -- The Need for Cleanrooms -- An Overview of Semiconductor Technology -- Other Cleanroom Applications -- The Impact of Cleanroom Technology -- 2. Microcontamination -- Types of Contamination -- Sources of Contamination -- Effects of Contamination -- Summary -- 3. Controlled Environment Concepts -- Performance Considerations -- Performance Standards -- Parameter Measurement -- Summary -- 4. Creating Clean Areas -- Construction Materials and Techniques -- Air Filtration -- Airflow -- Equipment and Material Decontamination -- Bringing Items into the Cleanroom -- Summary -- 5. Cleanroom Layout -- Mixed Flow Rooms -- Local Unidirectional Flow -- Modular Cleanrooms -- Tunnel Cleanrooms -- Total Vertical Laminar Flow -- Horizontal Laminar Flow -- Process Equipment -- Designing for Cleanroom Class -- Summary -- 6. Preconditioning, Control, and Static -- Air Handling Systems -- Fans and Air Control -- Static -- Summary -- 7. Site and Structural Considerations -- Vibration -- Site Selection -- Structure -- Internal Vibration Engineering -- Summary -- 8. Cleanrooms, Codes, and Legislation -- Principal Codes -- Fire Protection -- Legislation -- Summary -- 9. Ultrapure Water -- The Need for Ultrapure Water -- Constituents of Raw Water -- Purification Techniques -- RO/DI System Configurations -- Operational Considerations -- Summary -- 10. Production Materials -- Gases -- Wet Chemicals -- Handling Other Materials -- Summary -- 11. Personnel and Contamination -- Apparel -- Use of Apparel -- Work Practices -- Summary -- 12. Safety Issues -- Properties of Hazardous Production Materials -- Cleanroom Safety Practices -- Safety Equipment -- Handling Hazardous Production Materials -- Summary -- 13. The Future of Controlled Environments -- Advanced Cleanroom Concepts -- Enclosed Transfer Systems -- Robotics and Automation -- In-situ Processing -- Epilog—The Cleanroom as a System -- Appendix 1 Federal Standard 209D -- Appendix 2 Simplified Cleanroom Certification Procedure -- Appendix 3 Program and Sample Output.
    Abstract: In writing this book, our goal was to produce a much needed teaching and reference text with a fresh approach to c1eanroom technology. The most obvious technological reason for bringing this book into being is that c1ean­ rooms have become vital to the manufacture and development of high­ technology products in both the commercial and military sectors, and there­ fore people have to develop an understanding of them. Examples of c1ean­ room applications include the manufacture of integrated circuits and other electronic components, preciSion mechanical assemblies, computer disks and drives, compact disks, optical components, medical implants and prostheses, pharmaceuticals and biochemicals, and so on. The book is written for anyone who is currently involved, or intends to become involved, with c1eanrooms. We intend it to be used by a wide range of professional groups including process engineers, production engineers, plant mechanical and electrical engineers, research engineers and scientists, managers, and so on. In addition, we believe it will be beneficial to those who design, build, service, and supply c1eanrooms, and may be used as a training aid for students who intend to pursue a career involving controlled environments and others such as c1eanroom operators and maintenance staff. We have attempted to steer clear of complex theory, which may be pursued in many other specialist texts, and keep the book as understandable and applicable as possible.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Introduction to Cleanroom TechnologyThe Need for Cleanrooms -- An Overview of Semiconductor Technology -- Other Cleanroom Applications -- The Impact of Cleanroom Technology -- 2. Microcontamination -- Types of Contamination -- Sources of Contamination -- Effects of Contamination -- Summary -- 3. Controlled Environment Concepts -- Performance Considerations -- Performance Standards -- Parameter Measurement -- Summary -- 4. Creating Clean Areas -- Construction Materials and Techniques -- Air Filtration -- Airflow -- Equipment and Material Decontamination -- Bringing Items into the Cleanroom -- Summary -- 5. Cleanroom Layout -- Mixed Flow Rooms -- Local Unidirectional Flow -- Modular Cleanrooms -- Tunnel Cleanrooms -- Total Vertical Laminar Flow -- Horizontal Laminar Flow -- Process Equipment -- Designing for Cleanroom Class -- Summary -- 6. Preconditioning, Control, and Static -- Air Handling Systems -- Fans and Air Control -- Static -- Summary -- 7. Site and Structural Considerations -- Vibration -- Site Selection -- Structure -- Internal Vibration Engineering -- Summary -- 8. Cleanrooms, Codes, and Legislation -- Principal Codes -- Fire Protection -- Legislation -- Summary -- 9. Ultrapure Water -- The Need for Ultrapure Water -- Constituents of Raw Water -- Purification Techniques -- RO/DI System Configurations -- Operational Considerations -- Summary -- 10. Production Materials -- Gases -- Wet Chemicals -- Handling Other Materials -- Summary -- 11. Personnel and Contamination -- Apparel -- Use of Apparel -- Work Practices -- Summary -- 12. Safety Issues -- Properties of Hazardous Production Materials -- Cleanroom Safety Practices -- Safety Equipment -- Handling Hazardous Production Materials -- Summary -- 13. The Future of Controlled Environments -- Advanced Cleanroom Concepts -- Enclosed Transfer Systems -- Robotics and Automation -- In-situ Processing -- Epilog-The Cleanroom as a System -- Appendix 1 Federal Standard 209D -- Appendix 2 Simplified Cleanroom Certification Procedure -- Appendix 3 Program and Sample Output.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 35
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401159654
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 In the Abyss of Time -- 1 In the beginning -- 2 The beginning of life -- 3 The Archaean planet -- 2 The Occupation of the Planet -- 4 The variety of life -- 5 Life in the Archaean -- 6 The surface of the Proterozoic Earth -- 7 The birth of the eukaryotes -- 3 The Spread of the Eukaryotes -- 8 The early Palaeozoic explosion and its aftermath -- 9 The changing land -- 10 The rule of the reptiles -- 4 The Modern World -- 11 The new world -- 12 Humanity -- 13 Inhabiting an island.
    Abstract: Life has shaped the Earth, and the Earth has moulded the history of life. That history, the co-evolution of our ancestors and their horne, has much to teach us about our place on the planet today. We are part of the fabric of the biosphere. As we change that fabric we would be wise to understand how our horne was built. Our planet is neither a hotel nor a colony. It is not a place which life briefly inhabits during a transient occupation. Instead, it is our horne, designed by the deeds of our ancestors and suited to our own needs. The history of life on Earth is held in the geological record, which is composed of the rocks, water and air that are available for study on the planet's surface. These rocks, the oceans and the atmosphere are not simply stores of information for the excitement of fossil hunters and geochemists, or resources to exploit without thought. Their cre­ ation and continued existence form an integral part of the development and management of the Earth as the horne of life.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 In the Abyss of Time1 In the beginning -- 2 The beginning of life -- 3 The Archaean planet -- 2 The Occupation of the Planet -- 4 The variety of life -- 5 Life in the Archaean -- 6 The surface of the Proterozoic Earth -- 7 The birth of the eukaryotes -- 3 The Spread of the Eukaryotes -- 8 The early Palaeozoic explosion and its aftermath -- 9 The changing land -- 10 The rule of the reptiles -- 4 The Modern World -- 11 The new world -- 12 Humanity -- 13 Inhabiting an island.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 36
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401179539
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The importance of blood-sucking insects -- 1.1 The importance of blood-sucking insects -- 2 The evolution of the blood-sucking habit -- 2.1 Prolonged close association with vertebrates -- 2.2 Morphological pre-adaptation for piercing -- 3 Feeding preferences of blood-sucking insects -- 3.1 Host choice -- 3.2 Host choice and species complexes -- 4 Location of the host -- 4.1 The behavioural framework of host location -- 4.2 Appetitive searching -- 4.3 Activation and orientation -- 4.4 Attraction -- 4.5 Movement between hosts -- 5 Ingestion of the blood meal -- 5.1 Vertebrate haemostasis -- 5.2 Insect anti-haemostatic factors -- 5.3 Probing stimulants -- 5.4 Phagostimulants -- 5.5 Mouthparts -- 5.6 Blood intake -- 6 Managing the blood meal -- 6.1 Midgut anatomy -- 6.2 The blood meal -- 6.3 Gonotrophic concordance -- 6.4 Nutrition -- 6.5 Host hormones in the blood meal -- 6.6 Partitioning of resources from the blood meal -- 6.7 Autogeny -- 7 Host—insect interactions -- 7.1 Insect distribution on the surface of the host -- 7.2 Morphological specializations for life on the host -- 7.3 Host immune responses to insect salivary secretions -- 7.4 Behavioural defences of the host -- 7.5 Density-dependent effects on feeding success -- 8 Transmission of parasites by blood-sucking insects -- 8.1 Transmission routes -- 8.2 Specificity in vector—parasite relationships -- 8.3 Origin of vector—parasite relationships -- 8.4 Parasite strategies for contacting a vector -- 8.5 Parasite strategies for contacting a host -- 8.6 Vector pathology caused by parasites -- 8.7 Insect defence mechanisms -- 9 The blood-sucking insect groups -- 9.1 Insect classification -- 9.2 Phthiraptera -- 9.3 Hemiptera -- 9.4 Siphonaptera -- 9.5 Diptera -- 9.6 Other groups -- References.
    Abstract: Blood-sucking insects are the vectors of many of the most debilitating parasites of man and his domesticated animals. In addition they are of considerable direct cost to the agricultural industry through losses in milk and meat yields, and through damage to hides and wool, etc. So, not surprisingly, many books of medical and veterinary entomology have been written. Most of these texts are organized taxonomically giving the details of the life-cycles, bionomics, relationship to disease and economic importance of each of the insect groups in turn. I have taken a different approach. This book is topic led and aims to discuss the biological themes which are common in the lives of blood-sucking insects. To do this I have concentrated on those aspects of the biology of these fascinating insects which have been clearly modified in some way to suit the blood-sucking habit. For example, I have discussed feeding and digestion in some detail because feeding on blood presents insects with special problems, but I have not discussed respiration because it is not affected in any particular way by haematophagy. Naturally there is a subjective element in the choice of topics for discussion and the weight given to each. I hope that I have not let my enthusiasm for particular subjects get the better of me on too many occasions and that the subject material achieves an overall balance.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The importance of blood-sucking insects1.1 The importance of blood-sucking insects -- 2 The evolution of the blood-sucking habit -- 2.1 Prolonged close association with vertebrates -- 2.2 Morphological pre-adaptation for piercing -- 3 Feeding preferences of blood-sucking insects -- 3.1 Host choice -- 3.2 Host choice and species complexes -- 4 Location of the host -- 4.1 The behavioural framework of host location -- 4.2 Appetitive searching -- 4.3 Activation and orientation -- 4.4 Attraction -- 4.5 Movement between hosts -- 5 Ingestion of the blood meal -- 5.1 Vertebrate haemostasis -- 5.2 Insect anti-haemostatic factors -- 5.3 Probing stimulants -- 5.4 Phagostimulants -- 5.5 Mouthparts -- 5.6 Blood intake -- 6 Managing the blood meal -- 6.1 Midgut anatomy -- 6.2 The blood meal -- 6.3 Gonotrophic concordance -- 6.4 Nutrition -- 6.5 Host hormones in the blood meal -- 6.6 Partitioning of resources from the blood meal -- 6.7 Autogeny -- 7 Host-insect interactions -- 7.1 Insect distribution on the surface of the host -- 7.2 Morphological specializations for life on the host -- 7.3 Host immune responses to insect salivary secretions -- 7.4 Behavioural defences of the host -- 7.5 Density-dependent effects on feeding success -- 8 Transmission of parasites by blood-sucking insects -- 8.1 Transmission routes -- 8.2 Specificity in vector-parasite relationships -- 8.3 Origin of vector-parasite relationships -- 8.4 Parasite strategies for contacting a vector -- 8.5 Parasite strategies for contacting a host -- 8.6 Vector pathology caused by parasites -- 8.7 Insect defence mechanisms -- 9 The blood-sucking insect groups -- 9.1 Insect classification -- 9.2 Phthiraptera -- 9.3 Hemiptera -- 9.4 Siphonaptera -- 9.5 Diptera -- 9.6 Other groups -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 37
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401176149
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 1.1 Background -- 1.2 Structure and properties of plastics -- 1.3 Additives -- 1.4 Processing of plastics -- 1.5 Practical methods of processing -- 1.6 Interactions between shaping process and plastics materials -- Further reading -- 2 Fundamentals of design -- 2.1 Engineering design -- 2.2 Design limitations imposed by processing method -- 2.3 Product design -- 2.4 Importance of economics of processing in design -- Further reading -- 3 Styrene plastics -- 3.1 Polystyrene -- 3.2 High impact polystyrene -- 3.3 Styrene copolymers -- 3.4 ABS plastics -- 3.5 Polystyrene—poly(phenylene oxide) blends -- 4 Other amorphous thermoplastics -- 4.1 Poly(methyl methacrylate) -- 4.2 Cellulose plastics -- 4.3 Polycarbonates -- 5 Propylene plastics -- 5.1 Homopolymer and impact-modified grades -- 5.2 Filled polypropylene -- 5.3 Foamed polypropylene -- 5.4 Miscellaneous applications of propylene polymers -- 6 Other polyolefin plastics -- 6.1 Polyethylene -- 6.2 Ethylene copolymers -- 6.3 Polybut-1-ene -- 6.4 Poly-4-methylpent-1-ene -- 7 Other crystalline thermoplastics -- 7.1 Polyamides -- 7.2 Thermoplastic polyesters -- 7.3 Polyacetals -- 8 Vinyl chloride plastics -- 8.1 Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.2 Plasticized poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.3 Vinyl chloride copolymers -- 8.4 Blends of poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.5 Vinylidene chloride polymers and copolymers -- 9 Speciality thermoplastics -- 9.1 Fluoroplastics -- 9.2 Polysulphones -- 9.3 Poly(phenylene sulphide) -- 10 Cross-linked plastics -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Phenol-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.3 Urea-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.4 Melamine-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.5 Unsaturated polyester resins -- 10.6 Epoxide resins -- 11 Polyurethane plastics -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Molecular structure—property relationships -- 11.3 Properties and applications of polyurethanes -- Further reading.
    Abstract: Plastics are part of everyday life and contribute immensely to the benefit of humanity. When failures occur, they are due in part either to inferior properties (resulting from poor design or badly controlled processing), or to an incomplete understanding of the properties and applications of plastics materials. Since publication of the first edition, the plastics industry has increas­ ingly adopted advanced business procedures and automation (such as closed loop control and robotics), to combat the effects of recession, and has moved increasingly towards methods based on sound scientific and technological principles. Plastics have increasingly been used in appli­ cations once dominated by the use of metals and ceramics. For instance, in the automotive industry, the modern car now contains a much higher proportion of polymers, including commodity plastics and more spec­ ialized materials. In addition, compact discs are being made from new injection-moulding grades of polycarbonate, which meet the requirements of a demanding process. This second edition has been thoroughly revised and extended to include new materials, technologies and design concepts. Chapters on thermoplastics reflect the development of polymer blends and alloys, whilst the chapters devoted to thermosets have been reorganized to accommodate the renaissance in the applications of phenolics and to cover the growing importance of polyurethanes. The related two­ component process technologies are now included; having undergone major developments in the last decade, they have become important shaping processes.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction1.1 Background -- 1.2 Structure and properties of plastics -- 1.3 Additives -- 1.4 Processing of plastics -- 1.5 Practical methods of processing -- 1.6 Interactions between shaping process and plastics materials -- Further reading -- 2 Fundamentals of design -- 2.1 Engineering design -- 2.2 Design limitations imposed by processing method -- 2.3 Product design -- 2.4 Importance of economics of processing in design -- Further reading -- 3 Styrene plastics -- 3.1 Polystyrene -- 3.2 High impact polystyrene -- 3.3 Styrene copolymers -- 3.4 ABS plastics -- 3.5 Polystyrene-poly(phenylene oxide) blends -- 4 Other amorphous thermoplastics -- 4.1 Poly(methyl methacrylate) -- 4.2 Cellulose plastics -- 4.3 Polycarbonates -- 5 Propylene plastics -- 5.1 Homopolymer and impact-modified grades -- 5.2 Filled polypropylene -- 5.3 Foamed polypropylene -- 5.4 Miscellaneous applications of propylene polymers -- 6 Other polyolefin plastics -- 6.1 Polyethylene -- 6.2 Ethylene copolymers -- 6.3 Polybut-1-ene -- 6.4 Poly-4-methylpent-1-ene -- 7 Other crystalline thermoplastics -- 7.1 Polyamides -- 7.2 Thermoplastic polyesters -- 7.3 Polyacetals -- 8 Vinyl chloride plastics -- 8.1 Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.2 Plasticized poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.3 Vinyl chloride copolymers -- 8.4 Blends of poly(vinyl chloride) -- 8.5 Vinylidene chloride polymers and copolymers -- 9 Speciality thermoplastics -- 9.1 Fluoroplastics -- 9.2 Polysulphones -- 9.3 Poly(phenylene sulphide) -- 10 Cross-linked plastics -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Phenol-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.3 Urea-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.4 Melamine-formaldehyde plastics -- 10.5 Unsaturated polyester resins -- 10.6 Epoxide resins -- 11 Polyurethane plastics -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Molecular structure-property relationships -- 11.3 Properties and applications of polyurethanes -- Further reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 38
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401178495
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Survey of the Existing Analysis Methods -- 1. Introduction to the Injected-Absorbed-Current Method of Analysis -- 2. Elementary Converters Operating at Constant Frequency with Duty Ratio as Controlled Quantity -- 3. General Small-Signal, Low-Frequency Analysis of Switching Regulators -- 4. State-Variables-Averaging Method -- 2. Multiple-Loop Switching Power Cells -- 5. Elementary Switching Power Cells with Inductor Current as Controlled Quantity -- 6. Multiple-Loop Switching Cells Using Inductor Voltage in a Minor Feedback Loop -- 3. Special Configurations -- 7. ?uk and SEPIC Switching Cells -- 8. Analysis of Power Cells with Duty-Ratio Control at Variable Frequency -- 9. Free-Running Hysteretic Regulator -- 4. Applications of Linear Analysis Method -- 10. Interconnection of a Power Source and a Switching Regulator -- 11. Feedforward in Switching Regulators -- 12. Parallel Operation of Switching Regulators -- 5. Selected Analytic Approaches and Applications and Future Advances in Analysis Methods -- 13. Selected Analysis Examples -- 14. High-Frequency Extension of the Linear Cell Model -- Appendixes -- Appendix 1. Additional Information for Chapter 5 -- A1-1 Derivation of Time Delay Between Control and Injected Current for Constant Off Time Current-Mode Control -- A1-2 Control-to-Output Voltage Functions of CurrentMode-Controlled Buck Converter with Three Different Control Methods -- Appendix 2. Graphical-Analytical Representation of Transfer Functions -- A2-1 Introduction -- A2-2 Transfer Functions of Passive Networks -- References -- Appendix 3. Examples and Problems -- A3-1 Introduction -- A3-2 Appendix to Chapter 2—Regulators Employing Elementary Cells, Operating at Constant Switching Frequency, and with Duty Ratio as the Controlled Quantity -- A3-3 Appendix to Chapter 14—Successive Approximations of the Cell Controlled-Quantity-to-Output-Voltage Transfer Function -- Appendix 4. Sources of Technical Information -- A4-1 Conferences -- A4-2 Periodicals -- A4-3 Compendia -- A4-4 Textbooks.
    Abstract: The most critical part of the modern switching-mode power supply is the regulated dc/dc converter. Its dynamic behavior directly determines or influences four of the important characteristics of the power supply: • Stability of the feedback loop • Rejection of input-voltage ripple and the closely-related transient re­ sponse to input-voltage perturbation • Output impedance and the closely-related transient response to load perturbation • Compatibility with the input EMI filter Due to the complexity of the operation of the converter, predicting its dynamic behavior has not been easy. Without accurate prediction, and depending only on building the circuit and tinkering with it until the operation is satisfactory, the engineering cost can easily escalate and schedules can be missed. The situation is not much better when the circuit is built in the computer, using a general-purpose circuit-simulation program such as SPICE. (At the end of this book is a form for obtaining information on a computer program especially well suited for dynamic analysis of switching-mode power converters: DYANA, an acronym for "DYnamic ANAlysis. " DYANA is based on the method given in this book. ) The main goal of this book is to help the power-supply designer in the prediction of the dynamic behavior by providing user-friendly analytical tools, concrete results of already-made analyses, tabulated for easy application by the reader, and examples of how to apply the tools provided in the book.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Survey of the Existing Analysis Methods1. Introduction to the Injected-Absorbed-Current Method of Analysis -- 2. Elementary Converters Operating at Constant Frequency with Duty Ratio as Controlled Quantity -- 3. General Small-Signal, Low-Frequency Analysis of Switching Regulators -- 4. State-Variables-Averaging Method -- 2. Multiple-Loop Switching Power Cells -- 5. Elementary Switching Power Cells with Inductor Current as Controlled Quantity -- 6. Multiple-Loop Switching Cells Using Inductor Voltage in a Minor Feedback Loop -- 3. Special Configurations -- 7. ?uk and SEPIC Switching Cells -- 8. Analysis of Power Cells with Duty-Ratio Control at Variable Frequency -- 9. Free-Running Hysteretic Regulator -- 4. Applications of Linear Analysis Method -- 10. Interconnection of a Power Source and a Switching Regulator -- 11. Feedforward in Switching Regulators -- 12. Parallel Operation of Switching Regulators -- 5. Selected Analytic Approaches and Applications and Future Advances in Analysis Methods -- 13. Selected Analysis Examples -- 14. High-Frequency Extension of the Linear Cell Model -- Appendixes -- Appendix 1. Additional Information for Chapter 5 -- A1-1 Derivation of Time Delay Between Control and Injected Current for Constant Off Time Current-Mode Control -- A1-2 Control-to-Output Voltage Functions of CurrentMode-Controlled Buck Converter with Three Different Control Methods -- Appendix 2. Graphical-Analytical Representation of Transfer Functions -- A2-1 Introduction -- A2-2 Transfer Functions of Passive Networks -- References -- Appendix 3. Examples and Problems -- A3-1 Introduction -- A3-2 Appendix to Chapter 2-Regulators Employing Elementary Cells, Operating at Constant Switching Frequency, and with Duty Ratio as the Controlled Quantity -- A3-3 Appendix to Chapter 14-Successive Approximations of the Cell Controlled-Quantity-to-Output-Voltage Transfer Function -- Appendix 4. Sources of Technical Information -- A4-1 Conferences -- A4-2 Periodicals -- A4-3 Compendia -- A4-4 Textbooks.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 39
    ISBN: 9789401767965
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIX, 189 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Law ; Private international law. ; Conflict of laws. ; International law. ; Comparative law. ; Political science.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 40
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands | Dordrecht : Imprint: Springer
    ISBN: 9789401131223
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xi, 197 p) , ill
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Getting started -- 2 Passive circuits -- 3 Introducing active devices -- 4 File and analysis features -- 5 Output options -- 6 Multivalued resistors -- 7 Circuit waveforms and frequency response: Nyquist plot -- 8 Linear circuits: square waves and step functions -- 9 Non-linear circuits and waveform shaping -- Appendix A Control codes -- Appendix B HSpice Discrete Components library -- Appendix C Answers.
    Abstract: After many years of teaching circuit theory and analogue electronic circuits the author believes that for most students the main path to obtaining a good understanding of the principles involved, as measured by their ability to apply them in a correct and intelligent manner, is through problem solving and design exercises. In an ideal world the student would be able to construct the circuit being analysed or designed, and so directly test the calculated or pre­ dicted results. Indeed, experience leads to the conclusion that typical students like to see their own circuits perform as intended, with a con­ sequent increase in motivation. At present, however, time and facility constraints mean that most of this work is of the pencil and paper variety, students having few opportunities to see the consequences of their efforts in a practical situation. At best they have to accept sample solutions or simply num­ erical answers. This path can seem tedious to all but the most motivated of students, so an alternative which can provide many of the benefits of direct circuit testing within the time and resources available is of im­ mediate interest. This is where the MINNIE and HSpice simulation package can assist the undergraduate teaching activity.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Getting started2 Passive circuits -- 3 Introducing active devices -- 4 File and analysis features -- 5 Output options -- 6 Multivalued resistors -- 7 Circuit waveforms and frequency response: Nyquist plot -- 8 Linear circuits: square waves and step functions -- 9 Non-linear circuits and waveform shaping -- Appendix A Control codes -- Appendix B HSpice Discrete Components library -- Appendix C Answers.
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 41
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401137003
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VI, 473 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- Unit 1 Citrus Juice Characteristics -- 2 Brix and Soluble Solids -- 3 Acids in Citrus Juices -- 4 The Brix/Acid Ratio -- 5 Testing of Fruit Samples -- 6 Citrus Oils, Aromas, and Essences -- 7 Citrus Juice Pulp -- 8 Juice Cloud -- 9 Color of Citrus Juices -- 10 Bitterness in Citrus Juices -- 11 Nutritional Content of Citrus Juices -- 12 Citrus Rheology -- 13 Citrus Processing Varieties -- Unit 2 Citrus Juice Sanitation -- 14 Inspections -- 15 Citrus Microbiology -- 16 Insects, Rodents, and Birds -- 17 Physical and Chemical Contamination -- 18 Processing Contamination -- 19 Juice Adulteration -- Unit 3 Citrus Juice By-Products -- 20 Food-Grade Nonjuice Products -- 21 Animal Feed and Fuel By-Products -- 22 Wastes from Citrus Plants -- Unit 4 Citrus Juice Management -- 23 Quality Control Statistics -- 24 Quality Control Management -- 25 Inventory Management -- Appendix A Acid Corrections to the Brix -- Appendix B GWBASIC and RPG Programs -- Appendix C HP-41C Programmable Calculator Programs -- Appendix D Answers to Select Questions and Problems.
    Abstract: Citrus juices constitute the majority of the fruit juices consumed in the United States and around the world. Along with the rest of the fruit juice industry, they playa major role in the entire food industry as well. In spite of this prominence, few texts have been written on quality control technology; and most of the texts have been written by researchers who may possess great technical skill but generally are less familiar with daily routine quality control problems and con­ cerns than quality control technologists are. On the other hand, quality control technologists and managers generally do not have the time and/or the talent to write books or communicate through scientific literature. The author recognized the need for an updated, comprehensive, and easily understood text on citrus quality control. This text has been designed to be used not only by processors, bottlers, canners, and others involved in the citrus in­ dustry, but it can be of value to instructors and students of citrus technology. Researchers also can find value in the foundations laid down by the text, es­ pecially in regard to the needs and concerns of the processing industry. Also, consultants and marketing personnel will be greatly helped by understanding the concepts of this volume. Persons in related industries also will find many applications that can be easily adapted to their needs.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 IntroductionUnit 1 Citrus Juice Characteristics -- 2 Brix and Soluble Solids -- 3 Acids in Citrus Juices -- 4 The Brix/Acid Ratio -- 5 Testing of Fruit Samples -- 6 Citrus Oils, Aromas, and Essences -- 7 Citrus Juice Pulp -- 8 Juice Cloud -- 9 Color of Citrus Juices -- 10 Bitterness in Citrus Juices -- 11 Nutritional Content of Citrus Juices -- 12 Citrus Rheology -- 13 Citrus Processing Varieties -- Unit 2 Citrus Juice Sanitation -- 14 Inspections -- 15 Citrus Microbiology -- 16 Insects, Rodents, and Birds -- 17 Physical and Chemical Contamination -- 18 Processing Contamination -- 19 Juice Adulteration -- Unit 3 Citrus Juice By-Products -- 20 Food-Grade Nonjuice Products -- 21 Animal Feed and Fuel By-Products -- 22 Wastes from Citrus Plants -- Unit 4 Citrus Juice Management -- 23 Quality Control Statistics -- 24 Quality Control Management -- 25 Inventory Management -- Appendix A Acid Corrections to the Brix -- Appendix B GWBASIC and RPG Programs -- Appendix C HP-41C Programmable Calculator Programs -- Appendix D Answers to Select Questions and Problems.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 42
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401097604
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Telecommunication. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 1.1 Historical Development of Satellites -- 1.2 Communication Satellite Systems -- 1.3 Communication Satellites -- 1.4 Orbiting Satellites -- 1.5 Satellite Frequency Bands -- 1.6 Satellite Multiple-Access Formats -- References -- Problems -- 2 Modulation, Encoding, and Decoding -- 2.1 Analog Modulation -- 2.2 Analog FM Carriers -- 2.3 Digital Encoding -- 2.4 Spectral Shaping -- 2.5 Digital Decoding -- 2.6 Error-Correction Decoding -- 2.7 Block Waveform Encoding -- 2.8 Digital Throughput -- References -- Problems -- 3 The Satellite Channel -- 3.1 Electromagnetic Field Propagation -- 3.2 Antennas -- 3.3 Atmospheric Losses -- 3.4 Receiver Noise -- 3.5 Carrier-to-Noise Ratios -- 3.6 Satellite Link Analysis -- 3.7 Dual Polarization -- 3.8 Effect of Depolarization on Dual Polarized Communications -- 3.9 Spot Beams in Satellite Downlinks -- References -- Problems -- 4 Satellite Electronics -- 4.1 The Transponder Model -- 4.2 The Satellite Front End -- 4.3 RF Filtering of Digital Carriers -- 4.4 Satellite Signal Processing -- 4.5 Frequency Generators -- 4.6 Transponder Limiting -- 4.7 Nonlinear Satellite Amplifiers -- References -- Problems -- 5 Frequency—Division Multiple Access -- 5.1 The FDMA System -- 5.2 Nonlinear Amplification with Multiple FDMA Carriers -- 5.3 FDMA Nonlinear Analysis -- 5.4 FDMA Channelization -- 5.5 AM/PM Conversion with FDMA -- 5.6 Satellite-Switched FDMA -- References -- Problems -- 6 Time-Division Multiple Access -- 6.1 The TDMA System -- 6.2 Preamble Design -- 6.3 Satellite Effects on TDMA Performance -- 6.4 Network Synchronization -- 6.5 SS-TDMA -- References -- Problems -- 7 Code-Division Multiple Access -- 7.1 Direct-Sequence CDMA Systems -- 7.2 Code Generation for DS-CDMA Systems -- 7.3 Performance of DS-CDMA Systems -- 7.4 Combined Error Correction and Code Addressing in DS-CDMA -- 7.5 Antijam Advantages of Direct Code Addressing -- 7.6 Satellite Jamming with DS-CDMA -- 7.7 DS-CDMA Code Acquisition and Tracking -- References -- Problems -- 8 Frequency-Hopped Communications -- 8.1 The Frequency-Hopped System -- 8.2 Frequency-Hopping Synthesizers -- 8.3 Performance of Frequency-Hopped Systems -- 8.4 Frequency-Hopped CDMA Systems -- 8.5 Jamming in Frequency-Hopped Systems -- 8.6 Code Acquisition and Tracking in FH Systems -- References -- Problems -- 9 On-Board Processing -- 9.1 On-Board Processing Subsystems -- 9.2 Baseband Digital Decoding -- 9.3 Data Reclocking, Routing, and Multiplexing -- 9.4 TDM-FDM Conversion -- 9.5 On-Board Remodulation -- 9.6 On-Board Baseband Processing with Beam Hopping -- 9.7 Multiple Spot Beaming -- 9.8 Photonic On-Board Processing -- References -- Problems -- 10 Satellite Crosslinks -- 10.1 The Crosslink System -- 10.2 Crossline Power Budget -- 10.3 Coherent and Noncoherent Communications at EHF -- 10.4 Autotracking -- 10.5 Autotrack Loop Analysis -- 10.6 Effect of Autotract Pointing Errors on PE -- 10.7 Optical Crosslinks -- References -- Problems -- 11 VSAT and Mobile-Satellite Systems -- 11.1 VSAT-Satellite-System Concept -- 11.2 Small-Terminal-Satellite Link Analysis -- 11.3 VSAT and Hub Networks -- 11.4 Direct Home TV Broadcasting -- 11.5 The Mobile-Satellite Channel -- 11.6 Communicating over the Mobile-Satellite Channel -- 11.7 Interleaving to Combat Deep Fading -- 11.8 Combined Coding and Modulation for the Mobile Channel -- References -- Problems -- Appendices -- A Review of Digital Communications -- A.1 Baseband Digital Waveforms -- A.2 BPSK Systems -- A.3 QPSK Carrier Waveform -- A.4 FSK -- A.5 DPSK -- A.6 MPSP -- A.7 Correlation Detection of Orthogonal BPSK -- A.8 MFSK -- A.9 Effect of Phase Noise on Noncoherent FSK and DPSK Systems -- A.10 MASK -- References -- B Carrier Recovery and bit Timing -- B.1 Carrier Recovery -- B.2 BPSK Carrier Recovery -- B.3 QPSK Carrier Referencing -- B.4 MPSK Carrier Referencing Systems -- B.5 Bit Timing -- References -- C Satellite Ranging and Position Location Systems -- C.1 Ranging Systems -- C.2 Component Range Codes -- C.3 Tone-Ranging Systems -- C.4 Position Locating and Navigation -- D Nonlinear Amplification of Carrier Waveforms.
    Abstract: This second edition of Satellite Communications is a revised, updated, and improved version of the first edition (Van Nostrand, 1984) and has been extended to include many newer topics that are rapidly becoming important in modem and next-generation satellite systems. The first half of the book again covers the basics of satellite links, but has been updated to include additional areas such as Global Positioning and deep space satellites, dual polarization, multiple beaming, advanced satellite electronics, frequency synthesizers, and digital frequency generators. The second half of the book is all new, covering frequency and beam hopping, on-board processing, EHF and optical cross­ links, and mobile satellites and VSAT systems. All of these latter topics figure to be important aspects of satellite systems and space platforms of the twenty-first century. As in the first edition, the objective of the new edition is to present a unified approach to satellite communications, helping the reader to become familiar with the terminology, models, analysis procedures, and evolving design directions for modem and future satellites. The presentation stresses overall system analysis and block diagram design, as opposed to complicated mathematical or physics descriptions. (Backup mathematics is relegated to the appendices where a reader can digest the detail at his own pace. ) The discussion begins with the simplest satellite systems and builds to the more complex payloads presently being used.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction1.1 Historical Development of Satellites -- 1.2 Communication Satellite Systems -- 1.3 Communication Satellites -- 1.4 Orbiting Satellites -- 1.5 Satellite Frequency Bands -- 1.6 Satellite Multiple-Access Formats -- References -- Problems -- 2 Modulation, Encoding, and Decoding -- 2.1 Analog Modulation -- 2.2 Analog FM Carriers -- 2.3 Digital Encoding -- 2.4 Spectral Shaping -- 2.5 Digital Decoding -- 2.6 Error-Correction Decoding -- 2.7 Block Waveform Encoding -- 2.8 Digital Throughput -- References -- Problems -- 3 The Satellite Channel -- 3.1 Electromagnetic Field Propagation -- 3.2 Antennas -- 3.3 Atmospheric Losses -- 3.4 Receiver Noise -- 3.5 Carrier-to-Noise Ratios -- 3.6 Satellite Link Analysis -- 3.7 Dual Polarization -- 3.8 Effect of Depolarization on Dual Polarized Communications -- 3.9 Spot Beams in Satellite Downlinks -- References -- Problems -- 4 Satellite Electronics -- 4.1 The Transponder Model -- 4.2 The Satellite Front End -- 4.3 RF Filtering of Digital Carriers -- 4.4 Satellite Signal Processing -- 4.5 Frequency Generators -- 4.6 Transponder Limiting -- 4.7 Nonlinear Satellite Amplifiers -- References -- Problems -- 5 Frequency-Division Multiple Access -- 5.1 The FDMA System -- 5.2 Nonlinear Amplification with Multiple FDMA Carriers -- 5.3 FDMA Nonlinear Analysis -- 5.4 FDMA Channelization -- 5.5 AM/PM Conversion with FDMA -- 5.6 Satellite-Switched FDMA -- References -- Problems -- 6 Time-Division Multiple Access -- 6.1 The TDMA System -- 6.2 Preamble Design -- 6.3 Satellite Effects on TDMA Performance -- 6.4 Network Synchronization -- 6.5 SS-TDMA -- References -- Problems -- 7 Code-Division Multiple Access -- 7.1 Direct-Sequence CDMA Systems -- 7.2 Code Generation for DS-CDMA Systems -- 7.3 Performance of DS-CDMA Systems -- 7.4 Combined Error Correction and Code Addressing in DS-CDMA -- 7.5 Antijam Advantages of Direct Code Addressing -- 7.6 Satellite Jamming with DS-CDMA -- 7.7 DS-CDMA Code Acquisition and Tracking -- References -- Problems -- 8 Frequency-Hopped Communications -- 8.1 The Frequency-Hopped System -- 8.2 Frequency-Hopping Synthesizers -- 8.3 Performance of Frequency-Hopped Systems -- 8.4 Frequency-Hopped CDMA Systems -- 8.5 Jamming in Frequency-Hopped Systems -- 8.6 Code Acquisition and Tracking in FH Systems -- References -- Problems -- 9 On-Board Processing -- 9.1 On-Board Processing Subsystems -- 9.2 Baseband Digital Decoding -- 9.3 Data Reclocking, Routing, and Multiplexing -- 9.4 TDM-FDM Conversion -- 9.5 On-Board Remodulation -- 9.6 On-Board Baseband Processing with Beam Hopping -- 9.7 Multiple Spot Beaming -- 9.8 Photonic On-Board Processing -- References -- Problems -- 10 Satellite Crosslinks -- 10.1 The Crosslink System -- 10.2 Crossline Power Budget -- 10.3 Coherent and Noncoherent Communications at EHF -- 10.4 Autotracking -- 10.5 Autotrack Loop Analysis -- 10.6 Effect of Autotract Pointing Errors on PE -- 10.7 Optical Crosslinks -- References -- Problems -- 11 VSAT and Mobile-Satellite Systems -- 11.1 VSAT-Satellite-System Concept -- 11.2 Small-Terminal-Satellite Link Analysis -- 11.3 VSAT and Hub Networks -- 11.4 Direct Home TV Broadcasting -- 11.5 The Mobile-Satellite Channel -- 11.6 Communicating over the Mobile-Satellite Channel -- 11.7 Interleaving to Combat Deep Fading -- 11.8 Combined Coding and Modulation for the Mobile Channel -- References -- Problems -- Appendices -- A Review of Digital Communications -- A.1 Baseband Digital Waveforms -- A.2 BPSK Systems -- A.3 QPSK Carrier Waveform -- A.4 FSK -- A.5 DPSK -- A.6 MPSP -- A.7 Correlation Detection of Orthogonal BPSK -- A.8 MFSK -- A.9 Effect of Phase Noise on Noncoherent FSK and DPSK Systems -- A.10 MASK -- References -- B Carrier Recovery and bit Timing -- B.1 Carrier Recovery -- B.2 BPSK Carrier Recovery -- B.3 QPSK Carrier Referencing -- B.4 MPSK Carrier Referencing Systems -- B.5 Bit Timing -- References -- C Satellite Ranging and Position Location Systems -- C.1 Ranging Systems -- C.2 Component Range Codes -- C.3 Tone-Ranging Systems -- C.4 Position Locating and Navigation -- D Nonlinear Amplification of Carrier Waveforms.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 43
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400904415
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIII, 634 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Planar Processing and Basic Devices -- 2. Wafers -- 3. Wafer Measurements -- 4. Equilibrium Concepts -- 5. Oxidation -- 6. Diffusion: Predeposition -- 7. Diffusion; Redistribution -- 8. Ion Implantation -- 9. Chemical Vapor Deposition; Epitaxy -- 10. Etching -- 11. Lithography -- 12. Physical Vapor Deposition; Sputtering -- Appendix A. Four-Point-Probe Derivations; Optical Interference -- A.1 Semi-Infinite (S-I) Sample -- A.2 Thickness Correction for l-t Samples -- A.3 Logarithmic Potential Derivation for Thin Samples -- A.4 Optical Interference -- Appendix B. Ion/Field Interactions -- Appendix C. The Glow Discharge -- C.1 General Gas Discharge -- C.2 The Glow -- C.3 A-C/R-F Glow Discharge -- C.4 R-F Problems -- C.5 Modified Techniques -- Appendix D. Gas Systems -- D.1 Basic Concepts -- D.2 Conductance Calculations -- D.3 Gas Supply Systems -- D.4 Gas Distribution Systems -- D.5 Exhaust Pump Considerations -- F.5.4. Dry Oxidation Curves for (111) Silicon Showing the Effect of Oxidant Pressure -- F.5.5. Dry Oxidation Curves of (111) Silicon with Added Chlorides -- F.5.6. Wet Oxidation of (111) Silicon and Silicon Nitride -- F.5.7. MBASIC Program for Oxidation of Silicon at Atmospheric Pressure -- F.6.1. Diffusion Data -- F.6.2. Error Function Properties -- F.6.3. Error Function Table -- F.6.5. Irvin Sheet Resistance Curves -- F.6.6. Oxide Masking Curves for Boron Predep -- F.6.7. Oxide Masking Curves for Phosphorus Predep -- F.6.8. Vapor Pressure Curves of Liquid Predep Sources -- F.6.10 Boron Nitride Predep Curves -- F.8.1. Ion Implantation: Effective Range Data -- Appendix G. Numerical Constants -- Appendix H. Furnace Construction.
    Abstract: Planar Processing Primer is based on lecture notes for a silicon planar process­ ing lecture/lab course offered at the University of Illinois-UC for over fifteen years. Directed primarily to electrical engineering upperclassmen and graduate students, the material also has been used successfully by graduate students in physics and ceramic and metallurgical engineering. It is suitable for self-study by engineers trained in other disciplines who are beginning work in the semiconductor fields, and it can make circuit design engineers aware of the processing limitations under which they must work. The text describes and explains, at an introductory level, the principal processing steps used to convert raw silicon into a semiconductor device or integrated circuit. First-order models are used for theoretical treatments (e.g., of diffusion and ion implantation), with reference made to more advanced treatments, to computer programs such as SUPREM that include higher order effects, and to interactions among sequential processes. In Chapters 8, 9, and to, the application of silicon processes to compound semiconductors is discussed briefly. Over the past several years, the size of transistors has decreased markedly, allowing more transistors per chip unit area, and chip size has increased.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 44
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400907850
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 45
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400904118
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The underwater visual environment -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Definition of terms -- 1.3 The photic environment -- 1.4 Underwater vision and ultraviolet light -- 1.5 Dynamic changes in underwater light - spatiotemporal properties -- 1.6 The underwater polarized light field -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 2 The optical system of fishes -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.1 Optics -- 2.3 Accommodation -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 3 Optical variability of the fish lens -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Lens shape -- 3.3 Relative focal length (Matthiessen’s ratio) -- 3.4 Spherical aberration -- 3.5 Chromatic aberration -- 3.6 Functional significance of fish lens quality -- 3.7 Concluding remarks -- References -- 4 Visual pigments of fishes -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Visual pigment structure -- 4.3 Receptor types -- 4.4 Distribution of visual pigments -- References -- 5 Retinal structure of fishes -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Diversity of retinal structure -- 5.3 Differentiation, structure and connectivity of retinal cells -- 5.4 Cyclic changes of cell morphology in the outer retina -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 6 Electrophysiological characteristics of retinal neurones: synaptic interactions and functional outputs -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Receptive field organizations: spatial and spectral aspects -- 6.3 Voltage-dependent conductances -- 6.4 Specific synaptic interactions -- 6.5 Efferent inputs -- 6.6 Concluding remarks -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 7 Neurotransmitters and neuromodulators of the fish retina -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Neurotransmitters of the distal retina -- 7.3 Neurotransmitters of the proximal retina -- 7.4 Summary -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 8 Tectal morphology: connections, neurones and synapses -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Retinal projections -- 8.3 Tectal position and lamination -- 8.4 Tectal afferents -- 8.5 Intrinsic structural organization of the tectum -- 8.6 Tectal efferents -- 8.7 Concluding remarks -- Abbreviations -- References -- 9 The physiology of the teleostean optic tectum -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 General physiological properties -- 9.3 Tectal input pathways: the retinotectal pathway -- 9.4 The marginal fibre pathway -- 9.5 The retinal efferents (retinopetal component) -- 9.6 The tectoreticular pathway -- 9.7 Conclusion -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 10 The visual pathways and central non-tectal processing -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Visual structures in the diencephalon including the pretectum -- 10.3 Visual structures in the telencephalon -- 10.4 Visual structures in the ventral mesencephalon -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 11 Behavioural studies of fish vision: an analysis of visual capabilities -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Behavioural methods -- 11.3 Visual capabilities -- References -- 12 Development of the visual system -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Development of the optics of the eye -- 12.3 Development of the retina -- 12.4 Development of the optic tectum -- References -- 13 Haplochromis burtoni: a case study -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Visually guided behaviour -- 13.3 Social regulation of growth -- 13.4 Retinal structure -- 13.5 Retinal growth -- 13.6Summary -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 14 Vision in elasmobranchs -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Physiological optics -- 14.3 Tapetum lucidum -- 14.4 Retinal anatomy and physiology -- 14.5 Concluding remarks -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 15 Stimulus, environment and vision in fishes -- 15.1 Introduction -- 15.2 The underwater light environment -- 15.3 Visual adaptations to the environment -- 15.4 Fish as visual stimuli -- 15.5 Summary -- References -- Species index.
    Abstract: A question often asked of those of us who work in the seemingly esoteric field of fish vision is, why? To some of us the answer seems obvious - how many other visual scientists get to dive in a tropical lagoon in the name of science and then are able to eat their subjects for dinner? However, there are better, or at least scientifically more acceptable, reasons for working on the visual system of fish. First, in terms of numbers, fish are by far the most important of all vertebrate classes, probably accounting for over half (c. 22 000 species) of all recognized vertebrate species (Nelson, 1984). Furthermore, many of these are of commercial importance. Secondly, if one of the research aims is to understand the human visual system, animals such as fish can tell us a great deal, since in many ways their visual systems, and specifically their eyes, are similar to our own. This is fortunate, since there are several techniques, such as intracellular retinal recording, which are vital to our understanding of the visual process, that cannot be performed routinely on primates. The cold­ blooded fish, on the other hand, is an ideal subject for such studies and much of what we know about, for example, the fundamentals of information processing in the retina is based on work carried out on fish (e. g. Svaetichin, 1953).
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The underwater visual environment1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Definition of terms -- 1.3 The photic environment -- 1.4 Underwater vision and ultraviolet light -- 1.5 Dynamic changes in underwater light - spatiotemporal properties -- 1.6 The underwater polarized light field -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 2 The optical system of fishes -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.1 Optics -- 2.3 Accommodation -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 3 Optical variability of the fish lens -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Lens shape -- 3.3 Relative focal length (Matthiessen’s ratio) -- 3.4 Spherical aberration -- 3.5 Chromatic aberration -- 3.6 Functional significance of fish lens quality -- 3.7 Concluding remarks -- References -- 4 Visual pigments of fishes -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Visual pigment structure -- 4.3 Receptor types -- 4.4 Distribution of visual pigments -- References -- 5 Retinal structure of fishes -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Diversity of retinal structure -- 5.3 Differentiation, structure and connectivity of retinal cells -- 5.4 Cyclic changes of cell morphology in the outer retina -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 6 Electrophysiological characteristics of retinal neurones: synaptic interactions and functional outputs -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Receptive field organizations: spatial and spectral aspects -- 6.3 Voltage-dependent conductances -- 6.4 Specific synaptic interactions -- 6.5 Efferent inputs -- 6.6 Concluding remarks -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 7 Neurotransmitters and neuromodulators of the fish retina -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Neurotransmitters of the distal retina -- 7.3 Neurotransmitters of the proximal retina -- 7.4 Summary -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 8 Tectal morphology: connections, neurones and synapses -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Retinal projections -- 8.3 Tectal position and lamination -- 8.4 Tectal afferents -- 8.5 Intrinsic structural organization of the tectum -- 8.6 Tectal efferents -- 8.7 Concluding remarks -- Abbreviations -- References -- 9 The physiology of the teleostean optic tectum -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 General physiological properties -- 9.3 Tectal input pathways: the retinotectal pathway -- 9.4 The marginal fibre pathway -- 9.5 The retinal efferents (retinopetal component) -- 9.6 The tectoreticular pathway -- 9.7 Conclusion -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 10 The visual pathways and central non-tectal processing -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Visual structures in the diencephalon including the pretectum -- 10.3 Visual structures in the telencephalon -- 10.4 Visual structures in the ventral mesencephalon -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 11 Behavioural studies of fish vision: an analysis of visual capabilities -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Behavioural methods -- 11.3 Visual capabilities -- References -- 12 Development of the visual system -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 Development of the optics of the eye -- 12.3 Development of the retina -- 12.4 Development of the optic tectum -- References -- 13 Haplochromis burtoni: a case study -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 Visually guided behaviour -- 13.3 Social regulation of growth -- 13.4 Retinal structure -- 13.5 Retinal growth -- 13.6Summary -- Acknowledgements -- References -- 14 Vision in elasmobranchs -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Physiological optics -- 14.3 Tapetum lucidum -- 14.4 Retinal anatomy and physiology -- 14.5 Concluding remarks -- Acknowledgements -- Abbreviations -- References -- 15 Stimulus, environment and vision in fishes -- 15.1 Introduction -- 15.2 The underwater light environment -- 15.3 Visual adaptations to the environment -- 15.4 Fish as visual stimuli -- 15.5 Summary -- References -- Species index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 46
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400908413
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Software Developments Introduction -- Scientific software in Ada -- Linear algebra support modules for approximation and other software -- Packages for solving almost block diagonal linear systems arising in spline collocation at Gaussian points with monomial basis functions -- Developments in the NAG library software for parabolic equations -- Recent developments in mathematical software at IMSL -- Two Processing Techniques: parallel processing, neural networks, and computer arithmetic Introduction -- Scientific library software for highly parallel computers -- Fortran 8x features and the exploitation of parallelism -- An introduction to neural networks -- Algorithms for the elementary functions in level-index arithmetic -- Three Symbolic and Exact Computation Introduction -- Symbolic algebra systems in teaching and research -- Recent developments in automatic differentiation -- An efficient algorithm for the generation of homogeneous harmonic polynomials -- Four Software Enhancements: computer graphics and expert systems Introduction -- Computer graphics for scientific computing -- What do we mean by expert systems? -- Expert systems for numerical software -- Numerical problem-solving environments — current and future trends -- An advisory expert system for curve and surface fitting.
    Abstract: The main aim of this book is to present a broader view of scientific software than has been common in the past. The provision of scientific software is no longer a matter of just writing 'good computer programs', but rather it is concerned with the development of an integrated software system wI-,ich offers the user facilities which approach all that he needs in terms of speed, accuracy and convenience. This means that due account must, for example, be taken of the high-speed computing capabilities of parallel processors, the exact computing features of symbolic mathematical systems, the presentational potentialities of computer graphics, and the advisory aspects of knowledge-based and expert systems. When suites of numerical software programs or routines are supported by such ranges of facilities, then they can be justly described as 'scientific software systems', and that is why we have adopted such a title here. The assembly of this book was a direct consequence of the running of a one-day international symposium, with the same broad aim of advocating a 'systems approach', under the title 'Scientific Software and Systems'. This Symposium was held at the Royal Military College of Science (RMCS) in Shrivenham on July 11, 1988 and was attended by 85 people. A very busy but most enjoyable day included invited talks, poster presentations and demonstrations of software products, not to mention various social activi­ ties.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Software Developments IntroductionScientific software in Ada -- Linear algebra support modules for approximation and other software -- Packages for solving almost block diagonal linear systems arising in spline collocation at Gaussian points with monomial basis functions -- Developments in the NAG library software for parabolic equations -- Recent developments in mathematical software at IMSL -- Two Processing Techniques: parallel processing, neural networks, and computer arithmetic Introduction -- Scientific library software for highly parallel computers -- Fortran 8x features and the exploitation of parallelism -- An introduction to neural networks -- Algorithms for the elementary functions in level-index arithmetic -- Three Symbolic and Exact Computation Introduction -- Symbolic algebra systems in teaching and research -- Recent developments in automatic differentiation -- An efficient algorithm for the generation of homogeneous harmonic polynomials -- Four Software Enhancements: computer graphics and expert systems Introduction -- Computer graphics for scientific computing -- What do we mean by expert systems? -- Expert systems for numerical software -- Numerical problem-solving environments - current and future trends -- An advisory expert system for curve and surface fitting.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 47
    ISBN: 9789400904217
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One Cells and Development -- 1 Innervation of teeth: developmental aspects -- 2 Odontoblasts: developmental aspects -- 3 Dental pulp fibroblasts in culture -- 4 Concluding remarks -- Two Anatomical Aspects of the Pulp — Odontoblast and Vascular Architecture -- 5 Role of the odontoblast process -- 6 Change of vascular architecture of dental pulp with growth -- 7 Concluding remarks -- Three Physiological Aspects of the Pulp — Microcirculatory and Sensory Functions -- 8 Intradental sensory units -- 9 Microcirculation: function and regulation in microvasculature -- 10 Haemodynamic regulation of the dental pulp -- 11 Interstitial fluid pressure and transmicrovascular fluid flow -- 12 Concluding remarks -- Four Biochemical Aspects of the Pulp — Enzymes and Matrix -- 13 Enzymes of the glycolytic pathway-phosphofructokinase, pyruvate kinase and lactate dehydrogenase -- 14 Collagenase synthesis by odontoblast-like cells (RP cells) preparation of monoclonal antibodies against RP cell collagenase and characterization of the enzyme -- 15 Dental pulp matrix — collagens and glycoproteins -- 16 Glycosaminoglycans in dental pulp -- 17 Concluding remarks -- Five Neuroregulators — Classic Neurotransmitters -- 18 The adrenergic system and dental pulp -- 19 The cholinergic system and the dental pulp -- 20 Concluding remarks -- Six Neuroregulators — Neuropeptides -- 21 Distribution of peptidergic nerves -- 22 Functions of peptidergic nerves -- 23 Concluding remarks -- Seven Bioactive Substances -- 24 Neurotrophic substances -- 25 Bradykinin and enkephalins -- 26 Prostaglandins and leukotrienes in dental pulp: their possible roles in pulp pathophysiology -- 27 Concluding remarks -- Eight Pathological Aspects of the Pulp and Medication -- 28 Reactions of dental sensory innervation to injury and inflammation -- 29 Proteases in inflammation -- 30 Arachidonic acid metabolism and antiseptics -- 31 Concluding Remarks.
    Abstract: This book presents a circumspective overview and update of the present existing knowledge of the biology, chemistry and pathophysiology of the dental pulp. It details numerous observations of a group of highly specialized investigators who have united in the common purpose of presenting their observations for the benefit of clinicians, teachers, researchers and students. Fortunately, the dental literature presents abundant research findings about pulp biology and the pulp's responses to various stimuli. This abundance has resulted in an increased interest and expansion of research on this subject. For example, publications abound on the response of pulp tissue to various medications and to a variety of types of dental materials which may be placed near to or at some distance from the pulp through the medium of dentine. One of the reasons the pulp is of such interest is that it not only provides the vitality to the teeth but also produces the dentine - both the primary and secondary, as well as reparative. The latter-type dentine is a result of the pulp's functions in response to disease as the former dentine is in response to health. As an example, some investigators have reported the effects of cutting of dentine and the placement of restorations in dentine which in turn reflect changes on the pulp tissue. These reports have raised a number of questions, which in turn have created a need for answers.
    Description / Table of Contents: One Cells and Development1 Innervation of teeth: developmental aspects -- 2 Odontoblasts: developmental aspects -- 3 Dental pulp fibroblasts in culture -- 4 Concluding remarks -- Two Anatomical Aspects of the Pulp - Odontoblast and Vascular Architecture -- 5 Role of the odontoblast process -- 6 Change of vascular architecture of dental pulp with growth -- 7 Concluding remarks -- Three Physiological Aspects of the Pulp - Microcirculatory and Sensory Functions -- 8 Intradental sensory units -- 9 Microcirculation: function and regulation in microvasculature -- 10 Haemodynamic regulation of the dental pulp -- 11 Interstitial fluid pressure and transmicrovascular fluid flow -- 12 Concluding remarks -- Four Biochemical Aspects of the Pulp - Enzymes and Matrix -- 13 Enzymes of the glycolytic pathway-phosphofructokinase, pyruvate kinase and lactate dehydrogenase -- 14 Collagenase synthesis by odontoblast-like cells (RP cells) preparation of monoclonal antibodies against RP cell collagenase and characterization of the enzyme -- 15 Dental pulp matrix - collagens and glycoproteins -- 16 Glycosaminoglycans in dental pulp -- 17 Concluding remarks -- Five Neuroregulators - Classic Neurotransmitters -- 18 The adrenergic system and dental pulp -- 19 The cholinergic system and the dental pulp -- 20 Concluding remarks -- Six Neuroregulators - Neuropeptides -- 21 Distribution of peptidergic nerves -- 22 Functions of peptidergic nerves -- 23 Concluding remarks -- Seven Bioactive Substances -- 24 Neurotrophic substances -- 25 Bradykinin and enkephalins -- 26 Prostaglandins and leukotrienes in dental pulp: their possible roles in pulp pathophysiology -- 27 Concluding remarks -- Eight Pathological Aspects of the Pulp and Medication -- 28 Reactions of dental sensory innervation to injury and inflammation -- 29 Proteases in inflammation -- 30 Arachidonic acid metabolism and antiseptics -- 31 Concluding Remarks.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 48
    ISBN: 9789401178167
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I: Characterization of Interface -- II: Surface of Reinforcements -- III: Controlled Interphase -- IV: Interfacial Theories -- V: Influence of Interface on Mechanical and Physical Properties -- Author Index.
    Abstract: The third International Conference on Composite Interfaces (ICCI-III) was held under the auspecies of ASM International, The Aluminum Company of America (Alcoa), The Edison Polymer Innovation Co. (EPIC), Case Western Reserve University, Nippon Glass Fiber Co., Nitto Boseki Co., Office of Naval Reserach (ONR), SAMPE Japan, Teijin Co., Mobay Co., Union Carbide Co., and Vetrotex Sain-Gobain. The underlying philosophy of the conference continues to be the promotion of fundamental understanding of the structure and role of composite interfaces. With the growth of composite interface studies, the research direction naturally changes from characterization and understanding of interfacial structure to controlling this structure. For this reason, the conference was subtitled, "Controlled Interphase Structure." The rather unfamiliar phrase "interphase" is used to emphasize the interfacial region whose properties are different from the bulk. The importance of the interphase to the mechanochemical properties has been rapidly recognized among composite researchers in recent years. The conference incorporated nine sessions. No concurrent sessions were planned because of the strong interest among panicipants and organizers to intennix researchers from different disciplines. Papers presented were redistributed in Pans I throught V. Because of this, both the conference and proceedings are not organized based on the traditional disciplines or materials, but rather around concepts.
    Description / Table of Contents: I: Characterization of InterfaceII: Surface of Reinforcements -- III: Controlled Interphase -- IV: Interfacial Theories -- V: Influence of Interface on Mechanical and Physical Properties -- Author Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 49
    ISBN: 9789401168656
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Perspective and overview -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Optical fibre fundamentals -- 1.3 Loss mechanisms in optical fibre materials -- 1.4 Long wavelength fibre materials -- 1.5 Fluoride glasses and optical fibres -- 1.6 Applications for infrared optical fibres -- 1.7 Future prospects -- References -- 2 Properties of fluoride glasses -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Glass-forming systems, structure and crystallization -- 2.3 Thermal properties -- 2.4 Other properties -- 2.5 Optical properties -- References -- 3 Propagation in optical fibres -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Multimode fibres -- 3.3 Monomode fibres -- References -- 4 Manufacture of infrared fibres -- 4.1 Materials preparation -- 4.2 Melting techniques -- 4.3 Fibre fabrication -- 4.4 Problems -- 4.5 Fibre results -- References -- 5 Intrinsic loss measurements -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Rayleigh scattering -- 5.3 IR multiphonon edge -- 5.4 Minimum intrinsic loss -- 5.5 Longer wavelength transmitting fibres -- References -- 6 Extrinsic absorption -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Spectrometer measurements -- 6.3 Absorption due to water -- 6.4 Absorption due to transition metal ions -- 6.5 Absorption due to rare earth ions -- 6.6 Other impurities -- References -- 7 Extrinsic scattering -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Identification of scattering centres -- 7.3 Scattering theory -- 7.4 Scattering solutions for limiting cases -- 7.5 Solutions for metallic (absorbing) spheres -- 7.6 Applications to practical examples -- 7.7 Calculations of scattering loss -- 7.8 Scattering loss in fibres -- 7.9 Conclusions -- References -- 8 Measured losses in fibres -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Available techniques -- 8.3 Total loss -- 8.4 Absorption -- 8.5 Scattering -- 8.6 Recent results -- 8.7 Predicted minimum loss -- References -- 9 Mechanical properties -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Fracture and glass parameters -- 9.3 Strength measuring methods -- 9.4 Fibre strengths -- 9.5 Identification of flaws and effect on strength -- 9.6 Ultimate strength and maximum practical strength -- 9.7 Strength and homogeneous crystal growth -- 9.8 Durability -- 9.9 Conclusions -- References -- 10 Applications -- 10.1 Mid-IR communication systems -- 10.2 Active fibres -- 10.3 Laser surgery -- 10.4 Infrared fibre sensors -- References.
    Abstract: One of the most exciting prospects for optical fibres made from fluoride glasses is the possibility of providing long distance optical communication systems without the need for repeaters. This objective has stimulated much of the work into fluoride glasses over the past ten years, and has prompted the writing of this book. It has also emerged that fluoride fibres can transmit both visible and infrared energy (from about 0.5 to 5 ,urn) and that they have many applications outside the field of telecommunications. These include optical fibre sensors (particularly in remote infrared spectroscopy), laser surgery and fibre lasers. Several companies are now established in the field, and good quality fluoride fibres are available from sources throughout the USA, Europe and Japan. Moreover, the first commercial instruments based on fluoride fibres are finding their way to the market place and these fibres will undoubtedly form the basis of many more instruments yet to be developed. The work presented in this book represents the field both from an academic understanding of the materials and ways to convert them into fibre, and from a practical and commercial viewpoint. The principal author and some of the co­ authors are based at the British Telecom Research Laboratories in the UK.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Perspective and overview1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Optical fibre fundamentals -- 1.3 Loss mechanisms in optical fibre materials -- 1.4 Long wavelength fibre materials -- 1.5 Fluoride glasses and optical fibres -- 1.6 Applications for infrared optical fibres -- 1.7 Future prospects -- References -- 2 Properties of fluoride glasses -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Glass-forming systems, structure and crystallization -- 2.3 Thermal properties -- 2.4 Other properties -- 2.5 Optical properties -- References -- 3 Propagation in optical fibres -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Multimode fibres -- 3.3 Monomode fibres -- References -- 4 Manufacture of infrared fibres -- 4.1 Materials preparation -- 4.2 Melting techniques -- 4.3 Fibre fabrication -- 4.4 Problems -- 4.5 Fibre results -- References -- 5 Intrinsic loss measurements -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Rayleigh scattering -- 5.3 IR multiphonon edge -- 5.4 Minimum intrinsic loss -- 5.5 Longer wavelength transmitting fibres -- References -- 6 Extrinsic absorption -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Spectrometer measurements -- 6.3 Absorption due to water -- 6.4 Absorption due to transition metal ions -- 6.5 Absorption due to rare earth ions -- 6.6 Other impurities -- References -- 7 Extrinsic scattering -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Identification of scattering centres -- 7.3 Scattering theory -- 7.4 Scattering solutions for limiting cases -- 7.5 Solutions for metallic (absorbing) spheres -- 7.6 Applications to practical examples -- 7.7 Calculations of scattering loss -- 7.8 Scattering loss in fibres -- 7.9 Conclusions -- References -- 8 Measured losses in fibres -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Available techniques -- 8.3 Total loss -- 8.4 Absorption -- 8.5 Scattering -- 8.6 Recent results -- 8.7 Predicted minimum loss -- References -- 9 Mechanical properties -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Fracture and glass parameters -- 9.3 Strength measuring methods -- 9.4 Fibre strengths -- 9.5 Identification of flaws and effect on strength -- 9.6 Ultimate strength and maximum practical strength -- 9.7 Strength and homogeneous crystal growth -- 9.8 Durability -- 9.9 Conclusions -- References -- 10 Applications -- 10.1 Mid-IR communication systems -- 10.2 Active fibres -- 10.3 Laser surgery -- 10.4 Infrared fibre sensors -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 50
    ISBN: 9789400908376
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Patterns and processes in helminth parasite communities: an overview -- 2 Host populations as resources defining parasite community organization -- 3 Spatial scale and the processes structuring a guild of larval trematode parasites -- 4 Guild structure of larval trematodes in molluscan hosts: prevalence, dominance and significance in competition -- 5 Helminth communities in marine fishes -- 6 Helminth communities in freshwater fish: structured communities of stochastic assemblages? -- 7 Helminth communities of amphibians and reptiles: comparative approaches to understanding patterns and processes -- 8 Helminth communities in avian hosts: determinants of pattern -- 9 Helminth community of mammalian hosts: concepts at the infracommunity, component and compound community levels -- 10 Models for multi-species parasite-host communities -- 11 Free-living communities and alimentary tract helminths: hypotheses and pattern analyses -- 12 Concluding remarks.
    Abstract: We first discussed the possibility of organizing a symposium on helminth communities in June, 1986. At that time, we were engaged in writing a joint paper on potential structuring mechanisms in helminth communities; we disagreed on a number of issues. We felt the reason for such debate was because the discipline was in a great state of flux, with many new concepts and approaches being introduced with increasing frequency. After consider­ able discussion about the need, scope and the inevitable limitations of such a symposium, we decided that the time was ripe to bring other ecologists, engaged in similar research, face-to-face. There were many individuals from whom to choose; we selected those who were actively publishing on helminth communities or those who had expertise in areas which we felt were particularly appropriate. We compiled a list of potential participants, contacted them and received unanimous support to organize such a symposium. Our intent was to cover several broad areas, fully recognizing that breadth negates depth (at least with a publisher's limitation on the number of pages). We felt it important to consider patterns amongst different kinds of hosts because this is where we had disagreed among ourselves.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Patterns and processes in helminth parasite communities: an overview2 Host populations as resources defining parasite community organization -- 3 Spatial scale and the processes structuring a guild of larval trematode parasites -- 4 Guild structure of larval trematodes in molluscan hosts: prevalence, dominance and significance in competition -- 5 Helminth communities in marine fishes -- 6 Helminth communities in freshwater fish: structured communities of stochastic assemblages? -- 7 Helminth communities of amphibians and reptiles: comparative approaches to understanding patterns and processes -- 8 Helminth communities in avian hosts: determinants of pattern -- 9 Helminth community of mammalian hosts: concepts at the infracommunity, component and compound community levels -- 10 Models for multi-species parasite-host communities -- 11 Free-living communities and alimentary tract helminths: hypotheses and pattern analyses -- 12 Concluding remarks.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 51
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401138345
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Section 1 Introductory -- 1 General Introduction -- 2 Constitution and Formulation of PVC Materials -- Section 2 Constituents of PVC Compositions -- 3 PVC Polymers -- 4 Stabilisers -- 5 Plasticisers -- 6 Fillers -- 7 Lubricants -- 8 Polymeric Modifiers -- 9 Miscellaneous Additives -- Section 3 Production (Compounding) of Solid PVC Compositions -- 10 Solid (‘Dry’) PVC Compositions -- 11 Compounding: Operations and Equipment -- Section 4 Processing of Solid PVC Compositions into Products -- 12 Main Types of PVC Products and Methods of Their Production -- 13 Extrusion -- 14 Calendering -- 15 Blow Moulding -- 16 Injection Moulding -- 17 Other Processes -- Section 5 Liquid PVC Compositions: Nature, Preparation, Processing, and Applications -- 18 PVC Pastes -- 19 Solutions -- 20 PVC Latices -- Section 6 Post-production Processing of PVC Products -- 21 Fabrication, Conversion and Related Processing of PYC Sheet and Parts -- 22 External Treatments of PVC Products -- Section 7 Applications of PVC Products, and Some Important Application-Related Properties -- 23 Miscellaneous PVC Products and Their Applications -- 24 PVC Properties of Special Significance in Some Important Usage Contexts -- Appendix 1 Some Material Properties of PVC Products and Compounds -- Appendix 2 Quantities and Units: The SI System: Unit Conversion Tables -- Appendix 3 Abbreviations (Letter Symbols) Used in This Book for Some Polymers, Their Derivative Plastics, and Certain Monomers.
    Abstract: This book originated from my Publisher's request for anew, concise account of PVC plastics in terms of their nature, properties, process­ ing, and applications. There is thus, inevitably, an extensive thematic overlap with my-still relatively recent-PVC Technology (4th edi­ tion), and I have drawn liberally on that source for a substantial amount of relevant basic material. However, the present book is by no means merely an abridgement of the earlier one: whilst indeed considerably shorter, it is not only comparable in scope and general coverage of the subject, but also contains much new information. I have made a point of again strongly featuring the numerous standards relevant-and in many cases cardinal-to the testing and characterisa­ tion of PVC materials and products, and to the evaluation of their properties and performance: these standards are an indispensable part of the technology of PVC plastics, and nobody concerned with any aspect of this complex subject should fail to recognise that fact. It is ever a pleasure to express appreciation and thanks where they are due. I am grateful to Dipl-Ing. H. E. Luben of Brabender OHG, Duisburg, FRG, not only for the up-to-date information he provided on Brabender equipment, but also most particularly for his exception­ ally friendly, helpful attitude in all our contacts, and for the trouble he took to make some illustrations and figures available in the form convenient for direct reproduction.
    Description / Table of Contents: Section 1 Introductory1 General Introduction -- 2 Constitution and Formulation of PVC Materials -- Section 2 Constituents of PVC Compositions -- 3 PVC Polymers -- 4 Stabilisers -- 5 Plasticisers -- 6 Fillers -- 7 Lubricants -- 8 Polymeric Modifiers -- 9 Miscellaneous Additives -- Section 3 Production (Compounding) of Solid PVC Compositions -- 10 Solid (‘Dry’) PVC Compositions -- 11 Compounding: Operations and Equipment -- Section 4 Processing of Solid PVC Compositions into Products -- 12 Main Types of PVC Products and Methods of Their Production -- 13 Extrusion -- 14 Calendering -- 15 Blow Moulding -- 16 Injection Moulding -- 17 Other Processes -- Section 5 Liquid PVC Compositions: Nature, Preparation, Processing, and Applications -- 18 PVC Pastes -- 19 Solutions -- 20 PVC Latices -- Section 6 Post-production Processing of PVC Products -- 21 Fabrication, Conversion and Related Processing of PYC Sheet and Parts -- 22 External Treatments of PVC Products -- Section 7 Applications of PVC Products, and Some Important Application-Related Properties -- 23 Miscellaneous PVC Products and Their Applications -- 24 PVC Properties of Special Significance in Some Important Usage Contexts -- Appendix 1 Some Material Properties of PVC Products and Compounds -- Appendix 2 Quantities and Units: The SI System: Unit Conversion Tables -- Appendix 3 Abbreviations (Letter Symbols) Used in This Book for Some Polymers, Their Derivative Plastics, and Certain Monomers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 52
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401168687
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Marketing. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: to Marketing Communications -- One Communications and the Marketing Mix -- 1 A Broader Look at the Marketing Mix -- 2 Communications in Relation to the Product Life Cycle -- 3 How Well do Names and Brands Communicate? -- 4 The Product Image and Packaging -- 5 How Does Price Communicate? -- 6 Corporate Identity -- Two Internal Communications -- 7 Internal Communications: Media and Methods -- 8 Sales Conferences -- 9 Sales Contests and Incentives -- 10 Communicating with Sales Staff -- Three Communicating with the Trade -- 11 Dealer Activities -- 12 Communicating with the Trade -- Four Communications with Customers -- 13 Consumer Behaviour -- 14 Market Education -- 15 The After Market -- Five Special Communication Techniques -- 16 Advertising -- 17 Sales Promotion -- 18 Direct Response Marketing -- 19 Public Relations -- 20 Sponsorships -- 21 Marketing Research -- Appendix I Bibliography -- Appendix II Associations and Educational Bodies -- Appendix III Syllabus for Marketing Communications, Chartered Institute of Marketing Diploma (as revised 1988).
    Abstract: Marketing communications is a subject which has become popular in both marketing and public relations circles, but sometimes with different parameters. There are those who prefer to confine marketing communications to promotional activities, which is mostly an academic point of view, and there are those who see the subject in broader terms, embracing every form of communication used in marketing, which is how the subject is practised in the business world. While the author has long experience as a teacher and examiner, he also continues to be a professional practitioner. Consequently, the book aims to serve those concerned with both the academic and the professional in terpreta tions of marketing comm unica tions. I t is of course hoped that those who adopt the academic approach to the subject will eventually acknowledge that there is more to marketing communi­ cations than advertising, sales promotion, selling, marketing research and public relations. It is also necessary to realise that public relations embraces much more than the 'publicity' in the 4Ps promotion box. Without wishing to be contentious, this broad approach is proposed so that communications of all kinds throughout the marketing strategy can have maximum effect. Very little has been published on this subject, and the book is therefore a pioneer attempt to establish the practical parameters of modern marketing communications. There are so many broad and narrow interpretations of marketing communications, but it is hoped that this book will be useful to teachers, students and practitioners of the subject.
    Description / Table of Contents: to Marketing CommunicationsOne Communications and the Marketing Mix -- 1 A Broader Look at the Marketing Mix -- 2 Communications in Relation to the Product Life Cycle -- 3 How Well do Names and Brands Communicate? -- 4 The Product Image and Packaging -- 5 How Does Price Communicate? -- 6 Corporate Identity -- Two Internal Communications -- 7 Internal Communications: Media and Methods -- 8 Sales Conferences -- 9 Sales Contests and Incentives -- 10 Communicating with Sales Staff -- Three Communicating with the Trade -- 11 Dealer Activities -- 12 Communicating with the Trade -- Four Communications with Customers -- 13 Consumer Behaviour -- 14 Market Education -- 15 The After Market -- Five Special Communication Techniques -- 16 Advertising -- 17 Sales Promotion -- 18 Direct Response Marketing -- 19 Public Relations -- 20 Sponsorships -- 21 Marketing Research -- Appendix I Bibliography -- Appendix II Associations and Educational Bodies -- Appendix III Syllabus for Marketing Communications, Chartered Institute of Marketing Diploma (as revised 1988).
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 53
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401197717
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: Preservation -- Nutrition -- 1 General Classification of Yeast -- Classification -- Impact of Recent Taxonomic Revision on Industry -- Yeasts of Economic Importance -- Culture Collection -- 2 Yeast Genetics -- Life Cycle -- Techniques Applicable to Yeast Strain Development -- Baker’s Yeast -- Brewer’s Yeast -- 3 Brewer’s Yeast -- General Characteristics of Yeast -- Yeast Characteristics Important for Brewing -- Brewing Process -- Brewery Contaminants -- Biochemistry of Brewing -- Recent Developments -- 4 Wine Yeasts -- Ecology -- Terminology -- Natural Yeasts and Their Occurrence on Grapes and in Musts -- Natural Fermentations -- Description of Species -- Selected Pure Culture Yeasts and Active Dry Wine Yeasts -- Preparation of Starter Cultures -- Biochemistry of Wine Fermentation165 -- The Killer Factor184 -- By-products of the Alcoholic Fermentation and Aroma Compounds -- Microbiological Reduction of Acids193 -- Genetic Manipulation of Wine Yeasts198 -- Microbial Spoilage of Wines199 -- B?otrytis cineria 201 -- Biogenic Amines and Ethyl Carbamate202 -- Technology of Wine Making204 -- Further Readings -- 5 Distiller’s Yeasts -- Whisky227 -- Distillates from Sugar-Containing Raw Materials238 -- Characteristics and Strains of Distiller’s Yeasts242 -- Flavor Compounds248 -- Fermentation Alcohol as Fuel252 -- Further Readings -- 6 Baker’s Yeast Production -- Manufacturing Process Outline262 -- Strains263 -- Principles of Aerobic Growth264 -- Raw Materials271 -- Environmental Parameters280 -- Practice of Aerobic Growth284 -- Further Readings -- 7 Use of Yeast in Baking -- Function of Yeast in Baking316 -- Bread Flavor334 -- White Pan Bread Technology336 -- Active Dry Yeast -- Further Readings -- 8 Yeast-Derived Products -- Flavor Products and Flavor Enhancers370 -- Nutritional Yeast385 -- Colorants Derived from Yeast390 -- Yeast-Derived Enzymes393 -- Products of Pharmaceutical and Cosmetic Value, -- 9 Food and Feed Yeast -- Composition415 -- Use of Yeast as a Major Protein Source424 -- Production of Biomass426 -- Further Readings -- 10 Use of Yeasts in the Dairy Industry -- Cheese441 -- Lactose-free Milk441 -- Acidophilus-Yeast Milk442 -- Kefir442 -- Koumiss444 -- Desugaring of Eggs.
    Abstract: Yeasts are the active agents responsible for three of our most important foods - bread, wine, and beer - and for the almost universally used mind/ personality-altering drug, ethanol. Anthropologists have suggested that it was the production of ethanol that motivated primitive people to settle down and become farmers. The Earth is thought to be about 4. 5 billion years old. Fossil microorganisms have been found in Earth rock 3. 3 to 3. 5 billion years old. Microbes have been on Earth for that length of time carrying out their principal task of recycling organic matter as they still do today. Yeasts have most likely been on Earth for at least 2 billion years before humans arrived, and they playa key role in the conversion of sugars to alcohol and carbon dioxide. Early humans had no concept of either microorganisms or fermentation, yet the earliest historical records indicate that by 6000 B. C. they knew how to make bread, beer, and wine. Earliest humans were foragers who col­ lected and ate leaves, tubers, fruits, berries, nuts, and cereal seeds most of the day much as apes do today in the wild. Crushed fruits readily undergo natural fermentation by indigenous yeasts, and moist seeds germinate and develop amylases that produce fermentable sugars. Honey, the first con­ centrated sweet known to humans, also spontaneously ferments to alcohol if it is by chance diluted with rainwater. Thus, yeasts and other microbes have had a long history of 2 to 3.
    Description / Table of Contents: PreservationNutrition -- 1 General Classification of Yeast -- Classification -- Impact of Recent Taxonomic Revision on Industry -- Yeasts of Economic Importance -- Culture Collection -- 2 Yeast Genetics -- Life Cycle -- Techniques Applicable to Yeast Strain Development -- Baker’s Yeast -- Brewer’s Yeast -- 3 Brewer’s Yeast -- General Characteristics of Yeast -- Yeast Characteristics Important for Brewing -- Brewing Process -- Brewery Contaminants -- Biochemistry of Brewing -- Recent Developments -- 4 Wine Yeasts -- Ecology -- Terminology -- Natural Yeasts and Their Occurrence on Grapes and in Musts -- Natural Fermentations -- Description of Species -- Selected Pure Culture Yeasts and Active Dry Wine Yeasts -- Preparation of Starter Cultures -- Biochemistry of Wine Fermentation165 -- The Killer Factor184 -- By-products of the Alcoholic Fermentation and Aroma Compounds -- Microbiological Reduction of Acids193 -- Genetic Manipulation of Wine Yeasts198 -- Microbial Spoilage of Wines199 -- B?otrytis cineria 201 -- Biogenic Amines and Ethyl Carbamate202 -- Technology of Wine Making204 -- Further Readings -- 5 Distiller’s Yeasts -- Whisky227 -- Distillates from Sugar-Containing Raw Materials238 -- Characteristics and Strains of Distiller’s Yeasts242 -- Flavor Compounds248 -- Fermentation Alcohol as Fuel252 -- Further Readings -- 6 Baker’s Yeast Production -- Manufacturing Process Outline262 -- Strains263 -- Principles of Aerobic Growth264 -- Raw Materials271 -- Environmental Parameters280 -- Practice of Aerobic Growth284 -- Further Readings -- 7 Use of Yeast in Baking -- Function of Yeast in Baking316 -- Bread Flavor334 -- White Pan Bread Technology336 -- Active Dry Yeast -- Further Readings -- 8 Yeast-Derived Products -- Flavor Products and Flavor Enhancers370 -- Nutritional Yeast385 -- Colorants Derived from Yeast390 -- Yeast-Derived Enzymes393 -- Products of Pharmaceutical and Cosmetic Value, -- 9 Food and Feed Yeast -- Composition415 -- Use of Yeast as a Major Protein Source424 -- Production of Biomass426 -- Further Readings -- 10 Use of Yeasts in the Dairy Industry -- Cheese441 -- Lactose-free Milk441 -- Acidophilus-Yeast Milk442 -- Kefir442 -- Koumiss444 -- Desugaring of Eggs.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 54
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401170475
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Electronics Packaging Design and Engineering -- 2 Project Planning -- 3 Human Factors Engineering -- 4 Fabrication Processes -- 5 Mechanical Fasteners -- 6 Heat Transfer and Thermal Control -- 7 Shock and Vibration Design -- 8 Subassemblies and Assemblies -- 9 Design Considerations for Space Electronics -- 10 Material Plating and Finishes -- 11 Radio Frequency and Electromagnetic Shielding -- 12 Design and Development of Miniature Electronics Systems -- 13 Wire and Cabling -- 14 Materials and Processes -- 15 Safety -- 16 Printed Circuits -- 17 Electrical Interconnection Systems -- 18 Forced Air Cooling Systems -- 19 Preferred Materials for Electronic Packaging -- 20 Selection of Plastics for Various Environments -- 21 Mechanics of Simple Stresses -- 22 Formulas and Conversions -- 23 Design Reviews—An Instrument for Decision Making -- 24 Slide Mount Considerations for Electronic Assemblies -- 25 Reference Designations for Electrical and Electronic Parts and Equipment -- 26 Metal Alloy and Temper Designation Systems -- Appendix A -- Appendix B.
    Abstract: The Handbook of Electronics Packaging Design and Engineering has been writ­ ten as a reference source for use in the packaging design of electronics equip­ ment. It is designed to provide a single convenient source for the solution of re­ curring design problems. The primary consideration of any design is that the end product meet or exceed the applicable product specifications. The judicious use of uniform design practices will realize the following economies and equipment improvements: • Economics of design. Uniform design practices will result in less engineering and design times and lower costs. They will also reduce the number of changes that may be required due to poor reliability, maintainability, or producibility. • Improved design. Better designs with increased reliability, maintainability, and producibility will result from the use of uniform design practices. • Production economies. Uniform designs employing standard available tools, materials, and parts will result in the cost control of manufacturing. The Handbook is intended primarily for the serious student of electronics packaging and for those engineers and designers actively engaged in this vital and interesting profession. It attempts to present electronics packaging as it is today. It can be used as a training text for instructional purposes and as a reference source for the practicing designer and engineer.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Electronics Packaging Design and Engineering2 Project Planning -- 3 Human Factors Engineering -- 4 Fabrication Processes -- 5 Mechanical Fasteners -- 6 Heat Transfer and Thermal Control -- 7 Shock and Vibration Design -- 8 Subassemblies and Assemblies -- 9 Design Considerations for Space Electronics -- 10 Material Plating and Finishes -- 11 Radio Frequency and Electromagnetic Shielding -- 12 Design and Development of Miniature Electronics Systems -- 13 Wire and Cabling -- 14 Materials and Processes -- 15 Safety -- 16 Printed Circuits -- 17 Electrical Interconnection Systems -- 18 Forced Air Cooling Systems -- 19 Preferred Materials for Electronic Packaging -- 20 Selection of Plastics for Various Environments -- 21 Mechanics of Simple Stresses -- 22 Formulas and Conversions -- 23 Design Reviews-An Instrument for Decision Making -- 24 Slide Mount Considerations for Electronic Assemblies -- 25 Reference Designations for Electrical and Electronic Parts and Equipment -- 26 Metal Alloy and Temper Designation Systems -- Appendix A -- Appendix B.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 55
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401179027
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: One: Soils and Paleosols -- 1 Paleopedology -- 2 Soils on and under the landscape -- 3 Features of fossil soils -- 4 Soil-forming processes -- 5 Soil classification -- 6 Mapping and naming paleosols -- 7 Alteration of paleosols after burial -- Two: Factors in Soil Formation -- 8 Models of soil formation -- 9 Climate -- 10 Organisms -- 11 Topographic relief as a factor -- 12 Parent material as a factor -- 13 Time as a factor -- Three: Fossil Record of Soils -- 14 A long-term natural experiment in pedogenesis -- 15 Soils of other worlds -- 16 Earth’s earliest landscapes -- 17 Early life on land -- 18 Large plants and animals on land -- 19 Afforestation of the land -- 20 Grasses in dry continental interiors -- 21 Human impact on landscapes -- References.
    Abstract: Landscapes viewed from afar have a timeless quality that is soothing to the human spirit. Yet a tranquil wilderness scene is but a snapshot in the steady stream of surficial change. Wind, water and human activities reshape the landscape by means of gradual to catastrophic and usually irreversible events. Much of this change destroys past landscapes, but at some times and places, landscapes are buried in the rock record. This work is dedicated to the discovery of past landscapes and their life through the fossil record of soils. A long history of surficial changes extending back almost to the origin of our planet can be deciphered from the study of these buried soils, or paleosols. Some rudiments of this history, and our place in it, are outlined in a final section of this book. But first it is necessary to learn something of the language of soils, of what happens to them when buried in the rock record and which of the forces of nature can be confidently reconstructed from their remains. Much of this preliminary material is borrowed from soil science, but throughout emphasis is laid on features that provide most reliable evidence of landscapes during the distant geological past. This book has evolved primarily as a text for senior level university courses in paleopedology: the study of fossil soils.
    Description / Table of Contents: One: Soils and Paleosols1 Paleopedology -- 2 Soils on and under the landscape -- 3 Features of fossil soils -- 4 Soil-forming processes -- 5 Soil classification -- 6 Mapping and naming paleosols -- 7 Alteration of paleosols after burial -- Two: Factors in Soil Formation -- 8 Models of soil formation -- 9 Climate -- 10 Organisms -- 11 Topographic relief as a factor -- 12 Parent material as a factor -- 13 Time as a factor -- Three: Fossil Record of Soils -- 14 A long-term natural experiment in pedogenesis -- 15 Soils of other worlds -- 16 Earth’s earliest landscapes -- 17 Early life on land -- 18 Large plants and animals on land -- 19 Afforestation of the land -- 20 Grasses in dry continental interiors -- 21 Human impact on landscapes -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 56
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400907478
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction to the Photo-oxidative Degradation Mechanisms of Polymers -- 1.1 Definitions of Photostability of Polymeric Materials -- 1.2 General Mechanism of Polymer Photo-oxidation -- 1.3 Photoinitiation of Polymer Degradation -- 1.4 Chain Propagation -- 1.5 Chain Branching -- 1.6 Photo-reactions of Carbonyl Groups -- 1.7 Hydrogen Abstraction -- 1.8 Photodecomposition of Hydroperoxide Groups -- 1.9 Formation of Acids and Peracids -- 1.10 Formation of Unsaturated Groups -- 1.11 Termination Reactions -- 1.12 Phenyl Ring Opening Photo-reactions -- 1.13 Kinetics of Photo-oxidative Degradation of Polymers -- 1.14 Role of Polymer Morphology in Photo-oxidation -- 1.15 Role of Polymer Manufacturing -- 1.16 Role of Metals or Metallic Compounds in Thermal and/or Photo-oxidative Degradation of Polymers -- 1.17 Role of Processing in Thermal Oxidation of Polymers -- 1.18 Mechanisms Involved in the Photolysis of the Thermally Oxidized Polyolefins During Processing -- 1.19 Physical Processes in the Photo-oxidation of Polymers -- 2 Introduction to the Oxidative and Photo- stabilization of Polymers -- 2.1 Antioxidants -- 2.2 Photostabilizers -- 2.3 Stabilizers in a Polymer Matrix -- 2.4 Distribution of Stabilizers in a Polymer Matrix -- 2.5 Quenchers -- 2.6 Singlet Oxygen Deactivators -- 2.7 Photostability of Additives -- 2.8 Synergism and Antagonism between Additives -- 3 Antioxidants -- 3.1 Hindered Phenols -- 3.2 Hydroxygalvinol/Galvinoxy Radical System -- 3.3 Phenolic Sulphides -- 3.4 Monosulphides -- 3.5 Thiophenols and Dithiobisphenols -- 3.6 Sulphoxides and Sulphones -- 3.7 Synergistic Effects between Hindered Phenols and Sulphur- Containing Compounds -- 3.8 Dixanthogens and Thiophosphoryl Disulphides -- 3.9 Metal Dithiolates as Antioxidants -- 3.10 4-Alkyl-2-mercaptothiazolines -- 3.11 Sulphur Dioxide Role in Antioxidizing Systems -- 3.12 Role of the Antioxidant Structure in Stabilization Processes -- 3.13 Oven Ageing Antioxidant Performance -- 3.14 Polyquinones as Antioxidants -- 3.15 Lignin Derivatives as Stabilizers -- 3.16 Organophosphorus Antioxidants -- 3.17 Pentaerythrityl Diphosphites -- 3.18 Organoboron Antioxidants -- 3.19 Macrocyclic Ligands -- 3.20 Aromatic Amine Antioxidants -- 3.21 Nitroso Compounds and Nitrones -- 3.22 Antioxidant Properties of Nitrosoamines -- 3.23 Antioxidant Properties of Antistatic Agents (Tensides) -- 4 Pigments -- 4.1 Photostabilizing Properties of Pigments -- 4.2 Titanium Dioxide -- 4.3 Zinc Oxide -- 4.4 Metal Salts Coatings -- 4.5 Carbon Black -- 5 Photostabilizers -- 5.1 Alkyl-Substituted p-Hydroxybenzoates -- 5.2 Phenyl Esters of Benzoic Acid -- 5.3 Salicylanilides and Oxanilides -- 5.4 Diketones -- 5.5 Benzylidene Malonate -- 5.6 Esters of ?-Cyano-?-phenylcinnamic Acid -- 5.7 Hydroxybenzophenones -- 5.8 Chromanone and Tetralone Photostabilizers -- 5.9 Hydroxybenzotriazoles -- 5.10 Organic Metal Photostabilizers -- 5.11 Metal Stearates -- 5.12 Metal Salts of Organic Acids -- 5.13 Metal Oxime Chelates -- 5.14 Nickel(II) Mono-oxime (Hydrazone) Chelates -- 5.15 Metal Salicylate Chelates -- 5.16 Nickel(II) Bis(stilbene dithiolate) Chelates -- 5.17 Pyrazole Chelates -- 5.18 Nickel(II) Thiopicoline Anilide Chelate -- 5.19 Nickel(II) 2,2?-Thiobis(4-tert.-octylphenolato)-n-butylamine -- 5.20 Nickel(II) Bis(o-butyl-3,5-di-tert.-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-phosphonate -- 5.21 Metal Dithiolates as Photostabilizers -- 5.22 Metal Chelates as Pro-oxidants and Photoinitiators -- 5.23 Dithiocarbamate Iron Complex Acting as Photoinitiator of Polymer Degradation -- 5.24 Metal Acetylacetonates -- 5.25 Metal Deactivators -- 5.26 Organotellurium Compounds as Photostabilizers -- 6 Hindered Amine Light Stabilizers (HALS) -- 6.1 Mechanisms of HALS Reactions -- 6.2 Mechanisms of Nitroxy Radical Reactions -- 6.3 Transformations of Hindered Amines and Nitroxy Radicals During Processing of Polymers -- 6.4 Stabilizing Properties of HALS in Commercial Polymers -- 6.5 Synergistic/Antagonistic Effects of HALS with Other Additives -- 6.6 Novel HALS -- 7 Polymer-Bound Additives -- 7.1 Properties of Polymer-Bound Additives -- 7.2 Polymeric Antioxidants -- 7.3 Polymeric Photostabilizers -- 7.4 Hindered Amine (HALS) Monomers and Polymers -- 7.5 Polymers with Hindered N-oxy Group in the Main Chain -- 8 Industrial Aspects of Polymer Stabilization -- 8.1 Industrial Methods of Incorporating Additives -- 8.2 Toxicity of Photostabilizers -- 8.3 ‘World Index of Polyolefine Stabilizers’ -- 8.4 Industrial Application of Antioxidants -- 8.5 Photostabilization of Low-Density Polyethylene for Agricultural Applications -- 8.6 Commercially Produced Polymeric HALS -- 8.7 Photostabilization of Polypropylene Tapes and Fibres -- 8.8 Photostabilization of Rubber-Modified Plastics -- 8.9 Photostabilization of Poly(vinyl chloride) by Surface Photografting -- 8.10 Photostabilization of Coatings -- 8.11 Additives in a Space Environment -- 9 Experimental Methods in Polymer Degradation and Stabilization -- 9.1 Preparation of a Test Specimen -- 9.2 Determination of the Additive Content after Polymer Photo-oxidative Degradation -- 9.3 Quantitative Determination of Antioxidants -- 9.4 Determination of Effectiveness of Antioxidants -- 9.5 Measurement of Evaporation of Additives from Polymer Samples -- 9.6 Absorption Spectroscopy -- 9.7 Chemiluminescence Measurements -- 9.8 Photoacoustic Spectroscopy -- 9.9 Electron Spin Resonance Spectroscopy -- 9.10 Electron Spectroscopy for Chemical Analysis (ESCA) -- 9.11 Analytical Methods for the Determination of Hydroperoxide Groups -- 9.12 Studies of the Kinetics of Oxidation by Oxygen Uptake Measurements -- 9.13 Determination of the Quenching of Singlet Oxygen -- 9.14 Radioactive Labelling Techniques -- 9.15 Viscosity Measurements -- 9.16 Determination of Chain Scission -- 9.17 The Gloss Loss Test -- 9.18 Testing Methods of Thermo-oxidative Degradation and Stability of Polymers and Plastics -- 9.19 Mechanical Testing of Polymer (Plastic) Samples -- 9.20 Testing of Weathering in Polymers -- 9.21 Computer Modelling of Photo-oxidation and Photostabilization -- References -- Appendices.
    Abstract: During the last two decades, the production of polymers and plastics has been increasing rapidly. In spite of developing new polymers and polymeric materials, only 40-60 are used commercially on a large scale. It has been estimated that half of the annual production of polymers is employed outdoors. Increasing the stability of polymers and plastics towards heat, light, atmospheric oxygen and other environmental agents and weathering conditions has always been a very important problem. The photochemical instability of most of polymers limits them to outdoor application, where they are photo­ degraded fast over periods ranging from months to a few years. To the despair of technologists and consumers alike, photodegrada­ tion and environmental ageing of polymers occur much faster than can be expected from knowledge collected in laboratories. In many cases, improved methods of preparation and purification of both monomers and polymers yield products of better quality and higher resistance to heat and light. However, without stabilization of polymers by applica­ tion of antioxidants (to decrease thermal oxidative degradation) and photostabilizers (to decrease photo-oxidative degradation) it would be impossible to employ polymers and plastics in everyday use.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction to the Photo-oxidative Degradation Mechanisms of Polymers1.1 Definitions of Photostability of Polymeric Materials -- 1.2 General Mechanism of Polymer Photo-oxidation -- 1.3 Photoinitiation of Polymer Degradation -- 1.4 Chain Propagation -- 1.5 Chain Branching -- 1.6 Photo-reactions of Carbonyl Groups -- 1.7 Hydrogen Abstraction -- 1.8 Photodecomposition of Hydroperoxide Groups -- 1.9 Formation of Acids and Peracids -- 1.10 Formation of Unsaturated Groups -- 1.11 Termination Reactions -- 1.12 Phenyl Ring Opening Photo-reactions -- 1.13 Kinetics of Photo-oxidative Degradation of Polymers -- 1.14 Role of Polymer Morphology in Photo-oxidation -- 1.15 Role of Polymer Manufacturing -- 1.16 Role of Metals or Metallic Compounds in Thermal and/or Photo-oxidative Degradation of Polymers -- 1.17 Role of Processing in Thermal Oxidation of Polymers -- 1.18 Mechanisms Involved in the Photolysis of the Thermally Oxidized Polyolefins During Processing -- 1.19 Physical Processes in the Photo-oxidation of Polymers -- 2 Introduction to the Oxidative and Photo- stabilization of Polymers -- 2.1 Antioxidants -- 2.2 Photostabilizers -- 2.3 Stabilizers in a Polymer Matrix -- 2.4 Distribution of Stabilizers in a Polymer Matrix -- 2.5 Quenchers -- 2.6 Singlet Oxygen Deactivators -- 2.7 Photostability of Additives -- 2.8 Synergism and Antagonism between Additives -- 3 Antioxidants -- 3.1 Hindered Phenols -- 3.2 Hydroxygalvinol/Galvinoxy Radical System -- 3.3 Phenolic Sulphides -- 3.4 Monosulphides -- 3.5 Thiophenols and Dithiobisphenols -- 3.6 Sulphoxides and Sulphones -- 3.7 Synergistic Effects between Hindered Phenols and Sulphur- Containing Compounds -- 3.8 Dixanthogens and Thiophosphoryl Disulphides -- 3.9 Metal Dithiolates as Antioxidants -- 3.10 4-Alkyl-2-mercaptothiazolines -- 3.11 Sulphur Dioxide Role in Antioxidizing Systems -- 3.12 Role of the Antioxidant Structure in Stabilization Processes -- 3.13 Oven Ageing Antioxidant Performance -- 3.14 Polyquinones as Antioxidants -- 3.15 Lignin Derivatives as Stabilizers -- 3.16 Organophosphorus Antioxidants -- 3.17 Pentaerythrityl Diphosphites -- 3.18 Organoboron Antioxidants -- 3.19 Macrocyclic Ligands -- 3.20 Aromatic Amine Antioxidants -- 3.21 Nitroso Compounds and Nitrones -- 3.22 Antioxidant Properties of Nitrosoamines -- 3.23 Antioxidant Properties of Antistatic Agents (Tensides) -- 4 Pigments -- 4.1 Photostabilizing Properties of Pigments -- 4.2 Titanium Dioxide -- 4.3 Zinc Oxide -- 4.4 Metal Salts Coatings -- 4.5 Carbon Black -- 5 Photostabilizers -- 5.1 Alkyl-Substituted p-Hydroxybenzoates -- 5.2 Phenyl Esters of Benzoic Acid -- 5.3 Salicylanilides and Oxanilides -- 5.4 Diketones -- 5.5 Benzylidene Malonate -- 5.6 Esters of ?-Cyano-?-phenylcinnamic Acid -- 5.7 Hydroxybenzophenones -- 5.8 Chromanone and Tetralone Photostabilizers -- 5.9 Hydroxybenzotriazoles -- 5.10 Organic Metal Photostabilizers -- 5.11 Metal Stearates -- 5.12 Metal Salts of Organic Acids -- 5.13 Metal Oxime Chelates -- 5.14 Nickel(II) Mono-oxime (Hydrazone) Chelates -- 5.15 Metal Salicylate Chelates -- 5.16 Nickel(II) Bis(stilbene dithiolate) Chelates -- 5.17 Pyrazole Chelates -- 5.18 Nickel(II) Thiopicoline Anilide Chelate -- 5.19 Nickel(II) 2,2?-Thiobis(4-tert.-octylphenolato)-n-butylamine -- 5.20 Nickel(II) Bis(o-butyl-3,5-di-tert.-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-phosphonate -- 5.21 Metal Dithiolates as Photostabilizers -- 5.22 Metal Chelates as Pro-oxidants and Photoinitiators -- 5.23 Dithiocarbamate Iron Complex Acting as Photoinitiator of Polymer Degradation -- 5.24 Metal Acetylacetonates -- 5.25 Metal Deactivators -- 5.26 Organotellurium Compounds as Photostabilizers -- 6 Hindered Amine Light Stabilizers (HALS) -- 6.1 Mechanisms of HALS Reactions -- 6.2 Mechanisms of Nitroxy Radical Reactions -- 6.3 Transformations of Hindered Amines and Nitroxy Radicals During Processing of Polymers -- 6.4 Stabilizing Properties of HALS in Commercial Polymers -- 6.5 Synergistic/Antagonistic Effects of HALS with Other Additives -- 6.6 Novel HALS -- 7 Polymer-Bound Additives -- 7.1 Properties of Polymer-Bound Additives -- 7.2 Polymeric Antioxidants -- 7.3 Polymeric Photostabilizers -- 7.4 Hindered Amine (HALS) Monomers and Polymers -- 7.5 Polymers with Hindered N-oxy Group in the Main Chain -- 8 Industrial Aspects of Polymer Stabilization -- 8.1 Industrial Methods of Incorporating Additives -- 8.2 Toxicity of Photostabilizers -- 8.3 ‘World Index of Polyolefine Stabilizers’ -- 8.4 Industrial Application of Antioxidants -- 8.5 Photostabilization of Low-Density Polyethylene for Agricultural Applications -- 8.6 Commercially Produced Polymeric HALS -- 8.7 Photostabilization of Polypropylene Tapes and Fibres -- 8.8 Photostabilization of Rubber-Modified Plastics -- 8.9 Photostabilization of Poly(vinyl chloride) by Surface Photografting -- 8.10 Photostabilization of Coatings -- 8.11 Additives in a Space Environment -- 9 Experimental Methods in Polymer Degradation and Stabilization -- 9.1 Preparation of a Test Specimen -- 9.2 Determination of the Additive Content after Polymer Photo-oxidative Degradation -- 9.3 Quantitative Determination of Antioxidants -- 9.4 Determination of Effectiveness of Antioxidants -- 9.5 Measurement of Evaporation of Additives from Polymer Samples -- 9.6 Absorption Spectroscopy -- 9.7 Chemiluminescence Measurements -- 9.8 Photoacoustic Spectroscopy -- 9.9 Electron Spin Resonance Spectroscopy -- 9.10 Electron Spectroscopy for Chemical Analysis (ESCA) -- 9.11 Analytical Methods for the Determination of Hydroperoxide Groups -- 9.12 Studies of the Kinetics of Oxidation by Oxygen Uptake Measurements -- 9.13 Determination of the Quenching of Singlet Oxygen -- 9.14 Radioactive Labelling Techniques -- 9.15 Viscosity Measurements -- 9.16 Determination of Chain Scission -- 9.17 The Gloss Loss Test -- 9.18 Testing Methods of Thermo-oxidative Degradation and Stability of Polymers and Plastics -- 9.19 Mechanical Testing of Polymer (Plastic) Samples -- 9.20 Testing of Weathering in Polymers -- 9.21 Computer Modelling of Photo-oxidation and Photostabilization -- References -- Appendices.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 57
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401160445
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- How (and Why) Circuits Are Tested -- Key Testability Techniques -- Testability Definitions -- Why Is Testability Important? -- Testability Awareness -- Testability Commitment -- Testability Benefits -- Testability Trends for the Future -- Design-to-Test Overview -- 2 System Level Guidelines -- System Analysis -- System Level Testability Guidelines -- 3 General Digital Circuit Guidelines -- Initialization -- Asynchronous Circuits and One-Shots -- Interfaces -- Built-in Test Diagnostics -- Feedback Loops -- Oscillators and Clocks -- Fan-in and Fan-out Considerations -- Bussed Logic -- Buffers -- Visibility Points -- Partitioning Functions into Logically Separable Units -- Wired OR/AND Functions -- Counters and Shift Registers -- Additional General Digital Board Guidelines -- Guidelines for Programmable Logic Devices -- 4 General Analog Circuit Guidelines -- General Analog Testability Guidelines -- Analog Circuit Elements -- Frequency Considerations -- High-Frequency Analog Circuits 81 Additional General Analog Circuit Guidelines -- Testability Guidelines for Hybrid Circuits -- 5 LSI/VLSI Board Level Guidelines -- LSI/VLSI Board Advantages and Disadvantages -- Partitioning of LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Controllability of LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Visibility on LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Initialization -- Synchronization -- Self-Tests -- Device Standardization -- Summary of LSI/VLSI Board Guidelines -- 6 Merchant Devices on Boards -- General Guidelines Using Merchant Devices -- The 8080A Microprocessor Family -- The 8085A Microprocessor Family -- The 8048 Microprocessor Family -- The 8086 Microprocessor Family -- The 80186 Processor -- The 80286 Processor -- The 80386 Processor -- The Z80 Microprocessor Family -- The Z8000 Microprocessor Family -- The 6800 Microprocessor Family -- The 2901 Microprocessor Family -- The 68000 Processor Family -- The 68020 Processor -- The 68030 Processor -- The 88000 RISC Processor Family -- The 320C2x DSP Device Family -- Merchant Semiconductor Use Guidelines Summary -- 7 LSI/VLSI ASIC Level Techniques -- Level Sensitive Scan Design (LSSD) -- Scan Path -- Scan/Set Logic -- Random Access Scan 169 Built-in Logic Block Observation (BILBO) -- Signature Analysis -- Reduced Intrusion Scan Path (RISP) -- Using Device Scan Paths for Board Level Testing -- Cross Check Technology Embedded Testability -- 8 Boundary Scan -- Board Test Problems as a Basis for Boundary Scan -- Boundary Scan Description -- Test Access Port Description -- Boundary Scan TAP Interconnection and Operation -- Types of Tests Using Boundary Scan -- Boundary Scan Cell Designs -- 9 Built-in Test (BIT) Approaches -- BIT Implementation Requirements -- BIT Access Bus Alternatives -- Chip Level BIT Implementations -- Dual-Port BIT Bus Implementations -- Built-in Test and Human Interactions -- Real-Time On-line Monitoring -- 10 Testability Busses -- The Proposed IEEE Standard Testability Bus -- Testability Busses and LSSD -- Testability Busses and Boundary Scan -- Testability Busses and Scan/Set -- TM and E-TM Testability Busses -- Testability Busses and the TAP -- Real-Time Testability Busses and Multiplexing -- Combination Serial/Real-Time Testability Bus -- Analog Testability Bus Implementation -- Testability Bus Configuration Options -- Testability Busses and ATE -- 11 Mechanical Guidelines -- Overall Test Philosophy -- Accessibility -- Connectors -- Board Layout Guidelines -- Adjustments -- Other Physical Guidelines -- 12 Surface Mount Technology Guidelines -- Mechanical Guidelines for SMT Board Design -- Electrical Guidelines for SMT Board Design -- 13 Software Guidelines -- Hardware Design Factors Required for Software Testability -- General Software Design Guidelines -- Specific Guidelines for Test Control -- Specific Guidelines for Test Modules -- Specific Guidelines for System Level Diagnostics -- Memory Tests -- Specific Guidelines for LRU Testing -- Test Software Development Plans -- 14 Testability Documentation -- Test Software Documentation -- Hardware Documentation -- 15 Implementation Guidelines -- Testability Program Flow -- Design Reviews -- Digital T-Score Rating System and Checklists -- 16 Test Techniques and Strategies -- Production Test Flows -- Cable, Backplane, and Bare Board Continuity Testing -- Loaded Board Opens and Shorts Testing -- In-Circuit Inspection Board Testing -- Manufacturing Defects Testing -- Digital Functional Testing -- Analog PCB Test Equipment -- Combinational Testers -- Choosing a Test Strategy -- Appendix A Testability Checklists -- Appendix B Digital T-Score Rating System.
    Abstract: This book is the second edition of Design to Test. The first edition, written by myself and H. Frank Binnendyk and first published in 1982, has undergone several printings and become a standard in many companies, even in some countries. Both Frank and I are very proud of the success that our customers have had in utilizing the information, all of it still applicable to today's electronic designs. But six years is a long time in any technology field. I therefore felt it was time to write a new edition. This new edition, while retaining the basic testability prin­ ciples first documented six years ago, contains the latest material on state-of-the-art testability techniques for electronic devices, boards, and systems and has been completely rewritten and up­ dated. Chapter 15 from the first edition has been converted to an appendix. Chapter 6 has been expanded to cover the latest tech­ nology devices. Chapter 1 has been revised, and several examples throughout the book have been revised and updated. But some­ times the more things change, the more they stay the same. All of the guidelines and information presented in this book deal with the three basic testability principles-partitioning, control, and visibility. They have not changed in years. But many people have gotten smarter about how to implement those three basic test­ ability principles, and it is the aim of this text to enlighten the reader regarding those new (and old) testability implementation techniques.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 IntroductionHow (and Why) Circuits Are Tested -- Key Testability Techniques -- Testability Definitions -- Why Is Testability Important? -- Testability Awareness -- Testability Commitment -- Testability Benefits -- Testability Trends for the Future -- Design-to-Test Overview -- 2 System Level Guidelines -- System Analysis -- System Level Testability Guidelines -- 3 General Digital Circuit Guidelines -- Initialization -- Asynchronous Circuits and One-Shots -- Interfaces -- Built-in Test Diagnostics -- Feedback Loops -- Oscillators and Clocks -- Fan-in and Fan-out Considerations -- Bussed Logic -- Buffers -- Visibility Points -- Partitioning Functions into Logically Separable Units -- Wired OR/AND Functions -- Counters and Shift Registers -- Additional General Digital Board Guidelines -- Guidelines for Programmable Logic Devices -- 4 General Analog Circuit Guidelines -- General Analog Testability Guidelines -- Analog Circuit Elements -- Frequency Considerations -- High-Frequency Analog Circuits 81 Additional General Analog Circuit Guidelines -- Testability Guidelines for Hybrid Circuits -- 5 LSI/VLSI Board Level Guidelines -- LSI/VLSI Board Advantages and Disadvantages -- Partitioning of LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Controllability of LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Visibility on LSI/VLSI-Based Boards -- Initialization -- Synchronization -- Self-Tests -- Device Standardization -- Summary of LSI/VLSI Board Guidelines -- 6 Merchant Devices on Boards -- General Guidelines Using Merchant Devices -- The 8080A Microprocessor Family -- The 8085A Microprocessor Family -- The 8048 Microprocessor Family -- The 8086 Microprocessor Family -- The 80186 Processor -- The 80286 Processor -- The 80386 Processor -- The Z80 Microprocessor Family -- The Z8000 Microprocessor Family -- The 6800 Microprocessor Family -- The 2901 Microprocessor Family -- The 68000 Processor Family -- The 68020 Processor -- The 68030 Processor -- The 88000 RISC Processor Family -- The 320C2x DSP Device Family -- Merchant Semiconductor Use Guidelines Summary -- 7 LSI/VLSI ASIC Level Techniques -- Level Sensitive Scan Design (LSSD) -- Scan Path -- Scan/Set Logic -- Random Access Scan 169 Built-in Logic Block Observation (BILBO) -- Signature Analysis -- Reduced Intrusion Scan Path (RISP) -- Using Device Scan Paths for Board Level Testing -- Cross Check Technology Embedded Testability -- 8 Boundary Scan -- Board Test Problems as a Basis for Boundary Scan -- Boundary Scan Description -- Test Access Port Description -- Boundary Scan TAP Interconnection and Operation -- Types of Tests Using Boundary Scan -- Boundary Scan Cell Designs -- 9 Built-in Test (BIT) Approaches -- BIT Implementation Requirements -- BIT Access Bus Alternatives -- Chip Level BIT Implementations -- Dual-Port BIT Bus Implementations -- Built-in Test and Human Interactions -- Real-Time On-line Monitoring -- 10 Testability Busses -- The Proposed IEEE Standard Testability Bus -- Testability Busses and LSSD -- Testability Busses and Boundary Scan -- Testability Busses and Scan/Set -- TM and E-TM Testability Busses -- Testability Busses and the TAP -- Real-Time Testability Busses and Multiplexing -- Combination Serial/Real-Time Testability Bus -- Analog Testability Bus Implementation -- Testability Bus Configuration Options -- Testability Busses and ATE -- 11 Mechanical Guidelines -- Overall Test Philosophy -- Accessibility -- Connectors -- Board Layout Guidelines -- Adjustments -- Other Physical Guidelines -- 12 Surface Mount Technology Guidelines -- Mechanical Guidelines for SMT Board Design -- Electrical Guidelines for SMT Board Design -- 13 Software Guidelines -- Hardware Design Factors Required for Software Testability -- General Software Design Guidelines -- Specific Guidelines for Test Control -- Specific Guidelines for Test Modules -- Specific Guidelines for System Level Diagnostics -- Memory Tests -- Specific Guidelines for LRU Testing -- Test Software Development Plans -- 14 Testability Documentation -- Test Software Documentation -- Hardware Documentation -- 15 Implementation Guidelines -- Testability Program Flow -- Design Reviews -- Digital T-Score Rating System and Checklists -- 16 Test Techniques and Strategies -- Production Test Flows -- Cable, Backplane, and Bare Board Continuity Testing -- Loaded Board Opens and Shorts Testing -- In-Circuit Inspection Board Testing -- Manufacturing Defects Testing -- Digital Functional Testing -- Analog PCB Test Equipment -- Combinational Testers -- Choosing a Test Strategy -- Appendix A Testability Checklists -- Appendix B Digital T-Score Rating System.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 58
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400907515
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Nutrient supply to the newborn ruminant -- 2. Energy nutrition of rumen micro-organisms -- 3. Manipulation of rumen fermentation and associative effects -- 4. Host animal control of microbial fermentation and host animal digestion -- 5. Absorption of nutrients -- 6. Energy metabolism of the host animal -- 7. Utilization of the energy of absorbed nutrients -- 8. Feed quality and feed intake -- 9. Feed evaluation, past and present -- 10. Towards future feed evaluation systems.
    Abstract: This book is intended to be a companion volume to 'Protein Nutrition in Ruminants' (1982, Academic Press), which emphasized both the role of proteins and new systems for their evaluation. Here the focus is on energy-yielding nutrients and problems involved in evaluating them. Nonetheless in both volumes there is explicit recognition of the interdependence of energy and protein nutrition. I have not attempted to review comprehensively all the literature relating to ruminant energy nutrition and must apologize to colleagues whose work is not fully reported. Where possible tables and figures are taken from the studies of our group at the Rowett Research Institute since, if for no other reason, I am most familiar with these data. I have first considered the nutrition of the newborn and have stressed the role of behaviour 'in determining whether nutrients enter or bypass the rumen. The development of the rumen, the of anaerobic fermentation and the roles of various principles . species of rumen bacteria, protozoa and fungi in relation to different substrates, are summarized. This is followed by accounts of the factors affecting the utilization of different substrates and the v vi Preface absorption and metabolism of the end-products of fermentation and digestion, together with estimates of digestive capacity in various segments of the gut. The ruminant's requirements for energy-yielding nutrients is considered in relation to the per­ formance of various activities and to environmental conditions, particular attention being paid to the requirement for glucose precursors.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Nutrient supply to the newborn ruminant2. Energy nutrition of rumen micro-organisms -- 3. Manipulation of rumen fermentation and associative effects -- 4. Host animal control of microbial fermentation and host animal digestion -- 5. Absorption of nutrients -- 6. Energy metabolism of the host animal -- 7. Utilization of the energy of absorbed nutrients -- 8. Feed quality and feed intake -- 9. Feed evaluation, past and present -- 10. Towards future feed evaluation systems.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 59
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401770484
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXVII, 1207 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Law ; Private international law. ; Conflict of laws. ; International law. ; Comparative law. ; Political science.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 60
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955523
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 196 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: This text is concerned with those aspects of mathematics that are necessary for first-degree students of chemistry. It is written from the point of view that an element of mathematical rigour is essential for a proper appreciation of the scope and limitations of mathematical methods, and that the connection between physical principles and their mathematical formulation requires at least as much study as the mathematical principles themselves. It is written with chemistry students particularly in mind because that subject provides a point of view that differs in some respects from that of students of other scientific disciplines. Chemists in particular need insight into three­ dimensional geometry and an appreciation of problems involving many variables. It is also a subject that draws particular benefit from having available two rigorous disciplines, those of mathematics and of thermodynamics. The benefit of rigour is that it provides a degree of certainty which is valuable in a subject of such complexity as is provided by the behaviour of real chemical systems. As an experimen­ tal science, we attempt in chemistry to understand and to predict behaviour by combining precise experimental measurement with such rigorous theory as may be at the time available; these seldom provide a complete picture but do enable areas of uncertainty to be identified
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Algebraic and geometrical methods1.1 Natural numbers -- 1.2 Units and dimensional analysis -- 1.3 Functional notation -- 1.4 Quadratic and higher-order equations -- 1.5 Dependent and independent variables -- 1.6 Graphical methods -- 1.7 Some geometrical methods -- 1.8 Factorials and gamma functions -- 1.9 Probability -- 1.10 Complex numbers -- 2 Differential calculus -- 2.1 Significance and notation -- 2.2 The calculus limit -- 2.3 Differentiation of simple functions -- 2.4 The use of differentials; implicit differentiation -- 2.5 Logarithms and exponentials -- 2.6 The chain rule and differentiation by substitution -- 2.7 Turning points: maxima, minima and points of inflection -- 2.8 Maxima and minima subject to constraint; Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers -- 2.9 Series -- 2.10 The evaluation of limits by L’Hôpital’s rule -- 2.11 The principles of Newtonian mechanics -- 3 Differential calculus in three or more dimensions; partial differentiation -- 3.1 Significance and notation -- 3.2 An alternative approach to calculus -- 3.3 The total differential -- 3.4 General expression for a total differential -- 3.5 Exact differentials -- 3.6 Relations between partial derivatives -- 3.7 Extensive and intensive variables; Euler’s theorem -- 3.8 Taylor’s theorem in partial derivatives -- 3.9 Vectors -- 4 Integration -- 4.1 Significance and notation -- 4.2 Standard methods of integration -- 4.3 Standard forms of integral and numerical methods -- 4.4 Multiple integration -- 4.5 Differentiation of integrals; Leibnitz’s theorem -- 4.6 The Euler-Maclaurin Theorem -- 5 Applications of integration -- 5.1 Plane area -- 5.2 Plane elements of area -- 5.3 Elements of volume; polar coordinates in three dimensions -- 5.4 Line integrals -- 5.5 Curve length by integration -- 5.6 Applications of multiple integration -- 5.7 The calculus of variations -- 5.8 Generalized dynamics -- 6 Differential equations -- 6.1 Significance and notation -- 6.2 Equations of first order, first degree -- 6.3 Linear differential equations -- 6.4 Integral transforms -- 7 Experimental error and the method of least squares -- 7.1 Significance -- 7.2 Root-mean-square error -- 7.3 Distribution of error -- 7.4 The statistical analysis of experimental data -- 7.5 Propagation of error -- 7.6 Small-sample errors -- 7.7 The normal distribution of error -- 7.8 The method of least squares -- Appendix SI units, physical constants and conversion factors; the Greek alphabet and a summary of useful relations -- Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 61
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955561
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Series Statement: Receptors and Recognition 16
    Series Statement: Series B 16
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Immunogenetic Approaches to Cell Surface Molecules in the Mouse -- 2 Genetics of the Human Red Cell Surface -- 3 Analysis of the Human Cell Surface by Somatic Cell Genetics -- 4 Molecular Genetics of the HLA Region -- 5 Cell Genetic Analysis of the Receptor Systems for Bioactive Polypeptides -- 6 Genetics of the Cell Surface of the Preimplantation Embryo: Studies on Antigens Determined by Chromosome 17 in the Mouse -- 7 The Male-Specific Antigen (H-Y) and Sexual Differentiation.
    Abstract: The cell surface is the barrier between the cell and its environment which regulates the flow of both simple and complex molecules into and out of the cell; it is also the organelle responsible for communication between the cell and its environment. Each cell expresses receptors for a wide variety of hormones, growth factors, growth substrates and other cells. In multicellular organisms communication between cells is required for controlling development, cellular differentiation, morphogenesis and, in a more general sense, integration of myriad cell types into a single organism. The series Receptors and Recognition has as its overall aim the dissection of the cell surface to correlate structure and function for this complex organelle. In most of the preceding volumes the approach has been biochemical or physiological. In this volume the mammalian cell surface is analysed by a genetic approach. Genetic analysis of the cell surface, especially when combined with immuno­ logical techniques, has a long history. In 1900 Landsteiner showed that serum from one individual could agglutinate the red cells of another. Besides the practical result of making blood transfusion safe, this was the first demon­ stration of a human genetic polymorphism and for the next 50 years the red blood cell surface provided most of the genetic markers used to study human populations.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 62
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955448
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Principles of thin section preparation -- 1.1 Choosing the size of the thin section -- 1.2 Collecting the sample -- 1.3 Removing water from the sample -- 1.4 Impregnating the sample -- 1.5 Lapping the impregnated sample -- 1.6 Polishing the impregnated sample -- 1.7 Grinding, lapping and polishing the slide -- 2. Preparation of polished blocks and thin sections of soils -- 2.1 Collection of samples of soft coherent non-stony material -- 2.2 Collection of samples of hard material -- 2.3 Collecting loose friable surface samples -- 2.4 Removal or replacement of water and impregnation with Crystic resin -- 2.5 Transferring the specimen to the impregnation mould -- 2.6 Removal of water -- 2.7 Impregnation -- 2.8 Sawing the impregnated block -- 2.9 Surface impregnation with Crystic resin -- 2.10 Lapping the block -- 2.11 Polishing the block -- 2.12 Cleaning the polished block -- 2.13 Mounting the polished block -- 2.14 Labelling the slide -- 2.15 Cutting off the excess specimen -- 2.16 Machine grinding the specimen -- 2.17 Final lapping stages for the specimen -- 2.18 Polishing the specimen -- 2.19 Mounting the cover glass -- 2.20 Logitech machine systems for thin section production -- 3. Examination of thin sections and polished blocks -- 3.1 Examination of thin sections and polished blocks with the stereo-microscope -- 3.2 Examination of thin sections with the petrological microscope -- 3.3 The construction and use of the petrological microscope -- 3.4 Properties of minerals determined with the petrological microscope -- 4 Properties of minerals in thin sections -- 4.1 Allophane -- 4.2 Amphiboles -- 4.3 Anatase -- 4.4 Antigorite-chrysotile -- 4.5 Apatite -- 4.6 Augite -- 4.7 Biotite -- 4.8 Calcite -- 4.9 Chalcedony -- 4.10 Chlorite -- 4.11 Clinozoisite -- 4.12 Diopside -- 4.13 Enstatite -- 4.14 Epidote -- 4.15 Feldspars -- 4.16 Ferric hydroxide -- 4.17 Garnet -- 4.18 Gibbsite -- 4.19 Goethite -- 4.20 Gypsum -- 4.21 Halite -- 4.22 Halloysite and metahalloysite -- 4.23 Hematite -- 4.24 Hornblende -- 4.25 Hypersthene -- 4.26 Ice -- 4.27 Iddingsite -- 4.28 Ilmenite -- 4.29 Jarosite -- 4.30 Kaolinite -- 4.31 Lepidocrocite -- 4.32 Magnetite -- 4.33 Manganese dioxide -- 4.34 Microcline -- 4.35 Montmorillonite -- 4.36 Muscovite -- 4.37 Olivine -- 4.38 Opal -- 4.39 Orthoclase -- 4.40 Plagioclases -- 4.41 Pyrite -- 4.42 Quartz -- 4.43 Rutile -- 4.44 Serpentine -- 4.45 Siderite -- 4.46 Titanite -- 4.47 Tourmaline -- 4.48 Tremolite - actinolite -- 4.49 Vermiculite -- 4.50 Volcanic glass -- 4.51 Zircon -- 5 Properties applicable to most features seen in thin sections -- 5.1 Colour -- 5.2 Frequency -- 5.3 Prominence -- 5.4 Size -- 5.5 Shape -- 5.6 Roundness and sphericity -- 5.7 Surface characteristics -- 5.8 Boundaries -- 5.9 Distribution pattern -- 5.10 Relationships with other features -- 5.11 Orientation -- 6 Fabric, structure and matrix -- 6.1 Fabric and structure -- 6.2 Matrix -- 6.3 Conclusions -- 7 Features present in thin sections -- 7.1 Fabric -- 7.2 Structure and pores -- 7.3 Passages-faunal and root -- 7.4 Faecal material -- 7.5 Organic materials -- 7.6 Rock fragments -- 7.7 Detrital grains -- 7.8 Particle size distribution -- 7.9 Fine material -- 7.10 Coatings -- 7.11 Clay plugs -- 7.12 Surface residues -- 7.13 Impregnated surfaces -- 7.14 Anisotropic surfaces - false coatings -- 7.15 Subsurface organizations and accumulations -- 7.16 Secondary mineral material -- 7.17 Amorphous and microcrystalline material -- 7.18 Segregations and concretions -- 7.19 Weathering features and products -- 7.20 Microorganisms -- 7.21 Soil erratics -- 7.22 Infillings and intergrowths -- 7.23 Other features -- 7.24 Features observed in polished blocks -- 8 Description of thin sections and polished blocks -- 8.1 Homogeneity and heterogeneity -- 8.2 Recognition of individuals -- 8.3 Recognition of patterns -- 8.4 Description of individuals and patterns -- 8.5 Quantification -- 8.6 Interpretation -- 8.7 Description of thin sections -- 8.8 Description of polished blocks -- 8.9 Reminder data of properties -- 8.10 Reminder data of features -- 9 Teaching micromorphology -- 9.1 Introductory course in thin section morphology -- 9.2 Advanced course in thin section morphology -- 9.3 Exercises -- 10 Photography -- 10.1 Photographing the whole specimen using transmitted light -- 10.2 Photographing the whole specimen using ultraviolet light -- 10.3 Photomicrography -- 10.4 Photography for pore identification -- 11 Ancillary techniques -- 11.1 Electron analyses -- 11.2 X-ray analysis of thin sections -- 11.3 Ion thinning -- 11.4 Low temperature ashing -- 11.5 Image analysis -- 11.6 Three-dimensional analysis -- 11.7 Polarization-interference contrast examinations -- 11.8 Phase contrast -- 11.9 Fluorescence -- 11.10 Staining feldspars -- 11.11 Staining carbonates -- 11.12 Staining clay minerals -- 11.13 Staining microorganisms -- 11.14 Preparation of acetate peels -- 11.15 Removal of iron oxides from thin sections -- 11.16 Autoradiographs of impregnated blocks and thin sections -- 12 Applications -- 12.1 Agriculture -- 12.2 Archeology -- 12.3 Engineering -- 12.4 Geomorphology -- 12.5 Paleoclimatology -- 12.6 Pedology and paleopedology -- 12.7 Soil microbiology -- 12.8 Soil zoology -- 13 The micromorphology of soils -- References.
    Abstract: One of the first major studies of weathering and soil formation was made by Harrison (1933) who used thin sections in association with other procedures to study the transformation of minerals in different kinds of rock under the tropical conditions of Guyana. However, Kubiena (1938) is regarded as pioneering thin section studies of soils and during the last two decades there has been a rapid increase in the number of publications devoted almost exclusively to the study of soils in thin sections. In addition to the rather straightforward examinations with the polarizing microscope, thin section techniques are being linked with X-ray diffraction, X-ray microprobe, transmission and scanning electron microscopy, microbiological and other procedures to obtain a fuller insight into the composition and genesis of soils. Thus the study of thin sections of soils is now a major pedological technique for investigating small details in the nature, type and degree of organization of the soil fabric and structure. Thin sections reveal that particles of various sizes and composition react differently to pedological processes and become weathered or organized to form many specific patterns. This book is an attempt to give a comprehensive treatment of thin section studies of soils. Although primarily about the study of thin sections with optical microscopes a few transmission and scanning electron photomicro­ graphs are included to confirm the inferences based upon the studies made with the optical microscope.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Principles of thin section preparation1.1 Choosing the size of the thin section -- 1.2 Collecting the sample -- 1.3 Removing water from the sample -- 1.4 Impregnating the sample -- 1.5 Lapping the impregnated sample -- 1.6 Polishing the impregnated sample -- 1.7 Grinding, lapping and polishing the slide -- 2. Preparation of polished blocks and thin sections of soils -- 2.1 Collection of samples of soft coherent non-stony material -- 2.2 Collection of samples of hard material -- 2.3 Collecting loose friable surface samples -- 2.4 Removal or replacement of water and impregnation with Crystic resin -- 2.5 Transferring the specimen to the impregnation mould -- 2.6 Removal of water -- 2.7 Impregnation -- 2.8 Sawing the impregnated block -- 2.9 Surface impregnation with Crystic resin -- 2.10 Lapping the block -- 2.11 Polishing the block -- 2.12 Cleaning the polished block -- 2.13 Mounting the polished block -- 2.14 Labelling the slide -- 2.15 Cutting off the excess specimen -- 2.16 Machine grinding the specimen -- 2.17 Final lapping stages for the specimen -- 2.18 Polishing the specimen -- 2.19 Mounting the cover glass -- 2.20 Logitech machine systems for thin section production -- 3. Examination of thin sections and polished blocks -- 3.1 Examination of thin sections and polished blocks with the stereo-microscope -- 3.2 Examination of thin sections with the petrological microscope -- 3.3 The construction and use of the petrological microscope -- 3.4 Properties of minerals determined with the petrological microscope -- 4 Properties of minerals in thin sections -- 4.1 Allophane -- 4.2 Amphiboles -- 4.3 Anatase -- 4.4 Antigorite-chrysotile -- 4.5 Apatite -- 4.6 Augite -- 4.7 Biotite -- 4.8 Calcite -- 4.9 Chalcedony -- 4.10 Chlorite -- 4.11 Clinozoisite -- 4.12 Diopside -- 4.13 Enstatite -- 4.14 Epidote -- 4.15 Feldspars -- 4.16 Ferric hydroxide -- 4.17 Garnet -- 4.18 Gibbsite -- 4.19 Goethite -- 4.20 Gypsum -- 4.21 Halite -- 4.22 Halloysite and metahalloysite -- 4.23 Hematite -- 4.24 Hornblende -- 4.25 Hypersthene -- 4.26 Ice -- 4.27 Iddingsite -- 4.28 Ilmenite -- 4.29 Jarosite -- 4.30 Kaolinite -- 4.31 Lepidocrocite -- 4.32 Magnetite -- 4.33 Manganese dioxide -- 4.34 Microcline -- 4.35 Montmorillonite -- 4.36 Muscovite -- 4.37 Olivine -- 4.38 Opal -- 4.39 Orthoclase -- 4.40 Plagioclases -- 4.41 Pyrite -- 4.42 Quartz -- 4.43 Rutile -- 4.44 Serpentine -- 4.45 Siderite -- 4.46 Titanite -- 4.47 Tourmaline -- 4.48 Tremolite - actinolite -- 4.49 Vermiculite -- 4.50 Volcanic glass -- 4.51 Zircon -- 5 Properties applicable to most features seen in thin sections -- 5.1 Colour -- 5.2 Frequency -- 5.3 Prominence -- 5.4 Size -- 5.5 Shape -- 5.6 Roundness and sphericity -- 5.7 Surface characteristics -- 5.8 Boundaries -- 5.9 Distribution pattern -- 5.10 Relationships with other features -- 5.11 Orientation -- 6 Fabric, structure and matrix -- 6.1 Fabric and structure -- 6.2 Matrix -- 6.3 Conclusions -- 7 Features present in thin sections -- 7.1 Fabric -- 7.2 Structure and pores -- 7.3 Passages-faunal and root -- 7.4 Faecal material -- 7.5 Organic materials -- 7.6 Rock fragments -- 7.7 Detrital grains -- 7.8 Particle size distribution -- 7.9 Fine material -- 7.10 Coatings -- 7.11 Clay plugs -- 7.12 Surface residues -- 7.13 Impregnated surfaces -- 7.14 Anisotropic surfaces - false coatings -- 7.15 Subsurface organizations and accumulations -- 7.16 Secondary mineral material -- 7.17 Amorphous and microcrystalline material -- 7.18 Segregations and concretions -- 7.19 Weathering features and products -- 7.20 Microorganisms -- 7.21 Soil erratics -- 7.22 Infillings and intergrowths -- 7.23 Other features -- 7.24 Features observed in polished blocks -- 8 Description of thin sections and polished blocks -- 8.1 Homogeneity and heterogeneity -- 8.2 Recognition of individuals -- 8.3 Recognition of patterns -- 8.4 Description of individuals and patterns -- 8.5 Quantification -- 8.6 Interpretation -- 8.7 Description of thin sections -- 8.8 Description of polished blocks -- 8.9 Reminder data of properties -- 8.10 Reminder data of features -- 9 Teaching micromorphology -- 9.1 Introductory course in thin section morphology -- 9.2 Advanced course in thin section morphology -- 9.3 Exercises -- 10 Photography -- 10.1 Photographing the whole specimen using transmitted light -- 10.2 Photographing the whole specimen using ultraviolet light -- 10.3 Photomicrography -- 10.4 Photography for pore identification -- 11 Ancillary techniques -- 11.1 Electron analyses -- 11.2 X-ray analysis of thin sections -- 11.3 Ion thinning -- 11.4 Low temperature ashing -- 11.5 Image analysis -- 11.6 Three-dimensional analysis -- 11.7 Polarization-interference contrast examinations -- 11.8 Phase contrast -- 11.9 Fluorescence -- 11.10 Staining feldspars -- 11.11 Staining carbonates -- 11.12 Staining clay minerals -- 11.13 Staining microorganisms -- 11.14 Preparation of acetate peels -- 11.15 Removal of iron oxides from thin sections -- 11.16 Autoradiographs of impregnated blocks and thin sections -- 12 Applications -- 12.1 Agriculture -- 12.2 Archeology -- 12.3 Engineering -- 12.4 Geomorphology -- 12.5 Paleoclimatology -- 12.6 Pedology and paleopedology -- 12.7 Soil microbiology -- 12.8 Soil zoology -- 13 The micromorphology of soils -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 63
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401096898
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Fundamental principles -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Euler equation -- 1.3 Reaction -- 1.4 Application to a centrifugal machine -- 1.5 Application to axial pumps and turbines -- 1.6 Alternative operating modes -- 1.7 Compressible flow theory -- 1.8 Shock wave effects -- 1.9 Cavitation -- 1.10 Illustrative examples -- 2 Principles and practice of scaling laws -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Performance laws -- 2.3 Concept of specific speed -- 2.4 Cavitation parameters -- 2.5 Scale effects in incompressible units -- 2.6 Scale effects in compressible machines -- 2.7 Illustrative examples -- 3 Principles of axial flow machines -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Wing theory -- 3.3 Isolated aerofoil data -- 3.4 Cascade data -- 3.5 Radial equilibrium theories -- 3.6 Actuator disc approach -- 3.7 Stall and surge effects -- 4 Principles of radial and mixed flow machines -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 One-dimensional approach -- 4.3 Two-dimensional approach -- 4.4 Three-dimensional problem -- 4.5 Discussion of theoretical approaches to analysis and design -- 5 Centrifugal machines -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Inlet or intake systems -- 5.3 Impeller -- 5.4 Outlet systems -- 5.5 Thrust loads due to hydrodynamic effects -- 6 Axial machines for incompressible flow -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Axial flow pumps and fans -- 6.3 Axial water turbines -- 6.4 Forces on blades and their implications for design -- 6.5 Concluding remarks -- 7 Axial turbines and compressors for compressible flow -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Approach to axial compressor principles -- 7.3 Axial turbine principles -- 7.4 Other problems -- 8 Radial flow turbines -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Water turbines -- 8.3 Radial inflow gas turbine -- 8.4 Ljungström or radial outflow turbine -- 9 Cavitation and other matters -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Effects of cavitation on machines -- 9.3 Problems involved in special pumping applications -- 9.4 Pumped storage systems -- 9.5 Some comments on output control of rotating machines -- References -- Additional bibliography.
    Abstract: This text outlines the fluid and thermodynamic principles that apply to all classes of turbomachines, and the material has been presented in a unified way. The approach has been used with successive groups of final year mechanical engineering students, who have helped with the development of the ideas outlined. As with these students, the reader is assumed to have a basic understanding of fluid mechanics and thermodynamics. However, the early chapters combine the relevant material with some new concepts, and provide basic reading references. Two related objectives have defined the scope of the treatment. The first is to provide a general treatment of the common forms of turbo machine, covering basic fluid dynamics and thermodynamics of flow through passages and over surfaces, with a brief derivation of the fundamental governing equations. The second objective is to apply this material to the various machines in enough detail to allow the major design and performance factors to be appreciated. Both objectives have been met by grouping the machines by flow path rather than by application, thus allowing an appreciation of points of similarity or difference in approach. No attempt has been made to cover detailed points of design or stressing, though the cited references and the body of information from which they have been taken give this sort of information. The first four chapters introduce the fundamental relations, and the suc­ ceeding chapters deal with applications to the various flow paths.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Fundamental principles1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Euler equation -- 1.3 Reaction -- 1.4 Application to a centrifugal machine -- 1.5 Application to axial pumps and turbines -- 1.6 Alternative operating modes -- 1.7 Compressible flow theory -- 1.8 Shock wave effects -- 1.9 Cavitation -- 1.10 Illustrative examples -- 2 Principles and practice of scaling laws -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Performance laws -- 2.3 Concept of specific speed -- 2.4 Cavitation parameters -- 2.5 Scale effects in incompressible units -- 2.6 Scale effects in compressible machines -- 2.7 Illustrative examples -- 3 Principles of axial flow machines -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Wing theory -- 3.3 Isolated aerofoil data -- 3.4 Cascade data -- 3.5 Radial equilibrium theories -- 3.6 Actuator disc approach -- 3.7 Stall and surge effects -- 4 Principles of radial and mixed flow machines -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 One-dimensional approach -- 4.3 Two-dimensional approach -- 4.4 Three-dimensional problem -- 4.5 Discussion of theoretical approaches to analysis and design -- 5 Centrifugal machines -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Inlet or intake systems -- 5.3 Impeller -- 5.4 Outlet systems -- 5.5 Thrust loads due to hydrodynamic effects -- 6 Axial machines for incompressible flow -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Axial flow pumps and fans -- 6.3 Axial water turbines -- 6.4 Forces on blades and their implications for design -- 6.5 Concluding remarks -- 7 Axial turbines and compressors for compressible flow -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Approach to axial compressor principles -- 7.3 Axial turbine principles -- 7.4 Other problems -- 8 Radial flow turbines -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Water turbines -- 8.3 Radial inflow gas turbine -- 8.4 Ljungström or radial outflow turbine -- 9 Cavitation and other matters -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Effects of cavitation on machines -- 9.3 Problems involved in special pumping applications -- 9.4 Pumped storage systems -- 9.5 Some comments on output control of rotating machines -- References -- Additional bibliography.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 64
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955707
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 288 p) , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Methods of Plant Analysis -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Methods of extraction and isolation -- 1.3 Methods of separation -- 1.4 Methods of identification -- 1.5 Analysis of results -- 1.6 Applications -- 2 Phenolic Compounds -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Phenols and phenolic acids -- 2.3 Phenylpropanoids -- 2.4 Flavonoid pigments -- 2.5 Anthocyanins -- 2.6 Flavonols and flavones -- 2.7 Minor flavonoids, xanthones and stilbenes -- 2.8 Tannins -- 2.9 Quinone pigments -- 3 The Terpenoids -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Essential oils -- 3.3 Diterpenoids and gibberellins -- 3.4 Triterpenoids and steroids -- 3.5 Carotenoids -- 4 Organic Acids, Lipids and Related Compounds -- 4.1 Plant acids -- 4.2 Fatty acids and lipids -- 4.3 Alkanes and related hydrocarbons -- 4.4 Polyacetylenes -- 4.5 Sulphur compounds -- 5 Nitrogen Compounds -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Amino acids -- 5.3 Amines -- 5.4 Alkaloids -- 5.5 Cyanogenic glycosides -- 5.6 Indoles -- 5.7 Purines, pyrimidines and cytokinins -- 5.8 Chlorophylls -- 6 Sugars and their Derivatives -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Monosaccharides -- 6.3 Oligosaccharides -- 6.4 Sugar alcohols and cyclitols -- 7 Macromolecules -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Nucleic acids -- 7.3 Proteins -- 7.4 Polysaccharides.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Methods of Plant Analysis1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Methods of extraction and isolation -- 1.3 Methods of separation -- 1.4 Methods of identification -- 1.5 Analysis of results -- 1.6 Applications -- 2 Phenolic Compounds -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Phenols and phenolic acids -- 2.3 Phenylpropanoids -- 2.4 Flavonoid pigments -- 2.5 Anthocyanins -- 2.6 Flavonols and flavones -- 2.7 Minor flavonoids, xanthones and stilbenes -- 2.8 Tannins -- 2.9 Quinone pigments -- 3 The Terpenoids -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Essential oils -- 3.3 Diterpenoids and gibberellins -- 3.4 Triterpenoids and steroids -- 3.5 Carotenoids -- 4 Organic Acids, Lipids and Related Compounds -- 4.1 Plant acids -- 4.2 Fatty acids and lipids -- 4.3 Alkanes and related hydrocarbons -- 4.4 Polyacetylenes -- 4.5 Sulphur compounds -- 5 Nitrogen Compounds -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Amino acids -- 5.3 Amines -- 5.4 Alkaloids -- 5.5 Cyanogenic glycosides -- 5.6 Indoles -- 5.7 Purines, pyrimidines and cytokinins -- 5.8 Chlorophylls -- 6 Sugars and their Derivatives -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Monosaccharides -- 6.3 Oligosaccharides -- 6.4 Sugar alcohols and cyclitols -- 7 Macromolecules -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Nucleic acids -- 7.3 Proteins -- 7.4 Polysaccharides.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 65
    ISBN: 9789400932838
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 - Psychological and Sociological Parameters for Studies of Breakdown in Human Adaptation -- I. General Overviews -- Towards a taxonomy of methods: a general overview of psychological approaches in the study of breakdown of human adaptation -- Psychological field study techniques: overview and needs -- Psychological field study techniques: a critical evaluation -- Sociological parameters in studies of breakdown: a selective overview -- Use of psychological indices in epidemiological studies: overview and needs -- Stressful life events and illness: a review with special reference to a criticism of the life-event method -- II. Conceptual Approaches -- A lifetime prospective study of human adaptation and health -- Psychosocial and psychophysiological factors in the design and the evaluation of working conditions within health care systems -- The relation of social to pathophysiological processes: evidence from epidemiological studies -- Unemployment and health: a review of methodology -- Ontogenetic development and breakdown in adaptation: a review on psychosocial factors contributing to the development of myocardial infarction, and a description of a research program -- Physiological issues in establishing links between psychosocial factors and cardiovascular illness -- White collar occupation and coronary prone behaviour -- III. Methods -- Psychological methods: an overview of clinical applications -- Psychological factors in the breakdown of human adaptation: some methodological issues -- Monitoring signs of decrease in human adaptation: use of quantitative measures available in official statistics -- Inventory of stressful life-events (ILE) -- The Norwegian female climacteric project (VOS) -- Questionnaire for organisational stress (VOS) -- A scale for measuring the marital relationship among males -- 2 - Human Performance and Breakdown in Adaptation -- Human performance in transport operations: introductory remarks -- I. Air Transport -- Air crew workload -- Safety, individual performance and mental workload in air transport: Oedipus as Icarus -- Stress management in air transport operations: beyond alcohol and drugs -- Reasons for eliminating the “age 60” regulation for airline pilots -- Human factors education in European air transport operations -- II. Road Transport -- Behaviour research in road traffic -- Some theoretical considerations on accident research -- Accident of bus drivers — practical and methodological problems -- Effects of alcohol on driving performance: a critical look on the epidemiological, experimental and psychosocial approaches -- Investigations on the influence of continuous driving on the motion activity of vehicle drivers -- III. Sea Transport -- Human performance in seafaring -- Stress factors and countermeasures in navigation -- Ship of the future: human problems and performance -- Accidents on board merchant ships -- Sleep data sampled from the crew of a merchant marine ship -- IV; Special Reviews -- Transport operators as responsible persons in stressful situations -- Stress response as a function of age and sex -- Drugs and transport operations -- Mechanical vibration in transport operations -- V. Methods -- Continuous electrophysiological recording -- Dimensions of flight crew performance decrements: methodological implications for field research -- Methodology in workstress studies.
    Abstract: The widespread interest in "stressful" aspects of contemporary society which contribute to its burden of illness and diseases (e.g. gastro intestinal, cardiovascular) has led to a large number of state­ ments and reports which relate the manifestations to a maladaptation of the individual. Furthermore, recent research suggests that under some condi tions stress may have a more generalized effect of decreasing the body's ability to combat destructive forces and expose it to a variety of diseases. Breakdown in adaptation occurs when an individual cannot cope with demands inherent in his environment. These may be due to an excessive mental or physical load, including factors of a social or psychological nature and task performance requirements ranging from those which are monotonous, simple and repetitive to complex, fast, decision-taking ones. Experience shows however that not all people placed under the same condi tions suffer similarly, and it follows that to the social and psychological environment should be added a genetic factor influencing, through the brain, the responses of individuals. It is clear that, besides human suffering, this "breakdown in adaptation" causes massive losses of revenue to industry and national health authorities. Thus a reduction in "stress", before "breakdown" occurs, or an improvement in coping with it would be very valuable.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 - Psychological and Sociological Parameters for Studies of Breakdown in Human AdaptationI. General Overviews -- Towards a taxonomy of methods: a general overview of psychological approaches in the study of breakdown of human adaptation -- Psychological field study techniques: overview and needs -- Psychological field study techniques: a critical evaluation -- Sociological parameters in studies of breakdown: a selective overview -- Use of psychological indices in epidemiological studies: overview and needs -- Stressful life events and illness: a review with special reference to a criticism of the life-event method -- II. Conceptual Approaches -- A lifetime prospective study of human adaptation and health -- Psychosocial and psychophysiological factors in the design and the evaluation of working conditions within health care systems -- The relation of social to pathophysiological processes: evidence from epidemiological studies -- Unemployment and health: a review of methodology -- Ontogenetic development and breakdown in adaptation: a review on psychosocial factors contributing to the development of myocardial infarction, and a description of a research program -- Physiological issues in establishing links between psychosocial factors and cardiovascular illness -- White collar occupation and coronary prone behaviour -- III. Methods -- Psychological methods: an overview of clinical applications -- Psychological factors in the breakdown of human adaptation: some methodological issues -- Monitoring signs of decrease in human adaptation: use of quantitative measures available in official statistics -- Inventory of stressful life-events (ILE) -- The Norwegian female climacteric project (VOS) -- Questionnaire for organisational stress (VOS) -- A scale for measuring the marital relationship among males -- 2 - Human Performance and Breakdown in Adaptation -- Human performance in transport operations: introductory remarks -- I. Air Transport -- Air crew workload -- Safety, individual performance and mental workload in air transport: Oedipus as Icarus -- Stress management in air transport operations: beyond alcohol and drugs -- Reasons for eliminating the “age 60” regulation for airline pilots -- Human factors education in European air transport operations -- II. Road Transport -- Behaviour research in road traffic -- Some theoretical considerations on accident research -- Accident of bus drivers - practical and methodological problems -- Effects of alcohol on driving performance: a critical look on the epidemiological, experimental and psychosocial approaches -- Investigations on the influence of continuous driving on the motion activity of vehicle drivers -- III. Sea Transport -- Human performance in seafaring -- Stress factors and countermeasures in navigation -- Ship of the future: human problems and performance -- Accidents on board merchant ships -- Sleep data sampled from the crew of a merchant marine ship -- IV; Special Reviews -- Transport operators as responsible persons in stressful situations -- Stress response as a function of age and sex -- Drugs and transport operations -- Mechanical vibration in transport operations -- V. Methods -- Continuous electrophysiological recording -- Dimensions of flight crew performance decrements: methodological implications for field research -- Methodology in workstress studies.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 66
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955486
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 218 p) , online resource
    Edition: Third Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 1.1 What is meant by ‘ionization constants’? -- 1.2 Why do we determine ionization constants? -- 1.3 Brief summary of the chemistry of ionization -- 1.4 The nature of pKa values -- 1.5 The shape of a titration curve -- 1.6 Methods commonly used for determining ionization constants -- 1.7 What degree of precision is required? -- 1.8 The effect of temperature on ionization constants -- 1.9 Molality and molarity -- 2 Determination of Ionization Constants by Potentiometrie Titration using a Glass Electrode -- 2.1 Apparatus for general use -- 2.2 Preparation of solutions -- 2.3 Choice of concentration for the titration -- 2.4 Details of the titration method -- 2.5 Derivation and choice of equations for calculating pKa -- 2.6 Some typical titrations (worked examples) -- 2.7 Precision and accuracy. Checking the precision obtained -- 2.8 Common sources of error, and their elimination -- 2.9False constants -- 2.10 Partly aqueous solvents -- 3 Refinements of Potentiometrie Titration: Apparatus and Calculations -- A Apparatus -- 3.1 Semi-micro titrations -- 3.2 Micro titrations -- 3.3 The rapid-flow method -- 3.4 The hydrogen electrode -- B Calculations -- 3.5 Monofunctional acids and bases -- 3.6 Method of calculation -- 3.7 Diacidic bases, dibasic acids and ampholytes -- 3.8 Overlapping ionization processes -- 3.9 Polyelectrolytes -- 3.10 Accuracy of the potentiometric method -- 3.11 Non-aqueous solvents -- 4 Determination of Ionization Constants by Spectrophotometry -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Apparatus -- 4.3 Buffers -- 4.4 Acidity functions -- 4.5 Preparation of the stock solution of the unknown -- 4.6 The search for the spectra of two pure ionic species -- 4.7 The choice of an analytical wavelength -- 4.8 Preliminary search for an approximate value of pKa -- 4.9 Exact determination of pKa -- 4.10 Worked examples -- 4.11 Activity corrections -- 4.12 Extensions of the spectrometric method -- (a)The pKa of a very weak acid (graphical treatment) -- (b)Overlapping pKa values -- (c)Computer program for overlapping values -- 4.13 Errors, precision and accuracy -- 4.14 Common sources of error -- 4.15 Spectrophotometric determination of the pKa of a substance that lacks an absorption spectrum -- 4.16 A rapid method for the approximate measurement of pKa -- 5 Relations between Ionization and Solubility. Determination of Ionization Constants by Phase Equilibria -- 5.1 Ionization constants in preparative work -- 5.2 Prediction of solubility from ionization constants -- 5.3 Determination of ionization constants from solubilities -- 5.4 Determination of ionization constants from vapour pressure, by partitioning between a pair of solvents, or by other phase equilibria -- 6 Determination of Ionization Constants by Conductimetry -- 6.1 Scope of the method -- 6.2 Apparatus -- 6.3 Procedure -- 6.4 Refinements of calculation -- 7 Some Other Methods for the Determination of Ionization Constants -- 7.1 Raman spectrometry -- 7.2 Proton nuclear magnetic resonance -- 7.3 Nuclear magnetic resonance using other atoms -- 7.4 Thermometric methods -- 8 Zwitterions (Dipolar Ions) -- 8.1 Zwitterions compared to ordinary amphoteric substances -- 8.2 How to distinguish zwitterions from ordinary ampholytes -- 8.3 Zwitterionic equilibria: macroscopic and microscopic constants -- 9 The Ionization Constants of Typical Acids and Bases -- A Organic Section -- 9.1 The oxygen acids (monobasic) -- (a) Aliphatic carboxylic acids -- (b) Aromatic carboxylic acids -- (c) Aliphatic hydroxylie acids -- (d) Aromatic hydroxylie acids (phenols) -- (e) Other oxygen acids -- 9.2 The oxygen acids (dibasic) -- 9.3 Sulphur acids, nitrogen acids and carbon acids -- (a) Mercaptans -- (b) Nitrogen acids -- (c) Carbon acids -- 9.4 The nitrogen bases (monoacidic) -- (a) Aliphatic bases -- (b) Aromatic and heteroaromatic bases -- 9.5 The nitrogen bases (diacidic) -- 9.6 Carbinolamine bases -- 9.7 Oxygen bases and carbon bases -- 9.8 Amphoteric substances -- B Inorganic Section -- 9.9 Inorganic acids -- 9.10 Inorganic bases 164 -- C Biologically-Active Substances -- 10 Chelation and the Stability Constants of Metal Complexes -- 10.1 The nature of chelation -- 10.2 Methods of calculation -- 10.3 Choice of ionic medium and the preparation of standard solutions -- 10.4 Measurement of pH and the calculation of pCH -- 10.5 Common difficulties and how they can be overcome -- 11 Appendices -- I An outline of the Brønsted-Lowry Theory -- II Comparison of classical and thermodynamic quantities -- III Calculations of hydrogen ion activity and concentration: also of hydroxyl ion activity and concentration -- IV Some effects of temperature on ionization constants -- V How percentage ionized may be calculated, given pKa and pH -- VI An outline of the theory of pH -- References.
    Abstract: This practical manual is devised for organic chemists and biochemists who, in the course of their researches and without previous experience, need to determine an ionization constant. We are gratified that earlier editions were much used for this purpose and that they also proved adequate for the in­ service training of technicians and technical officers to provide a Department with a pK service. The features of previous editions that gave this wide appeal have been retained, but the subject matter has been revised, extended, and brought up to date. We present two new chapters, one of which describes the determination of the stability constants of the complexes which organic ligands form with metal cations. The other describes the use of more recently introduced techniques for the determination of ionization constants, such as Raman and nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy, thermometric titrations, and paper electro­ phoresis. Chapter 1 gives enhanced help in choosing between alternative methods for determining ionization constants. The two chapters on potentiometric methods have been extensively revised in the light of newer understanding of electrode processes and of the present state of the art in instrumen tation.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction1.1 What is meant by ‘ionization constants’? -- 1.2 Why do we determine ionization constants? -- 1.3 Brief summary of the chemistry of ionization -- 1.4 The nature of pKa values -- 1.5 The shape of a titration curve -- 1.6 Methods commonly used for determining ionization constants -- 1.7 What degree of precision is required? -- 1.8 The effect of temperature on ionization constants -- 1.9 Molality and molarity -- 2 Determination of Ionization Constants by Potentiometrie Titration using a Glass Electrode -- 2.1 Apparatus for general use -- 2.2 Preparation of solutions -- 2.3 Choice of concentration for the titration -- 2.4 Details of the titration method -- 2.5 Derivation and choice of equations for calculating pKa -- 2.6 Some typical titrations (worked examples) -- 2.7 Precision and accuracy. Checking the precision obtained -- 2.8 Common sources of error, and their elimination -- 2.9False constants -- 2.10 Partly aqueous solvents -- 3 Refinements of Potentiometrie Titration: Apparatus and Calculations -- A Apparatus -- 3.1 Semi-micro titrations -- 3.2 Micro titrations -- 3.3 The rapid-flow method -- 3.4 The hydrogen electrode -- B Calculations -- 3.5 Monofunctional acids and bases -- 3.6 Method of calculation -- 3.7 Diacidic bases, dibasic acids and ampholytes -- 3.8 Overlapping ionization processes -- 3.9 Polyelectrolytes -- 3.10 Accuracy of the potentiometric method -- 3.11 Non-aqueous solvents -- 4 Determination of Ionization Constants by Spectrophotometry -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Apparatus -- 4.3 Buffers -- 4.4 Acidity functions -- 4.5 Preparation of the stock solution of the unknown -- 4.6 The search for the spectra of two pure ionic species -- 4.7 The choice of an analytical wavelength -- 4.8 Preliminary search for an approximate value of pKa -- 4.9 Exact determination of pKa -- 4.10 Worked examples -- 4.11 Activity corrections -- 4.12 Extensions of the spectrometric method -- (a)The pKa of a very weak acid (graphical treatment) -- (b)Overlapping pKa values -- (c)Computer program for overlapping values -- 4.13 Errors, precision and accuracy -- 4.14 Common sources of error -- 4.15 Spectrophotometric determination of the pKa of a substance that lacks an absorption spectrum -- 4.16 A rapid method for the approximate measurement of pKa -- 5 Relations between Ionization and Solubility. Determination of Ionization Constants by Phase Equilibria -- 5.1 Ionization constants in preparative work -- 5.2 Prediction of solubility from ionization constants -- 5.3 Determination of ionization constants from solubilities -- 5.4 Determination of ionization constants from vapour pressure, by partitioning between a pair of solvents, or by other phase equilibria -- 6 Determination of Ionization Constants by Conductimetry -- 6.1 Scope of the method -- 6.2 Apparatus -- 6.3 Procedure -- 6.4 Refinements of calculation -- 7 Some Other Methods for the Determination of Ionization Constants -- 7.1 Raman spectrometry -- 7.2 Proton nuclear magnetic resonance -- 7.3 Nuclear magnetic resonance using other atoms -- 7.4 Thermometric methods -- 8 Zwitterions (Dipolar Ions) -- 8.1 Zwitterions compared to ordinary amphoteric substances -- 8.2 How to distinguish zwitterions from ordinary ampholytes -- 8.3 Zwitterionic equilibria: macroscopic and microscopic constants -- 9 The Ionization Constants of Typical Acids and Bases -- A Organic Section -- 9.1 The oxygen acids (monobasic) -- (a) Aliphatic carboxylic acids -- (b) Aromatic carboxylic acids -- (c) Aliphatic hydroxylie acids -- (d) Aromatic hydroxylie acids (phenols) -- (e) Other oxygen acids -- 9.2 The oxygen acids (dibasic) -- 9.3 Sulphur acids, nitrogen acids and carbon acids -- (a) Mercaptans -- (b) Nitrogen acids -- (c) Carbon acids -- 9.4 The nitrogen bases (monoacidic) -- (a) Aliphatic bases -- (b) Aromatic and heteroaromatic bases -- 9.5 The nitrogen bases (diacidic) -- 9.6 Carbinolamine bases -- 9.7 Oxygen bases and carbon bases -- 9.8 Amphoteric substances -- B Inorganic Section -- 9.9 Inorganic acids -- 9.10 Inorganic bases 164 -- C Biologically-Active Substances -- 10 Chelation and the Stability Constants of Metal Complexes -- 10.1 The nature of chelation -- 10.2 Methods of calculation -- 10.3 Choice of ionic medium and the preparation of standard solutions -- 10.4 Measurement of pH and the calculation of pCH -- 10.5 Common difficulties and how they can be overcome -- 11 Appendices -- I An outline of the Brønsted-Lowry Theory -- II Comparison of classical and thermodynamic quantities -- III Calculations of hydrogen ion activity and concentration: also of hydroxyl ion activity and concentration -- IV Some effects of temperature on ionization constants -- V How percentage ionized may be calculated, given pKa and pH -- VI An outline of the theory of pH -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 67
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955769
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Signals, systems and communications -- Communication signals -- Communication channels -- Communication Networks -- Telecommunications Worldwide -- 2 Signal representation and analysis -- The time domain -- The frequency domain -- Fourier series analysis -- Frequency domain representation of aperiodic signals -- Fourier transforms -- Frequency domain representation for signals of arbitrary waveshape -- Amplitude distribution of signals -- 3 Sinusoidal carrier modulation -- Amplitude modulation -- Angle modulation -- Frequency division multiplexing -- 4 Radio receiver principles -- Tuned radio frequency (TRF) receiver -- Superheterodyne (superhet) receivers -- 5 Pulse modulation systems -- Pulse amplitude modulation -- Other pulse modulation schemes -- Time division multiplexing -- 6 Pulse code modulation -- Quantization -- Sampling and pulse encoding -- Non-uniform quantization -- Differential pulse code modulation -- PCM-TDM telephony -- 7 Digital communications -- Digital transmission -- The eye diagram -- Signal design -- Error probability -- Coding for digital transmission -- Digital modulation -- 8 Systems case studies -- Broadcast FM radio -- Television systems -- Videotex systems -- Appendix: Decibels -- Answers to Numerical Problems.
    Abstract: This book provides a first introduction to the subject of telecommunications suit­ able for first and second year undergraduates following degree or similar courses in electronic engineering. There are very few specific prerequisites other than a general background in electric circuit principles and a level of mathematical maturity consistent with entry to engineering courses in British universities. The intention is to provide a broad perspective of modern telecommunication principles and applications. Following a general overview of telecommunications, a thorough, albeit introductory, treatment is provided of underlying principles such as signal representation and analysis, sampling, analogue and digital trans­ of several mission, modulation and coding. The book concludes with a description important systems applications which serve as case studies to illustrate further the principles introduced and demonstrate their application in a practical context. Many people have contributed, directly and indirectly, to this book. I am espe­ cially grateful to Professor Kel Fidler of the Open University for suggesting that I write the book and for the support and guidance he has provided throughout the endeavour. The Telecommunications Research Group of the Department of Elec­ trical Engineering Science at the University of Essex has provided a stimulating environment in which to develop my appreciation of telecommunication systems and in particular Professor Ken Cattermole has influenced my thinking greatly.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Signals, systems and communicationsCommunication signals -- Communication channels -- Communication Networks -- Telecommunications Worldwide -- 2 Signal representation and analysis -- The time domain -- The frequency domain -- Fourier series analysis -- Frequency domain representation of aperiodic signals -- Fourier transforms -- Frequency domain representation for signals of arbitrary waveshape -- Amplitude distribution of signals -- 3 Sinusoidal carrier modulation -- Amplitude modulation -- Angle modulation -- Frequency division multiplexing -- 4 Radio receiver principles -- Tuned radio frequency (TRF) receiver -- Superheterodyne (superhet) receivers -- 5 Pulse modulation systems -- Pulse amplitude modulation -- Other pulse modulation schemes -- Time division multiplexing -- 6 Pulse code modulation -- Quantization -- Sampling and pulse encoding -- Non-uniform quantization -- Differential pulse code modulation -- PCM-TDM telephony -- 7 Digital communications -- Digital transmission -- The eye diagram -- Signal design -- Error probability -- Coding for digital transmission -- Digital modulation -- 8 Systems case studies -- Broadcast FM radio -- Television systems -- Videotex systems -- Appendix: Decibels -- Answers to Numerical Problems.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 68
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955745
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Infant enzyme chemistry -- 2. The mechanistic basis of enzyme catalysis -- 3. Chemical models of coenzyme catalyses -- 4. Selectivity in synthesis — chemicals or enzymes -- 5. Enzymes as targets for drug design -- 6. Metal ions in biological systems -- 7. Enzyme-level studies of the biosynthesis of natural products -- 8. The impact of enzymology in biochemistry and beyond.
    Abstract: In the molecular sciences, enzyme chemistry occupies a special niche as one of the major contact points between chemical and biological disciplines. The special properties of enzymes as selective and efficient catalysts are so central to current challenges to chemists that the development of enzyme chemistry in the past thirty years has been a major stimulus to chemical research in general. On the one hand studies of the intrinsic properties of enzymes and, on the other hand, their applications to synthesis, drug design, and biosynthesis have had an immense impact. This book brings together in one volume essays describing several such fields with emphasis on the applications. It would be unnecessarily repetitious to outline the approach and contents of the book in a Preface; the first short chapter is more eloquent than a formal Preface can be. I shall therefore encourage you to begin with the Introduction in Chapter 1 and here I wish to extend my warm thanks to those who have contributed to the production of this book: the authors for their acceptance of the overall concept of the book and for the thoughtfulness of their writing; Dr Charles Suckling, FRS and Professor Hamish Wood for their constructive criticism of the whole book; and Dr John Buckingham and his colleagues at Chapman and Hall for their efficiency and enthusiasm in transforming the typescripts into the book that you now hold. Colin J. Suckling University of Strathclyde Contributors Donald H.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Infant enzyme chemistry2. The mechanistic basis of enzyme catalysis -- 3. Chemical models of coenzyme catalyses -- 4. Selectivity in synthesis - chemicals or enzymes -- 5. Enzymes as targets for drug design -- 6. Metal ions in biological systems -- 7. Enzyme-level studies of the biosynthesis of natural products -- 8. The impact of enzymology in biochemistry and beyond.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 69
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401159890
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 1A General remarks -- 1B Classification of organisms -- 1C Lipid nomenclature -- 2 Major Lipid Types in Plants and Micro-Organisms -- 2A Fatty acids -- 2B Acyl lipids -- 2C Terpenoids -- 2D Sterols -- 2E Other lipid types -- 2F Ether lipids -- 3 Distribution of Lipids -- 3A Lipid distributions in different organisms and their use in taxonomy -- 3B Subcellular distribution of lipids -- 3C Intramembrane lipid distribution -- 3D Subcellular fractionation and membrane isolation -- 3E Factors affecting the lipid composition of plants and microorganisms -- 4 Biosynthesis -- 4A Fatty acids -- 4B Acyl lipids -- 4C Terpenoids and steroids -- 4D Complex lipids -- 4E Ether lipids -- 5 Degradation -- 5A Degradation of acyl lipids -- 5B Oxidation of fatty acids -- 6 Lipid Functions -- 6A Membrane structure and function -- 6B Storage -- 6C Microbial lipids as virulence factors -- 6D Conclusion -- Further reading.
    Abstract: This short text is designed to provide basic information about plant and microbial lipids not only for scientists working in the microbiological and plant fields, but for anyone wanting a concise introduction to this aspect of lipid biochemistry. We have long been aware that standard biochemistry books tend to. concentrate (sometimes exclusively) on animal lipids, thus neglecting many of the important and special features of other organisms. It is not our intention that the book should be comprehensive and we have not, for instance, provided complete lists of lipid compositions of all plants and bacterial species; a number of excellent specialist texts exist and many of these are listed for further reading. Instead we have sought to provide sufficient information for an advanced undergraduate or a research student to give them a 'feel' for the subject. By a combination of generalisation and the use of examples of special interest we hope the book will whet the appetite of the reader so that, by their own research, they are stimulated to discover and, perhaps, answer some of the fascinating questions concerning plant and microbial lipids. We trust that we shall succeed in these aims, even if that will mean more competition for research funds in our own fields! J. L. HARWOOD N. J. RUSSELL November 1983 Acknowledgements Our research careers have been devoted to a study of lipids: we have no regrets and are happy to acknowledge Professors J. N.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction1A General remarks -- 1B Classification of organisms -- 1C Lipid nomenclature -- 2 Major Lipid Types in Plants and Micro-Organisms -- 2A Fatty acids -- 2B Acyl lipids -- 2C Terpenoids -- 2D Sterols -- 2E Other lipid types -- 2F Ether lipids -- 3 Distribution of Lipids -- 3A Lipid distributions in different organisms and their use in taxonomy -- 3B Subcellular distribution of lipids -- 3C Intramembrane lipid distribution -- 3D Subcellular fractionation and membrane isolation -- 3E Factors affecting the lipid composition of plants and microorganisms -- 4 Biosynthesis -- 4A Fatty acids -- 4B Acyl lipids -- 4C Terpenoids and steroids -- 4D Complex lipids -- 4E Ether lipids -- 5 Degradation -- 5A Degradation of acyl lipids -- 5B Oxidation of fatty acids -- 6 Lipid Functions -- 6A Membrane structure and function -- 6B Storage -- 6C Microbial lipids as virulence factors -- 6D Conclusion -- Further reading.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 70
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401577014
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (IX, 182 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The nature of viruses -- 2 Exposure to viruses and some consequences -- 3 Viruses associated with invertebrates -- 4 Viruses and the terrestrial environment -- 5 Viruses in aquatic environments -- 6 Strategies of virus maintenance in communities -- Conclusion -- References -- Author Index.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The nature of viruses2 Exposure to viruses and some consequences -- 3 Viruses associated with invertebrates -- 4 Viruses and the terrestrial environment -- 5 Viruses in aquatic environments -- 6 Strategies of virus maintenance in communities -- Conclusion -- References -- Author Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 71
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401160537
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. The Medium and the Market — An Overview -- 1.1 A Telecommunications Overview -- 1.2 Understanding the Basics -- 1.3 A Bright Future with Fiber Optics -- 1.4 A View from the Business Side -- 2. Modems and Multiplexers -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 The Role of Modems -- 2.3 Modem Applications -- 2.4 Industry Standards -- 2.5 Modem Features -- 2.6 Multiplexing Reduces Communications Cost -- 2.7 Multiplexer Technology -- 2.8 Statistical Multiplexer -- 3. Protocols and Codes -- 3.1 What is a Protocol? -- 3.2 Protocol Hierarchy -- 3.3 Physical Electrical Interface -- 3.4 Link Control Structure -- 3.5 Bisync Protocol -- 3.6 HDLC Protocol -- 3.7 SDLC Overview -- 3.8 System Network Architecture (SNA) -- 3.9 Polling Explained -- 3.10 Transmission Codes -- 3.11 Code and Speed Converters -- 3.12 Treatment of Errors -- 3.13 Front-End Processors -- 4. Terminal Technology -- 4.1 CRT Display Terminals -- 4.2 Printing Technologies -- 4.3 Graphic Terminals -- 4.4 Facsimile Technology -- 4.5 Integrated Workstations -- 5. Network Management -- 5.1 Network Control Design Considerations -- 5.2 Elementary Monitoring -- 5.3 Redundancy and Compatability -- 5.4 Network Testing -- 5.5 Centralized Troubleshooting -- 5.6 Network Control Center -- 5.7 Specialized Test Equipment -- 5.8 Network Security -- 6. Network Structures -- 6.1 Topology Tradeoffs -- 6.2 Local Area Networks -- 6.3 Distributed Communications -- 6.4 Message Switching Networks -- 6.5 Integrated Voice and Data -- 6.6 Shared Resources -- 6.7 Packet Switching Networks -- 6.8 Network Design Considerations -- 7. Satellite and Carrier Services -- 7.1 Satellite Overview -- 7.2 Selecting a Transmission Method -- 7.3 Facsimile Services -- Glossary of Terms.
    Abstract: Modern technology began in the 1950's and 1960's, with the devel­ opment of transistor technology. At first it was useful in improving the performance of voice communications. But then it made possible extraordinary computer capability in manageable size-and at man­ ageable cost. First came large mainframe computers for only the largest companies; and later the microcomputer as we know it today. The increasing use of computers, in the 1960's with their ability to manipulate and store vast quantities of information, stimulated the need for computers to communicate with one another and so tele­ phone circuits had to be segregated and conditioned specifically for computer traffic, using the modem. Computers ushered in a new era of business communications in which data could be developed, ma­ nipulated, stored or transmitted with remarkable ease. The recent pace of technological advancement has been breath­ taking and, today, the distinction between communications and computers is no longer even necessary. Computers, at the very core of communications networks, route and control communications on major common carriers. The decade of the 1980's is bearing the fruits of the marriage of computers and communications. For the first time networks are en­ abling organizations to utilize the combined processing power of computers and communications equipment.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. The Medium and the Market - An Overview1.1 A Telecommunications Overview -- 1.2 Understanding the Basics -- 1.3 A Bright Future with Fiber Optics -- 1.4 A View from the Business Side -- 2. Modems and Multiplexers -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 The Role of Modems -- 2.3 Modem Applications -- 2.4 Industry Standards -- 2.5 Modem Features -- 2.6 Multiplexing Reduces Communications Cost -- 2.7 Multiplexer Technology -- 2.8 Statistical Multiplexer -- 3. Protocols and Codes -- 3.1 What is a Protocol? -- 3.2 Protocol Hierarchy -- 3.3 Physical Electrical Interface -- 3.4 Link Control Structure -- 3.5 Bisync Protocol -- 3.6 HDLC Protocol -- 3.7 SDLC Overview -- 3.8 System Network Architecture (SNA) -- 3.9 Polling Explained -- 3.10 Transmission Codes -- 3.11 Code and Speed Converters -- 3.12 Treatment of Errors -- 3.13 Front-End Processors -- 4. Terminal Technology -- 4.1 CRT Display Terminals -- 4.2 Printing Technologies -- 4.3 Graphic Terminals -- 4.4 Facsimile Technology -- 4.5 Integrated Workstations -- 5. Network Management -- 5.1 Network Control Design Considerations -- 5.2 Elementary Monitoring -- 5.3 Redundancy and Compatability -- 5.4 Network Testing -- 5.5 Centralized Troubleshooting -- 5.6 Network Control Center -- 5.7 Specialized Test Equipment -- 5.8 Network Security -- 6. Network Structures -- 6.1 Topology Tradeoffs -- 6.2 Local Area Networks -- 6.3 Distributed Communications -- 6.4 Message Switching Networks -- 6.5 Integrated Voice and Data -- 6.6 Shared Resources -- 6.7 Packet Switching Networks -- 6.8 Network Design Considerations -- 7. Satellite and Carrier Services -- 7.1 Satellite Overview -- 7.2 Selecting a Transmission Method -- 7.3 Facsimile Services -- Glossary of Terms.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 72
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401511810
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 243 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Series Statement: Developments in International Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Law ; Private international law. ; Conflict of laws. ; International law. ; Comparative law.
    Abstract: I: The Evolution of the Doctrine of State Immunity -- 1 — Historical Background -- 2 — Emergence of a Specific Rule of State Immunity -- 3 — The Transition to Restricted Immunity in Major Absolute Immunity Jurisdictions -- 4 — Proposed Criteria for the Distinction between Public Acts and Private Acts of the Foreign State -- II: The Doctrine of State Immunity: A Critical View -- 1 — Some Theoretical Considerations -- 2 — Inferences Regarding State Immunity -- 3 — Common Ground between “Absolutists” and “Restrictionists” -- 4 — Immunity from Execution -- III: The Seven Recent Instruments: Common Features and Distinctive Provisions -- 1 — Immunity From Suit -- 2 — Immunity From Execution -- 3 — The Current State of the Law -- 4 — The Work of Learned Bodies -- Conclusions -- Notes -- Appendices -- Subject and Name Index -- Cases Cited.
    Abstract: Ours is a world in which the volume of the external trade of the vast majority of nations has greatly expanded and continues to be on the rise. Transnational intercourse of all kinds is now a feature of an interdependent world economy in which no nation can afford to stand aloof from a market-place which has assumed global dimensions. It is also a world where many nations, and not only of the Socialist bloc, conduct some of their transnational business themselves, or else they entrust it to state-owned cor­ porations and to agencies of the state. In these circumstances it becomes of prime importance to know whether a foreign state or an agency or instrumentality thereof can be sued before the local courts and, if so, whether the final judgement obtained can be enforced against the funds or property of the judgement debtor. The question of the immunity of states from suit and from execution is thus one of direct practical relevance not only to the legal profession but also to governments and the business and banking communities all over the world. The economic effects of a particular legal stand on state immunity are obvious. The position of national courts on state immunity can either attract more business or discourage further dealings with foreign states or their agencies. It can thus affect the balance of payments and, in general, the role the country plays in the world market.
    Description / Table of Contents: I: The Evolution of the Doctrine of State Immunity1 - Historical Background -- 2 - Emergence of a Specific Rule of State Immunity -- 3 - The Transition to Restricted Immunity in Major Absolute Immunity Jurisdictions -- 4 - Proposed Criteria for the Distinction between Public Acts and Private Acts of the Foreign State -- II: The Doctrine of State Immunity: A Critical View -- 1 - Some Theoretical Considerations -- 2 - Inferences Regarding State Immunity -- 3 - Common Ground between “Absolutists” and “Restrictionists” -- 4 - Immunity from Execution -- III: The Seven Recent Instruments: Common Features and Distinctive Provisions -- 1 - Immunity From Suit -- 2 - Immunity From Execution -- 3 - The Current State of the Law -- 4 - The Work of Learned Bodies -- Conclusions -- Notes -- Appendices -- Subject and Name Index -- Cases Cited.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 73
    ISBN: 9789401091633
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: C. D. Darlington — In Memoriam -- Molecular Cytogenetics -- Sorting, Cloning and Analysis of Specific Human Chromosomes -- High Resolution Linkage Map of Human Chromosome llp -- Molecular Organisation of the Chromosome -- Z-DNA and Chromosome Structure -- Centromeric DNA in Yeast -- Telomeres and Artificial Chromosomes in Yeast -- Meiosis -- Genic Control of Meiosis -- Application of the Spreading Techniques to Structural Heterozygotes -- Synapsis, Synaptic Adjustment and DNA Synthesis in Mouse Oocytes -- The Synaptonemal Complex in Chromosome Pairing and Disjunction -- X-Inactivation and Its Role in Male Sterility -- Age-Related Aneuploidy and Its Aetiology — Testing Some of the Hypotheses -- Chromosomes and Cancer -- Chromosomes and Cancer: Chromatin’s Re-Awakening -- Structure and Function of Chromosomes -- Balbiani Ring Genes and Their Induction -- Active Genes and Puffs -- Mapping of Genetic Activity on Mammalian Chromosomes -- Spatial Order of Chromosomes -- Ordered Arrangement of Chromosomes in Wheat -- Towards a General Model for Spatial Law and Order in Nuclear and Karyotypic Architecture -- Correlation Between Interphase and Metaphase Chromosome Arrangements as Studied by Laser-Uv-Microbeam Experiments -- Chromosomes and Evolution -- Chromosomal Evolution, Speciation and Morphological Change in Vertebrates: The Role of Social Behaviour -- DNA Family Turnover and the Coevolution of Chromosomes -- The Evolution of Sex Chromosomes and Their Consequences for the Evolutionary Process -- The Evolutionary Consequence of Major Genomic Changes in Amphibia -- Linkage Group Conservation and the Notion of 24 Primordial Vertebrate Linkage Groups -- Explosive Chromosomal Speciation in Seismic Active Regions -- Abstracts of Selected Posters -- Author Index.
    Description / Table of Contents: C. D. Darlington - In MemoriamMolecular Cytogenetics -- Sorting, Cloning and Analysis of Specific Human Chromosomes -- High Resolution Linkage Map of Human Chromosome llp -- Molecular Organisation of the Chromosome -- Z-DNA and Chromosome Structure -- Centromeric DNA in Yeast -- Telomeres and Artificial Chromosomes in Yeast -- Meiosis -- Genic Control of Meiosis -- Application of the Spreading Techniques to Structural Heterozygotes -- Synapsis, Synaptic Adjustment and DNA Synthesis in Mouse Oocytes -- The Synaptonemal Complex in Chromosome Pairing and Disjunction -- X-Inactivation and Its Role in Male Sterility -- Age-Related Aneuploidy and Its Aetiology - Testing Some of the Hypotheses -- Chromosomes and Cancer -- Chromosomes and Cancer: Chromatin’s Re-Awakening -- Structure and Function of Chromosomes -- Balbiani Ring Genes and Their Induction -- Active Genes and Puffs -- Mapping of Genetic Activity on Mammalian Chromosomes -- Spatial Order of Chromosomes -- Ordered Arrangement of Chromosomes in Wheat -- Towards a General Model for Spatial Law and Order in Nuclear and Karyotypic Architecture -- Correlation Between Interphase and Metaphase Chromosome Arrangements as Studied by Laser-Uv-Microbeam Experiments -- Chromosomes and Evolution -- Chromosomal Evolution, Speciation and Morphological Change in Vertebrates: The Role of Social Behaviour -- DNA Family Turnover and the Coevolution of Chromosomes -- The Evolution of Sex Chromosomes and Their Consequences for the Evolutionary Process -- The Evolutionary Consequence of Major Genomic Changes in Amphibia -- Linkage Group Conservation and the Notion of 24 Primordial Vertebrate Linkage Groups -- Explosive Chromosomal Speciation in Seismic Active Regions -- Abstracts of Selected Posters -- Author Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 74
    ISBN: 9789401168250
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (227 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: The economic crisis and the social security -- Synthesis reports -- The financing of social security -- Pensions -- Le droit à la santé à l’épreuve de la crise économique -- Le chômage -- Family allowances and minimum income -- Sécurité sociale et insécurité économique -- National reports -- Rapport allemand -- Rapport autrichien -- Rapport belge -- Dutch report -- Rapport espagnol -- Rapport français -- Rapport grec -- Rapport italien -- Norvegian report -- Rapport suédois.
    Description / Table of Contents: The economic crisis and the social securitySynthesis reports -- The financing of social security -- Pensions -- Le droit à la santé à l’épreuve de la crise économique -- Le chômage -- Family allowances and minimum income -- Sécurité sociale et insécurité économique -- National reports -- Rapport allemand -- Rapport autrichien -- Rapport belge -- Dutch report -- Rapport espagnol -- Rapport français -- Rapport grec -- Rapport italien -- Norvegian report -- Rapport suédois.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 75
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955424
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Carotenoid-Protein Complexes -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Carotenolipo (glyco) proteins -- 1.3 Carotenoproteins -- 1.4 Nature of bonding of pigments to apoproteins -- 1.5 References -- 2. Porifera -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Nature and distribution -- 2.3 Source of sponge carotenoids -- 2.4 Chemosystematics of sponge carotenoids -- 2.5 References -- 3. Coelenterates -- 3.1 Class Hydrozoa -- 3.2 Class Scyphozoa -- 3.3 Class Anthozoa -- 3.4 References -- 4. Echinodermata, Annelida, Sipunculida, Priapulida, Platyhelminthes and Bryozoa -- 4.1 Echinodermata -- 4.2 Annelida -- 4.3 Sipunculida -- 4.4 Priapulida -- 4.5 Platyhelminthes -- 4.6 Bryozoa -- 4.7 Formation and metabolism -- 4.8 References -- 5. Mollusca -- 5.1 Pelecypoda (Bivalvia, Lamellibranchia, Acephala) -- 5.2 Gastropoda -- 5.3 Amphineura -- 5.4 Cephalopoda -- 5.5 Function of carotenoids -- 5.6 References -- 6. Crustacea -- 6.1 Nature and distribution -- 6.2 Localization -- 6.3 Metabolism -- 6.4 Hormonal control of pigmentation -- 6.5 Sexual dimorphism -- 6.6 Colour variants -- 6.7 Environmental and ecological considerations -- 6.8 Crowding -- 6.9 Parasitization -- 6.10 Function -- 6.11 References -- 7. Arachnids and Insects -- 7.1 Arachnida -- 7.2 Insecta -- 7.3 Function -- 7.4 References -- 8. Tunicates and Fish -- 8.1 Tunicates -- 8.2 Fish -- 8.3 References -- 9. Amphibia and Reptiles -- 9.1 Amphibia -- 9.2 Reptiles -- 9.3 References -- 10. Birds -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Distribution -- 10.3 Formation -- 10.4 Metabolism -- 10.5 Function -- 10.6 Coloration of poultry foods -- 10.7 References -- 11. Mammals -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Carotenoid accumulators -- 11.3 Non-accumulators -- 11.4 Conversion of carotenoids into Vitamin A -- 11.5 References -- General Index -- Species Index.
    Abstract: des Plantes (Hermann, Paris), and in 1935 by Lederer's Les Carotenoides des Animaux (Hermann, Paris). Since then a survey such as the present one has not appeared. In order to present a full picture, much of the pre-1934 work has been reconsidered and, as far as is known, every important contribution which has appeared since that date has been discussed. Two peripheral aspects ofthe subject have, however, been omitted, namely (a) the qualita­ tive and quantitative changes which the carotenoids of plant materials undergo in storage or during processing into food and (b) the carotene (pro-vitamin A) requirements of different animal species; it was felt that the former, about which a great deal has been written, was too technological to be suitable for inclusion in the present volume, whilst the latter is more suitable for a monograph on vitamin A. The very wide distribution of the carotenoids in Nature suggests that, in spite of the superficially diverse functions ascribed to them in different living tissues, there may be some factor or property through which all these functions will eventually be correlated; any suggestion as to the nature of this common property can perhaps come most readily from a comparative approach. Apart from critically surveying the literature this book has been constructed so as to focus attention on comparative data and their possible implications.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Carotenoid-Protein Complexes1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Carotenolipo (glyco) proteins -- 1.3 Carotenoproteins -- 1.4 Nature of bonding of pigments to apoproteins -- 1.5 References -- 2. Porifera -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Nature and distribution -- 2.3 Source of sponge carotenoids -- 2.4 Chemosystematics of sponge carotenoids -- 2.5 References -- 3. Coelenterates -- 3.1 Class Hydrozoa -- 3.2 Class Scyphozoa -- 3.3 Class Anthozoa -- 3.4 References -- 4. Echinodermata, Annelida, Sipunculida, Priapulida, Platyhelminthes and Bryozoa -- 4.1 Echinodermata -- 4.2 Annelida -- 4.3 Sipunculida -- 4.4 Priapulida -- 4.5 Platyhelminthes -- 4.6 Bryozoa -- 4.7 Formation and metabolism -- 4.8 References -- 5. Mollusca -- 5.1 Pelecypoda (Bivalvia, Lamellibranchia, Acephala) -- 5.2 Gastropoda -- 5.3 Amphineura -- 5.4 Cephalopoda -- 5.5 Function of carotenoids -- 5.6 References -- 6. Crustacea -- 6.1 Nature and distribution -- 6.2 Localization -- 6.3 Metabolism -- 6.4 Hormonal control of pigmentation -- 6.5 Sexual dimorphism -- 6.6 Colour variants -- 6.7 Environmental and ecological considerations -- 6.8 Crowding -- 6.9 Parasitization -- 6.10 Function -- 6.11 References -- 7. Arachnids and Insects -- 7.1 Arachnida -- 7.2 Insecta -- 7.3 Function -- 7.4 References -- 8. Tunicates and Fish -- 8.1 Tunicates -- 8.2 Fish -- 8.3 References -- 9. Amphibia and Reptiles -- 9.1 Amphibia -- 9.2 Reptiles -- 9.3 References -- 10. Birds -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Distribution -- 10.3 Formation -- 10.4 Metabolism -- 10.5 Function -- 10.6 Coloration of poultry foods -- 10.7 References -- 11. Mammals -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Carotenoid accumulators -- 11.3 Non-accumulators -- 11.4 Conversion of carotenoids into Vitamin A -- 11.5 References -- General Index -- Species Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 76
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955400
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 210 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction to electron beam instruments -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Basic properties of electron emitters -- 1.3 Electron optics, electron lenses and deflection systems -- References -- 2 Electron-specimen interactions -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Elastically scattered electrons -- 2.3 Inelastically scattered electrons -- 2.4 Generation of X-rays -- 2.5 Generation of Auger electrons -- 2.6 Generation of electron beam induced current and cathodoluminescence signals -- References -- 3 Layout and operational modes of electron beam instruments -- 3.1 Transmission electron microscopy -- 3.2 Scanning electron microscopy -- 3.3 Scanning transmission electron microscopy -- 3.4 Auger electron spectroscopy -- 3.5 Electron microprobe analysis -- 3.6 X-ray spectrometers -- 3.7 Electron spectrometers -- References -- 4 Interpretation of diffraction information -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Analysis of electron diffraction patterns -- 4.3 Interpretation of diffraction maxima associated with phase transformations and magnetic samples -- 4.4 Interpretation of diffraction patterns from twinned crystals -- 4.5 Interpretation of channelling patterns and backscattered electron patterns in scanning electron microscopy -- References -- 5 Analysis of micrographs in TEM, STEM, HREM and SEM -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Theories of diffraction contrast in transmission electron microscopy -- 5.3 Analysis of images in transmission electron microscopy -- 5.4 Influence of electron optical conditions on images in TEM and STEM -- 5.5 Interpretation of high resolution electron microscopy images -- 5.6 Interpretation of scanning electron microscopy images -- References -- 6 Interpretation of analytical data -- 6.1 Interpretation of X-ray data -- 6.2 Interpretation of data from thin samples -- 6.3 Interpretation of X-ray data from bulk samples -- 6.4 Interpretation of electron energy loss spectra -- 6.5 Interpretation of Auger spectra -- 6.6 Spatial resolution of analysis -- References -- Appendix A The reciprocal lattice -- Appendix B Interplanar distances and angles in crystals. Cell volumes. Diffraction group symmetries -- Appendix C Kikuchi maps, standard diffraction patterns and extinction distances -- Appendix D Stereomicroscopy and trace analysis -- Appendix E Tables of X-ray and EELS energies.
    Abstract: The examination of materials using electron beam techniques has developed continuously for over twenty years and there are now many different methods of extracting detailed structural and chemical information using electron beams. These techniques which include electron probe microanalysis, trans­ mission electron microscopy, Auger spectroscopy and scanning electron microscopy have, until recently, developed more or less independently of each other. Thus dedicated instruments designed to optimize the performance for a specific application have been available and correspondingly most of the available textbooks tend to have covered the theory and practice of an individual technique. There appears to be no doubt that dedicated instru­ ments taken together with the specialized textbooks will continue to be the appropriate approach for some problems. Nevertheless the underlying electron-specimen interactions are common to many techniques and in view of the fact that a range of hybrid instruments is now available it seems appropriate to provide a broad-based text for users of these electron beam facilities. The aim of the present book is therefore to provide, in a reasonably concise form, the material which will allow the practitioner of one or more of the individual techniques to appreciate and to make use of the type of information which can be obtained using other electron beam techniques.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 77
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955363
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 1.1 The ethological approach to the study of behaviour -- 1.2 A brief outline of classical ethological theory -- 1.3 The modern study of animal behaviour -- 1.4 An outline of the book -- 2 The description and measurement of behaviour -- 2.1 Describing behaviour by its function -- 2.2 Describing behaviour by its form -- 2.3 Describing and measuring the relationship between an animal and its environment -- 2.4 What is the point of all this sophisticated analysis? -- 3 The study of the causes of behavioural change -- 3.1 What constitutes a causal explanation of behaviour? -- 3.2 The different kinds of causal explanation -- 3.3 Motivational models -- 3.4 Studying external influences on behaviour -- 3.5 Studying internal influences on behaviour -- 3.6 What is the nature of the mechanisms which cause behavioural change? -- 3.7 Studying the physiological bases of behavioural change -- 4 The development of behaviour -- 4.1 Problems with the instinct-learning dichotomy -- 4.2 Why is the term innate still used? -- 4.3 Describing the ontogeny of behaviour -- 4.4 Characterizing the factors which influence the development of behaviour -- 4.5 Classifying the factors which influence the development of behaviour -- 4.6 Some general features of behavioural development -- 5 The adaptive significance of behaviour -- 5.1 Sources of evidence about the adaptive significance of behaviour -- 5.2 Difficulties in studying the adaptive significance of behaviour -- 5.3 The state of the art -- 5.4 The adaptive significance of the way animals pattern their behavior in time -- 5.5 The adaptive significance of the way animals use space -- 5.6 The adaptive significance of an animal’s aggressive responses -- 5.7 The adaptive significance of an animal’s breeding habits; mating systems -- 5.8 Adaptive significance of behaviour accompanying mating -- 5.9 The adaptive significance of parental care -- 5.10 The adaptive significance of living in groups -- 5.11 Behaviour which cannot be explained by classic natural selection theory -- 5.12 Overview; sociobiology and behavioural ecology -- 6 The phylogeny of behaviour -- 6.1 Sources of evidence about the phylogeny of behaviour -- 6.2 Some representative behavioural phylogenies -- 6.3 Deriving general principles of behavioural evolution -- 7 The role of behaviour in the evolutionary process -- 7.1 The behaviour of other animals as a major selective force -- 7.2 Behaviour dictates the selection pressures to which an animal is exposed -- 7.3 The impact of behaviour on population structure -- 8 Behavioural genetics -- 8.1 The objectives of research into the inheritance of behaviour -- 8.2 Potential contributions of genetics to the study of animal behaviour -- 8.3 Quantitative genetics -- 8.5 Screening known genetic variants for behavioural differences -- 8.6 Characterizing the precise behavioural effects of genetic differences -- 8.7 The mechanisms whereby genes influence behaviour -- 8.8 Genetic mosaics -- 8.9 Animal behaviour and behavioural genetics -- 9 Applied ethology -- 9.1 Clarification of terms; what is applied ethology? -- 9.2 Ways in which etiological research can be applied to practical problems -- 9.3 Pest control -- 9.4 Increasing the productivity of commercially important species -- 9.5 Animal welfare -- 9.6 Conservation -- 9.7 Human behaviour -- References -- Author index -- Species index.
    Abstract: The aim of this book is to identify the main areas of active discussion about, and research into, the biology of animal behaviour, to describe and assess ways in which these can be studied and using selected examples, to illus­ trate the kinds of results which are emerging. It is not intended to provide an exhaustive review of all we know about animal behaviour, although the examples have been chosen to cover as many as possible of the things that animals do. XlV Preface Acknowledgements I would like to thank C. Swann, M.L.N. Murthy and the Superbrain for typing the manuscript; Linda Partridge, Pat Monaghan, Douglas Fraser and Richard Wilson for constructive criticism of earlier drafts; Alan Crowden for help in planning and producing the book and, particularly, Tim Huntingford for help and encouragement at all stages of its pro­ duction. Acknowledgements are gratefully made to Jim Tulley fot producing plates 1, 2, 3, 7 and 12 and to Michael Hansell for the remainder.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction1.1 The ethological approach to the study of behaviour -- 1.2 A brief outline of classical ethological theory -- 1.3 The modern study of animal behaviour -- 1.4 An outline of the book -- 2 The description and measurement of behaviour -- 2.1 Describing behaviour by its function -- 2.2 Describing behaviour by its form -- 2.3 Describing and measuring the relationship between an animal and its environment -- 2.4 What is the point of all this sophisticated analysis? -- 3 The study of the causes of behavioural change -- 3.1 What constitutes a causal explanation of behaviour? -- 3.2 The different kinds of causal explanation -- 3.3 Motivational models -- 3.4 Studying external influences on behaviour -- 3.5 Studying internal influences on behaviour -- 3.6 What is the nature of the mechanisms which cause behavioural change? -- 3.7 Studying the physiological bases of behavioural change -- 4 The development of behaviour -- 4.1 Problems with the instinct-learning dichotomy -- 4.2 Why is the term innate still used? -- 4.3 Describing the ontogeny of behaviour -- 4.4 Characterizing the factors which influence the development of behaviour -- 4.5 Classifying the factors which influence the development of behaviour -- 4.6 Some general features of behavioural development -- 5 The adaptive significance of behaviour -- 5.1 Sources of evidence about the adaptive significance of behaviour -- 5.2 Difficulties in studying the adaptive significance of behaviour -- 5.3 The state of the art -- 5.4 The adaptive significance of the way animals pattern their behavior in time -- 5.5 The adaptive significance of the way animals use space -- 5.6 The adaptive significance of an animal’s aggressive responses -- 5.7 The adaptive significance of an animal’s breeding habits; mating systems -- 5.8 Adaptive significance of behaviour accompanying mating -- 5.9 The adaptive significance of parental care -- 5.10 The adaptive significance of living in groups -- 5.11 Behaviour which cannot be explained by classic natural selection theory -- 5.12 Overview; sociobiology and behavioural ecology -- 6 The phylogeny of behaviour -- 6.1 Sources of evidence about the phylogeny of behaviour -- 6.2 Some representative behavioural phylogenies -- 6.3 Deriving general principles of behavioural evolution -- 7 The role of behaviour in the evolutionary process -- 7.1 The behaviour of other animals as a major selective force -- 7.2 Behaviour dictates the selection pressures to which an animal is exposed -- 7.3 The impact of behaviour on population structure -- 8 Behavioural genetics -- 8.1 The objectives of research into the inheritance of behaviour -- 8.2 Potential contributions of genetics to the study of animal behaviour -- 8.3 Quantitative genetics -- 8.5 Screening known genetic variants for behavioural differences -- 8.6 Characterizing the precise behavioural effects of genetic differences -- 8.7 The mechanisms whereby genes influence behaviour -- 8.8 Genetic mosaics -- 8.9 Animal behaviour and behavioural genetics -- 9 Applied ethology -- 9.1 Clarification of terms; what is applied ethology? -- 9.2 Ways in which etiological research can be applied to practical problems -- 9.3 Pest control -- 9.4 Increasing the productivity of commercially important species -- 9.5 Animal welfare -- 9.6 Conservation -- 9.7 Human behaviour -- References -- Author index -- Species index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 78
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400955622
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I Theoretical -- 1 Introduction -- 2 Gas adsorption -- 3 Adsorption isotherms -- 4 Langmuir and BET theories -- 5 The single point BET method -- 6 Adsorbate cross-sectional areas -- 7 Other surface area methods -- 8 Pore analysis by adsorption -- 9 Microporosity -- 10 Theory of wetting and capillarity for mercury porosimetry -- 11 Interpretation of mercury porosimetry data -- 12 Hysteresis, entrapment, and contact angle -- II Experimental -- 13 Adsorption measurements-Preliminaries -- 14 Vacuum volumetric measurements -- 15 Dynamic methods -- 16 Other flow methods -- 17 Gravimetric method -- 18 Comparison of experimental adsorption methods -- 19 Chemisorption -- 20 Mercury porosimetry -- 21 Density measurement -- References.
    Abstract: The rapid growth of interest in powders and their surface properties in many diverse industries prompted the writing of this book for those who have the need to make meaningful measurements without the benefit of years of experience. It is intended as an introduction to some of the elementary theory and experimental methods used to study the surface area, porosity and density of powders. It may be found useful by those with little or no training in solid surfaces who have the need to quickly learn the rudiments of surface area, density and pore-size measurements. Syosset, New York S. Lowell May, 1983 J. E. Shields Xl List of symbols Use of symbols for purposes other than those indicated in the following list are so defined in the text. Some symbols not shown in this list are defined in the text. d adsorbate cross-sectional area A area; condensation coefficient; collision frequency C BET constant c concentration D diameter; coefficient of thermal diffusion E adsorption potential f permeability aspect factor F flow rate; force; feed rate 9 gravitational constant G Gibbs free energy GS free surface energy h heat of immersion per unit area; height H enthalpy Hi heat of immersion Hsv heat of adsorption BET intercept; filament current k thermal conductivity; specific reaction rate K Harkins-Jura constant I length L heat of liquefaction M mass M molecular weight n number of moles N number of molecules; number of particles N Avagadro's number .
    Description / Table of Contents: I Theoretical1 Introduction -- 2 Gas adsorption -- 3 Adsorption isotherms -- 4 Langmuir and BET theories -- 5 The single point BET method -- 6 Adsorbate cross-sectional areas -- 7 Other surface area methods -- 8 Pore analysis by adsorption -- 9 Microporosity -- 10 Theory of wetting and capillarity for mercury porosimetry -- 11 Interpretation of mercury porosimetry data -- 12 Hysteresis, entrapment, and contact angle -- II Experimental -- 13 Adsorption measurements-Preliminaries -- 14 Vacuum volumetric measurements -- 15 Dynamic methods -- 16 Other flow methods -- 17 Gravimetric method -- 18 Comparison of experimental adsorption methods -- 19 Chemisorption -- 20 Mercury porosimetry -- 21 Density measurement -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 79
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400956162
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Introduction -- Joint Configurations: Lap-shear Joints, Butt Joints, Fillets. Metals and Other Constructional Materials. The Decision to Use Adhesive Bonding. The Balance of Advantages and Disadvantages -- 2. The Nature And Magnitude of Stresses In Adhesive Joints -- Introduction: Reality, Methods of Mathematical Analysis. The Single Lap Joint: Linear Elastic Analysis, Volkersen’s Analysis, The Analysis of Goland and Reissner, Effect of Bending in a Double-lap Joint, Volkersen’s Second Theory, Later Work. The Single-lap Joint — End Effects: Reduction of Stress Concentrations. The Single-lap Joint — Elasto-plastic Analysis. The Effect of Adherend Shape — Scarfed, Bevelled and Stepped Adherends. Composite Materials. Tubular Joints. Butt Joints. The Use of Joints in Design: Lap Joints, Tubular Joints, T-joints, Corner Joints, Butt Joints, Stiffeners, Doublers, Assembly -- 3. Standard Mechanical Test Procedures -- Destructive Testing: Tests with Thin Sheet Adherends, Tests for Properties of Adhesives. Nondestructive Testing: Nature of Defects, Tests Carried Out Before Bonding, Post-bonding and In-service Testing -- 4. The General Properties of Polymeric Adhesives -- Polymer Structures: Unsaturation. Mixed Adhesives. Properties and Temperature: The Glass Transition Temperature, Decomposition Temperature, Melting Temperature, The Deformation of Adhesive Polymers by Stress, Viscoelasticity, The Modulus of an Adhesive, Poisson’s Ratio, Strength Properties of Adhesive Polymers, Yielding Stresses of Polymers, Failure Modes After Yielding, Creep, Failure without Yielding — Brittle Fracture, Crazing, Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, Resistance to Deterioration -- 5. Factors Influencing The Choice of Adhesive -- Interaction with Substrate. Structural Adhesives for Metals: Check-list for Structural Metal Adhesives Used at Temperatures up to 70°C, The Advantage of Supported Filmic Adhesives (Tapes’), Unsupported Films, Liquids and Pastes, Influence of Metal of Adherend, High Temperature Metal-Metal Adhesion. Structural Adhesives for Wood: Check-list for the Use of Structural Wood Adhesives. Structural Adhesives for Mixed Constructions: Metal-Wood Structures, Metal-reinforced Plastics Structures. Choice of Adhesives for Semi-structural Use: Checklist for Adhesives for Semi-structural Use -- 6. Surface Preparation -- Metals. Wood. Concrete. Glass or Carbon-fibre Reinforced Plastics. Shot, Sand or Grit Blasting. Solvent Degreasing or Wiping. Chemical Etching: Aluminium, Ferrous Metals, Titanium, Other Metals. Priming Layers: Primers as Coupling Agents -- 7. Service Life -- The Creep of Adhesive Joints. Time-to-failure (Under Static Loading). Cycles-to-failure: Influence of Temperature, Influence of Test Frequency, Influence of Amplitude, Influence of Moisture. Effects of Temperature Change on Joint Strength. Service Life as Indicated by Climatic Exposure Trials -- 8. Applications -- Aircraft, Anchorages. Bridges. Carriages. Cars. Decking. Furniture. Glass Reinforced Plastics. Helicopters. Helicopter Blades. Hovercraft. Lamp Posts. Magnets. PABST. Rollers. Segmental Construction. Ski Constructions. Telephone Kiosks. Yachts -- References -- Appendix: Standard American and UK Specifications for -- Adhesion Tests -- Author Index.
    Abstract: The intention of this book is that it should contain everything an engineer needs to know to be able to design and produce adhesively bonded joints which are required to carry significant loads. The advan­ tages and disadvantages of bonding are given, together with a sufficient understanding of the necessary mechanics and chemistry to enable the designer to make a sound engineering judgement in any particular case. The stresses in joints are discussed extensively so that the engineer can get sufficient philosophy or feel for them, or can delve more deeply into the mathematics to obtain quantitative solutions even with elasto­ plastic behaviour. A critical description is given of standard methods of testing adhesives, both destructively and non-destructively. The essen­ tial chemistry of adhesives and the importance of surface preparation are described and guidance is given for adhesive selection by me ans of check lists. For many applications, there will not be a unique adhesive which alone is suitable, and factors such as cost, convenience, produc­ tion considerations or familiarity may be decisive. A list of applications is given as examples. The authors wish to increase the confidence of engineers using adhesive bonding in load-bearing applications by the information and experience presented. With increasing experience of adhesives en­ gineering, design will become more elegant as weH as more fitted to its products.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. IntroductionJoint Configurations: Lap-shear Joints, Butt Joints, Fillets. Metals and Other Constructional Materials. The Decision to Use Adhesive Bonding. The Balance of Advantages and Disadvantages -- 2. The Nature And Magnitude of Stresses In Adhesive Joints -- Introduction: Reality, Methods of Mathematical Analysis. The Single Lap Joint: Linear Elastic Analysis, Volkersen’s Analysis, The Analysis of Goland and Reissner, Effect of Bending in a Double-lap Joint, Volkersen’s Second Theory, Later Work. The Single-lap Joint - End Effects: Reduction of Stress Concentrations. The Single-lap Joint - Elasto-plastic Analysis. The Effect of Adherend Shape - Scarfed, Bevelled and Stepped Adherends. Composite Materials. Tubular Joints. Butt Joints. The Use of Joints in Design: Lap Joints, Tubular Joints, T-joints, Corner Joints, Butt Joints, Stiffeners, Doublers, Assembly -- 3. Standard Mechanical Test Procedures -- Destructive Testing: Tests with Thin Sheet Adherends, Tests for Properties of Adhesives. Nondestructive Testing: Nature of Defects, Tests Carried Out Before Bonding, Post-bonding and In-service Testing -- 4. The General Properties of Polymeric Adhesives -- Polymer Structures: Unsaturation. Mixed Adhesives. Properties and Temperature: The Glass Transition Temperature, Decomposition Temperature, Melting Temperature, The Deformation of Adhesive Polymers by Stress, Viscoelasticity, The Modulus of an Adhesive, Poisson’s Ratio, Strength Properties of Adhesive Polymers, Yielding Stresses of Polymers, Failure Modes After Yielding, Creep, Failure without Yielding - Brittle Fracture, Crazing, Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, Resistance to Deterioration -- 5. Factors Influencing The Choice of Adhesive -- Interaction with Substrate. Structural Adhesives for Metals: Check-list for Structural Metal Adhesives Used at Temperatures up to 70°C, The Advantage of Supported Filmic Adhesives (Tapes’), Unsupported Films, Liquids and Pastes, Influence of Metal of Adherend, High Temperature Metal-Metal Adhesion. Structural Adhesives for Wood: Check-list for the Use of Structural Wood Adhesives. Structural Adhesives for Mixed Constructions: Metal-Wood Structures, Metal-reinforced Plastics Structures. Choice of Adhesives for Semi-structural Use: Checklist for Adhesives for Semi-structural Use -- 6. Surface Preparation -- Metals. Wood. Concrete. Glass or Carbon-fibre Reinforced Plastics. Shot, Sand or Grit Blasting. Solvent Degreasing or Wiping. Chemical Etching: Aluminium, Ferrous Metals, Titanium, Other Metals. Priming Layers: Primers as Coupling Agents -- 7. Service Life -- The Creep of Adhesive Joints. Time-to-failure (Under Static Loading). Cycles-to-failure: Influence of Temperature, Influence of Test Frequency, Influence of Amplitude, Influence of Moisture. Effects of Temperature Change on Joint Strength. Service Life as Indicated by Climatic Exposure Trials -- 8. Applications -- Aircraft, Anchorages. Bridges. Carriages. Cars. Decking. Furniture. Glass Reinforced Plastics. Helicopters. Helicopter Blades. Hovercraft. Lamp Posts. Magnets. PABST. Rollers. Segmental Construction. Ski Constructions. Telephone Kiosks. Yachts -- References -- Appendix: Standard American and UK Specifications for -- Adhesion Tests -- Author Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 80
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401537209
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XI, 420 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Nuclear engineering. ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: When we first contemplated a book on this subject we were faced with a number of options: (a) to write it all ourselves, which would have had the merit of internal consistency and continuity of style; (b) to produce a collection of existing papers. which would have given us expert views in the various sub-fields of the economics of nuclear energy and would have put us in the position of knowing from the start exactly what the authors' contribu­ tions would be: (c) to commission contributions from individual specialists, chapter by chapter; or (d) some combination of these options. We settled for the last - we have written some of the material ourselves, have obtained permission to use some existing papers that seem to us to be valuable contributions to the subject, and have been fortunate in persuading a number of eminent people in their fields to produce papers especially for the book. This has given us a great deal of work and taken up more time than we planned for but we believe the result justifies this time and effort. It enabled us to design a structure for the book from the outset, recognizing that there are several aspects to the economics of nuclear energy - especially if we take a broad view of what is embraced by the word 'economics'.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 81
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400957756
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Surface activity -- 1.1 Amphipathic molecules -- 1.2 Surface activity in aqueous solution -- 1.3 Adsorption at liquid surfaces -- 1.4 Adsorption at solid surfaces -- 1.5 The wettability of solid surfaces -- 1.6 Modification of the surface properties of solids by adsorbed surfactants -- References -- 2. Phase behaviour of surfactants -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Liquid crystalline phases in binary surfactant systems -- 2.3 Liquid crystalline phases in ternary surfactant systems -- 2.4 Factors affecting phase behaviour -- 2.5 Quaternary phase systems -- References -- 3. Micellization -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Micellar structure -- 3.3 Micellar shape -- 3.4 Polydispersity of micellar size -- 3.5 Factors affecting the CMC and micellar size -- 3.6 Thermodynamics of micelle formation -- 3.7 Kinetics of micelle formation -- 3.8 Non-micellar association -- 3.9 Micelle formation in non-aqueous solvents -- References -- 4. Surface activity and colloidal properties of drugs and naturally occurring substances -- 4.1 Colloidal properties of drugs -- 4.2 Some biological consequences of drug surface activity -- 4.3 Biological relevance of micelle formation by drug molecules -- 4.4 Naturally occurring micelle formers: the bile salts, phospholipids and related systems -- References -- 5. Solubilization -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Experimental methods of studying solubilization -- 5.3 Mobility of solubilizate molecules -- 5.4 Factors influencing solubilization -- 5.5 Effect of solubilizate on micellar properties -- 5.6 Solubilization in non-aqueous solvents -- References -- 6. Pharmaceutical aspects of solubilization -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Solubilization of drugs -- 6.3 Pharmaceutical aspects of solubilization in non-aqueous systems -- 6.4 Solubilization with block co-polymeric surfactants -- 6.5 Polymer-surfactant interactions -- 6.6 Surfactant interactions with oppositely charged species -- 6.7 Hydrotropy in pharmaceutical systems -- References -- 7. Biological implications of surfactant presence in formulation -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Effect of surfactants on dissolution of drugs -- 7.3 Effect of surfactants on membrane permeability -- 7.4 Effect of surfactants on drug absorption -- 7.5 Miscellaneous formulations and the influence of surfactants -- 7.6 Surfactants and antibacterial activity -- 7.7 Utilization of solubilization in drug delivery systems -- References -- 8. Emulsions -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Aspects of emulsion stability -- 8.3 Multiple emulsions -- 8.4 Microemulsions -- 8.5 Viscosity and rheological characteristics of emulsions -- 8.6 Solute disposition in emulsion systems -- 8.7 Biopharmaceutical aspects of emulsions -- References -- 9. Surfactants in suspension systems -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Settling of suspended particles -- 9.3 Suspension stability -- 9.4 Effect of surfactants on the adsorptive capacity of suspensions -- 9.5 Rheological characteristics of suspensions -- 9.6 Crystal changes in suspensions -- 9.7 Bacterial and other cell suspensions -- References -- 10. Aspects of surfactant toxicity -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Metabolism of surfactants -- 10.3 Interactions of surfactants with membranes and membrane components -- 10.4 Toxicology of surfactants -- 10.5 Surfactants and plant systems -- References -- 11. Reactivity in surfactant systems -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Chemistry at interfaces -- 11.3 Micellar reactions -- 11.4 Stability of drugs in surfactant systems -- 11.5 Stability of surfactant systems -- 11.6 Polymerization of surface-active molecules -- 11.7 Some analytical consequences of surfactant presence -- References.
    Abstract: It is now twelve years since Solubilization by Surface-Active Agents appeared. Since the publication of that monograph the subject has expanded rapidly as the unique potential of surfactants has become known to a wider circle of scientists. In a recent review Menger (Accounts of Chemical Research, 12 (1979) 111) estimated that since 1970 there have been over 2800 publications on micelles and micellization alone. The topic of catalysis in micellar media was in an early stage of development in 1968 but the growth in this subject has given rise to an excellent textbook by Fendler and Fendler. We have felt for some time that a revision of Solubilization by Surface-Active Agents was overdue. The book has been out of print for some time. Owing to pressure of other work, Professor P. H. Elworthy and Dr C. B. Macfarlane were unable to undertake the work of revision but while working together on an undergraduate textbook the present authors decided to set to work, realizing both the impossibility of producing a comprehensive textbook and the need to alter the scope of the book. Micellar solubilization occurs over a relatively small surfactant concentration range; because of this and because the phenomenon is never observed in isolation, we have extended the text to include surface activity, emulsions and suspensions and, as our emphasis is on formulation of medicinal products, to the of the toxicology of surface-active agents.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Surface activity1.1 Amphipathic molecules -- 1.2 Surface activity in aqueous solution -- 1.3 Adsorption at liquid surfaces -- 1.4 Adsorption at solid surfaces -- 1.5 The wettability of solid surfaces -- 1.6 Modification of the surface properties of solids by adsorbed surfactants -- References -- 2. Phase behaviour of surfactants -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Liquid crystalline phases in binary surfactant systems -- 2.3 Liquid crystalline phases in ternary surfactant systems -- 2.4 Factors affecting phase behaviour -- 2.5 Quaternary phase systems -- References -- 3. Micellization -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Micellar structure -- 3.3 Micellar shape -- 3.4 Polydispersity of micellar size -- 3.5 Factors affecting the CMC and micellar size -- 3.6 Thermodynamics of micelle formation -- 3.7 Kinetics of micelle formation -- 3.8 Non-micellar association -- 3.9 Micelle formation in non-aqueous solvents -- References -- 4. Surface activity and colloidal properties of drugs and naturally occurring substances -- 4.1 Colloidal properties of drugs -- 4.2 Some biological consequences of drug surface activity -- 4.3 Biological relevance of micelle formation by drug molecules -- 4.4 Naturally occurring micelle formers: the bile salts, phospholipids and related systems -- References -- 5. Solubilization -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Experimental methods of studying solubilization -- 5.3 Mobility of solubilizate molecules -- 5.4 Factors influencing solubilization -- 5.5 Effect of solubilizate on micellar properties -- 5.6 Solubilization in non-aqueous solvents -- References -- 6. Pharmaceutical aspects of solubilization -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Solubilization of drugs -- 6.3 Pharmaceutical aspects of solubilization in non-aqueous systems -- 6.4 Solubilization with block co-polymeric surfactants -- 6.5 Polymer-surfactant interactions -- 6.6 Surfactant interactions with oppositely charged species -- 6.7 Hydrotropy in pharmaceutical systems -- References -- 7. Biological implications of surfactant presence in formulation -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Effect of surfactants on dissolution of drugs -- 7.3 Effect of surfactants on membrane permeability -- 7.4 Effect of surfactants on drug absorption -- 7.5 Miscellaneous formulations and the influence of surfactants -- 7.6 Surfactants and antibacterial activity -- 7.7 Utilization of solubilization in drug delivery systems -- References -- 8. Emulsions -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Aspects of emulsion stability -- 8.3 Multiple emulsions -- 8.4 Microemulsions -- 8.5 Viscosity and rheological characteristics of emulsions -- 8.6 Solute disposition in emulsion systems -- 8.7 Biopharmaceutical aspects of emulsions -- References -- 9. Surfactants in suspension systems -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Settling of suspended particles -- 9.3 Suspension stability -- 9.4 Effect of surfactants on the adsorptive capacity of suspensions -- 9.5 Rheological characteristics of suspensions -- 9.6 Crystal changes in suspensions -- 9.7 Bacterial and other cell suspensions -- References -- 10. Aspects of surfactant toxicity -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Metabolism of surfactants -- 10.3 Interactions of surfactants with membranes and membrane components -- 10.4 Toxicology of surfactants -- 10.5 Surfactants and plant systems -- References -- 11. Reactivity in surfactant systems -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Chemistry at interfaces -- 11.3 Micellar reactions -- 11.4 Stability of drugs in surfactant systems -- 11.5 Stability of surfactant systems -- 11.6 Polymerization of surface-active molecules -- 11.7 Some analytical consequences of surfactant presence -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 82
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401160353
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: The characteristics of living things -- The differences between animals and plants -- The cell -- Cell division -- Animal classification -- The origins and interrelationships of animals -- Animals and their environment -- Phylum Protozoa -- Amoeba: a protozoan of simple structure -- A general consideration of protozoan structure -- Euglena: a ‘plant-like’ protozoan -- Paramecium: a complex protozoan -- Monocystis and Plasmodium: parasitic Protozoa -- The classification of the Protozoa -- Protozoan diversity -- Synopsis of the Protozoa -- Phylum Porifera -- The Radiata -- Phylum Cnidaria -- Hydra: an example of a polyp -- Obelia: a representative hydrozoan -- Characteristics of the Cnidaria -- Class Scyphozoa -- A urelia: a representative scyphozoan -- Class Anthozoa -- Actinia: a representative anthozoan -- Cnidarian classification and diversity -- Synopsis of phylum Cnidaria -- Phylum Ctenophora -- The acoelomate bilateral phyla -- Phylum Platyhelminthes -- Class Turbellaria -- The planarians: examples of free-living platyhelminths -- Characteristics of the Platyhelminthes -- Class Trematoda -- Structure of a generalized trematode -- Trematode life cycles -- Order Monogenea: Polystomum -- Order Digenea: Fasciola -- Class Cestoda -- Subclass Eucestoda: Taenia -- Synopsis of phylum Platyhelminthes -- Phylum Nemertinea -- Phylum Mesozoa -- Phylum Gnathostomulida -- Animal body cavities -- The pseudocoelomate phyla -- Super phylum Aschelminthes -- Phylum Nematoda: Ascaris -- Minor pseudocoelomate phyla -- Phylum Rotifera -- Phylum Gastrotricha -- Phylum Kinorhyncha -- Phylum Nematomorpha -- Phylum Acanthocephala -- Phylum Annelida -- to the coelomate animals and metamerism -- Class Polychaeta: Nereis -- Arenicola marina -- Polychaete diversity -- Class Oligochaeta: Lumbricus terrestris -- Earthworms and the soil -- Class Hirudinea: Hirudo medicinalis -- Hirudinean diversity -- Synopsis of phylum Annelida -- Phylum Arthropode -- to the Arthropoda -- Synopsis of the phylum Arthropoda -- Subphylum Crustacea -- Astacus -- Crustacean diversity and classification -- Class Branchiopoda -- Class Ostracoda -- Class Copepoda -- Class Cirripedia -- Classes Mystacocarida and Branchiura -- Class Malacostraca -- Synopsis of the subphylum Crustacea -- Successful land arthropods -- Subphylum Uniramia -- Class Insecta -- Locusta: the locust -- Periplaneta: the cockroach -- Metamorphosis -- Insect diversity -- Insect social organization -- Synopsis of the main insect orders -- The myriapodous arthropoda -- Class Chilopoda: the centipedes -- Class Diplopoda: the millipedes -- Class Symphyla -- Class Pauropoda -- The chelicerate arthropods -- Class Merostomata: Limulus -- Class Arachnida: Araneus -- Arachnid diversity -- Class Pycnogonida -- Synopsis of subphylum Chelicerata -- Primitive arthropods -- Subphylum Trilobitomorpha -- Phylum Onychophora: Peripatus -- Phylum Mollusca -- The molluscan plan: a hypothetical ancestor -- Molluscan larvae -- Primitive living molluscs: Class Monoplacophora: Neopilina -- Class Polyplacophora -- The major mollusc classes -- Class Gastropoda: Helix -- Gastropod diversity -- Subclass Prosobranchia -- Subclass Opisthobranchia -- Subclass Pulmonata -- Synopsis of class Gastropoda -- Class Bivalvia: Mythus edulis -- Bivalve diversity -- Subclass Protobranchia -- Subclass Lamellibranchia -- Subclass Septibranchia -- Freshwater bivalves -- Synopsis of class Bivalvia -- Two minor mollusc classes -- Class Scaphopoda -- Class Aplacophora -- Class Cephalopoda: Sepia -- Cephalopod diversity -- Synopsis of class Cephalopoda -- Early embryonic development: the protostomes and deuterostomes -- The minor coelomate phyla -- to the minor coelomate phyla -- The minor protostome coelomates -- Phylum Priapuloidea -- Phylum Sipunculoidea -- Phylum Echiuroidea -- Phylum Pogonophora -- Phylum Tardigrada -- Phylum Pentastomida -- The lophophorate phyla -- Phylum Bryozoa (also known as Ectoprocta or Polyzoa) -- Bryozoan diversity -- Phylum Brachiopoda -- Phylum Entoprocta -- Phylum Phoronida -- The invertebrate deuterostomes -- Phylum Echinodermata -- Class Asteroidea: Asterias -- Echinoderm diversity -- Class Ophiuroidea: Ophiothrix -- Class Echinoidea: Echinus -- The minor echinoderm classes -- Class Holothuroidea -- Class Crinoidea -- Echinoderm relationships -- Synopsis of the Echinodermata -- The minor deuterostome phyla -- Phylum Chaetognatha -- Phylum Hemichordata -- Class Enteropneusta -- Class Pterobranchia -- Phylum Chordata -- to the phylum Chordata -- Subphylum Urochordata: Ciona -- Urochordate diversity -- Class Ascidiacea -- Class Thaliacea -- Class Larvacea -- Synopsis of subphylum Urochordata -- Subphylum Cephalochordata: Branchiostoma -- Synopsis of the phylum Chordata -- to the subphylum Vertebrata -- Animal body tissues -- Epithelial tissue -- Connective tissues -- Skeletal connective tissue -- Muscular tissue -- Nervous tissue -- Vertebrate organ systems -- The integumentary system -- The skeleto-muscular system -- The digestive system -- The respiratory system -- The circulatory system -- The urinogenital system -- The nervous system -- The endocrine system -- The early development of chordates -- The development of amphioxus -- Vertebrate development -- The development of the frog -- Amniote development -- The development of mammals -- Summary of chordate embryology -- Summary of the fate of the primary germ layers -- Vertebrate diversity -- Class Agnatha -- Lampetra -- Agnathan diversity -- The living Agnatha -- Fossil agnathans: the ostracoderms -- Synopsis of the class Agnatha -- to the gnathostomes -- Class Elasmobranchiomorphii -- Subclass Chondrichthyes: Scyliorhinus -- Chondrichthyan diversity -- Living forms -- Fossil elasmobranchs -- Synopsis of Class Elasmobranchiomorphii -- Class Teleostomi (Osteichthyes) -- Salmo -- Telestome diversity -- The Actinopterygii -- Subclass Sarcopterygii -- Synopsis of the class Teleostomi -- to the tetrapods: the pentadactyl limb -- Class Amphibia -- Rana -- Amphibian diversity -- Order Urodela -- Order Anura -- Order Apoda -- The fossil Amphibia: Subclasses Labyrinthodontia and Lepospondyli -- Synopsis of the class Amphibia -- to the amniotes -- Class Reptilia -- Lacerta -- Reptile diversity -- Living reptiles -- Fossil reptiles -- Synopsis of the class Reptilia -- Class Aves -- Columba -- Bird diversity -- Synopsis of the class Aves -- Class Mammalia -- Rattus -- Mammalian diversity -- Subclass Prototheria (the monotremes) -- Subclass Theria -- Infraclass Metatheria: the marsupials -- Infraclass Eutheria -- Order Insectivora -- Order Chiroptera -- The carnivorous mammals -- The small herbivorous mammals -- The large herbivores -- The subungulates -- Some minor mammalian orders -- Order Primates -- Synopsis of the class Mammalia.
    Abstract: This book has been written with two main purposes in mind, page. At the same time animals show immense variation the first being to give a general review of the entire animal and none is truly typical. Some idea of the immense variety kingdom, and the second to give more detailed functional of animals is given in the diversity sections, with a synopsis accounts of the anatomy of a representative of each major of the classification of each major phylum. animal group. It is intended to be used by those who are Zoology has a language of its own, which appears highly interested in animals and does not start with the assumption complicated but in most cases can, in fact, be derived simply of any great zoological knowledge. It is hoped that it will from either Latin or Greek. Translations and derivations prove particularly helpful to those studying biology or have been given of a selection of zoological terms; these zoology at 'A' level, or in the early stages of a university should be regarded as examples. The interested zoologist course. may find the use of a Greek and Latin dictionary rewarding.
    Description / Table of Contents: The characteristics of living thingsThe differences between animals and plants -- The cell -- Cell division -- Animal classification -- The origins and interrelationships of animals -- Animals and their environment -- Phylum Protozoa -- Amoeba: a protozoan of simple structure -- A general consideration of protozoan structure -- Euglena: a ‘plant-like’ protozoan -- Paramecium: a complex protozoan -- Monocystis and Plasmodium: parasitic Protozoa -- The classification of the Protozoa -- Protozoan diversity -- Synopsis of the Protozoa -- Phylum Porifera -- The Radiata -- Phylum Cnidaria -- Hydra: an example of a polyp -- Obelia: a representative hydrozoan -- Characteristics of the Cnidaria -- Class Scyphozoa -- A urelia: a representative scyphozoan -- Class Anthozoa -- Actinia: a representative anthozoan -- Cnidarian classification and diversity -- Synopsis of phylum Cnidaria -- Phylum Ctenophora -- The acoelomate bilateral phyla -- Phylum Platyhelminthes -- Class Turbellaria -- The planarians: examples of free-living platyhelminths -- Characteristics of the Platyhelminthes -- Class Trematoda -- Structure of a generalized trematode -- Trematode life cycles -- Order Monogenea: Polystomum -- Order Digenea: Fasciola -- Class Cestoda -- Subclass Eucestoda: Taenia -- Synopsis of phylum Platyhelminthes -- Phylum Nemertinea -- Phylum Mesozoa -- Phylum Gnathostomulida -- Animal body cavities -- The pseudocoelomate phyla -- Super phylum Aschelminthes -- Phylum Nematoda: Ascaris -- Minor pseudocoelomate phyla -- Phylum Rotifera -- Phylum Gastrotricha -- Phylum Kinorhyncha -- Phylum Nematomorpha -- Phylum Acanthocephala -- Phylum Annelida -- to the coelomate animals and metamerism -- Class Polychaeta: Nereis -- Arenicola marina -- Polychaete diversity -- Class Oligochaeta: Lumbricus terrestris -- Earthworms and the soil -- Class Hirudinea: Hirudo medicinalis -- Hirudinean diversity -- Synopsis of phylum Annelida -- Phylum Arthropode -- to the Arthropoda -- Synopsis of the phylum Arthropoda -- Subphylum Crustacea -- Astacus -- Crustacean diversity and classification -- Class Branchiopoda -- Class Ostracoda -- Class Copepoda -- Class Cirripedia -- Classes Mystacocarida and Branchiura -- Class Malacostraca -- Synopsis of the subphylum Crustacea -- Successful land arthropods -- Subphylum Uniramia -- Class Insecta -- Locusta: the locust -- Periplaneta: the cockroach -- Metamorphosis -- Insect diversity -- Insect social organization -- Synopsis of the main insect orders -- The myriapodous arthropoda -- Class Chilopoda: the centipedes -- Class Diplopoda: the millipedes -- Class Symphyla -- Class Pauropoda -- The chelicerate arthropods -- Class Merostomata: Limulus -- Class Arachnida: Araneus -- Arachnid diversity -- Class Pycnogonida -- Synopsis of subphylum Chelicerata -- Primitive arthropods -- Subphylum Trilobitomorpha -- Phylum Onychophora: Peripatus -- Phylum Mollusca -- The molluscan plan: a hypothetical ancestor -- Molluscan larvae -- Primitive living molluscs: Class Monoplacophora: Neopilina -- Class Polyplacophora -- The major mollusc classes -- Class Gastropoda: Helix -- Gastropod diversity -- Subclass Prosobranchia -- Subclass Opisthobranchia -- Subclass Pulmonata -- Synopsis of class Gastropoda -- Class Bivalvia: Mythus edulis -- Bivalve diversity -- Subclass Protobranchia -- Subclass Lamellibranchia -- Subclass Septibranchia -- Freshwater bivalves -- Synopsis of class Bivalvia -- Two minor mollusc classes -- Class Scaphopoda -- Class Aplacophora -- Class Cephalopoda: Sepia -- Cephalopod diversity -- Synopsis of class Cephalopoda -- Early embryonic development: the protostomes and deuterostomes -- The minor coelomate phyla -- to the minor coelomate phyla -- The minor protostome coelomates -- Phylum Priapuloidea -- Phylum Sipunculoidea -- Phylum Echiuroidea -- Phylum Pogonophora -- Phylum Tardigrada -- Phylum Pentastomida -- The lophophorate phyla -- Phylum Bryozoa (also known as Ectoprocta or Polyzoa) -- Bryozoan diversity -- Phylum Brachiopoda -- Phylum Entoprocta -- Phylum Phoronida -- The invertebrate deuterostomes -- Phylum Echinodermata -- Class Asteroidea: Asterias -- Echinoderm diversity -- Class Ophiuroidea: Ophiothrix -- Class Echinoidea: Echinus -- The minor echinoderm classes -- Class Holothuroidea -- Class Crinoidea -- Echinoderm relationships -- Synopsis of the Echinodermata -- The minor deuterostome phyla -- Phylum Chaetognatha -- Phylum Hemichordata -- Class Enteropneusta -- Class Pterobranchia -- Phylum Chordata -- to the phylum Chordata -- Subphylum Urochordata: Ciona -- Urochordate diversity -- Class Ascidiacea -- Class Thaliacea -- Class Larvacea -- Synopsis of subphylum Urochordata -- Subphylum Cephalochordata: Branchiostoma -- Synopsis of the phylum Chordata -- to the subphylum Vertebrata -- Animal body tissues -- Epithelial tissue -- Connective tissues -- Skeletal connective tissue -- Muscular tissue -- Nervous tissue -- Vertebrate organ systems -- The integumentary system -- The skeleto-muscular system -- The digestive system -- The respiratory system -- The circulatory system -- The urinogenital system -- The nervous system -- The endocrine system -- The early development of chordates -- The development of amphioxus -- Vertebrate development -- The development of the frog -- Amniote development -- The development of mammals -- Summary of chordate embryology -- Summary of the fate of the primary germ layers -- Vertebrate diversity -- Class Agnatha -- Lampetra -- Agnathan diversity -- The living Agnatha -- Fossil agnathans: the ostracoderms -- Synopsis of the class Agnatha -- to the gnathostomes -- Class Elasmobranchiomorphii -- Subclass Chondrichthyes: Scyliorhinus -- Chondrichthyan diversity -- Living forms -- Fossil elasmobranchs -- Synopsis of Class Elasmobranchiomorphii -- Class Teleostomi (Osteichthyes) -- Salmo -- Telestome diversity -- The Actinopterygii -- Subclass Sarcopterygii -- Synopsis of the class Teleostomi -- to the tetrapods: the pentadactyl limb -- Class Amphibia -- Rana -- Amphibian diversity -- Order Urodela -- Order Anura -- Order Apoda -- The fossil Amphibia: Subclasses Labyrinthodontia and Lepospondyli -- Synopsis of the class Amphibia -- to the amniotes -- Class Reptilia -- Lacerta -- Reptile diversity -- Living reptiles -- Fossil reptiles -- Synopsis of the class Reptilia -- Class Aves -- Columba -- Bird diversity -- Synopsis of the class Aves -- Class Mammalia -- Rattus -- Mammalian diversity -- Subclass Prototheria (the monotremes) -- Subclass Theria -- Infraclass Metatheria: the marsupials -- Infraclass Eutheria -- Order Insectivora -- Order Chiroptera -- The carnivorous mammals -- The small herbivorous mammals -- The large herbivores -- The subungulates -- Some minor mammalian orders -- Order Primates -- Synopsis of the class Mammalia.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 83
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400966314
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The Concept of Machinability -- 1.1. Introduction -- 1.2. Definition of Machinability -- 2 Fundamental Aspects of the Machining Process -- 2.1. Mechanics of Metal Cutting -- 2.2. Tool Wear -- 2.3. Surface Finish -- 2.4. Chip Formers -- 2.5. The Action of Cutting Fluids -- References -- 3 The Assessment of Machinability -- 3.1. Types of Machinability Test -- 3.2. Short Machinability Tests -- 3.3. Non-Machining Tests -- 3.4. Machining Tests -- 3.5. Combination of Machining Parameters -- 3.6. Machinability Assessment for Processes Other than Single Point Turning -- 3.7. Machinability Assessment Relating One Process to Another -- 3.8. On-Line Assessment of Tool Wear -- References -- 4 Tool Materials -- 4.1. Historical Background -- 4.2. Requirements of Tool Materials -- 4.3. High-Speed Steels -- 4.4. Cemented Carbides -- 4.5. Cast Cobalt Alloys -- 4.6. Ceramic Cutting Tool Materials -- 4.7. Diamond -- References -- 5 Workpiece Materials -- 5.1. Introduction -- 5.2. Ferrous Materials -- 5.3. Titanium Alloys -- 5.4. Nickel-Based Alloys -- 5.5. Aluminium Alloys -- 5.6. Magnesium and its Alloys -- 5.7. Copper and its Alloys -- References -- 6 The ISO Machinability Test -- 6.1. Introduction -- 6.2. Reference Work pieces -- 6.3. Reference Tool Materials and Tool Geometries -- 6.4. Reference Cutting Fluids -- 6.5. Cutting Conditions -- 6.6. Tool Life Criteria and Tool Wear Measurements -- 6.7. Tool Wear Measurement -- 6.8. Equipment -- 6.9. Tool Life Test Procedure -- 6.10. Evaluation of Tool Life Data -- 7 The Effect of Machinability Data on Metal Removal Performance and Economics -- 7.1. Introduction -- 7.2. Criteria of Performance -- 7.3. Economics of Turning Operations -- 7.4. Machining for Minimum Cost -- 7.5. Machining for Maximum Production -- 7.6. Machining for Maximum Profit -- 7.7. Machinability Data Applied to Milling -- 7.8. Reliability of Machinability Data -- Reference -- Appendix 1 Analysis to Determine Cutting Temperatures in Single Point Metal Cutting -- Appendix 2 Analyses for Two Short Absolute Machinability Tests -- A2.1 The Variable-Rate Machining Test -- A2.2 The Step Turning Test.
    Abstract: In the manufacturing industries, despite the development and improvement of metal forming processes, a great deal of reliance is still placed on metal cutting processes and this will continue into the foreseeable future. Thus, there will continue to be a requirement for the development of improved cutting tool materials, workpiece materials, cutting fluids and testing methods; collectively this activity can be described as improving machinability. Machinability is a parameter which in many ways is vague, sometimes qualitative and very often misunderstood. The purpose of this text is to give a broad understanding of the concept, methods of assessment and ways of improving machinability to the manufacturing engineer, the metallurgist and the materials scientist. The text should also be of interest to those engaged in research in manufacturing engineering and metal cutting. The text, of necessity, does not attempt to give detailed information about the machining characteristics of a wide range of tool and workpiece materials. It is felt that this is beyond the scope of the book and is best left to other sources, such as machinability data banks and the Machining Handbook*, whose main objective is to present this kind of information. It is hoped that the reader will be able to progress logically from the fundamental aspects of the metal cutting process to the sections on the more specific topics of machinability including machinability testing and the properties of tool and workpiece materials which affect their machining performance.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The Concept of Machinability1.1. Introduction -- 1.2. Definition of Machinability -- 2 Fundamental Aspects of the Machining Process -- 2.1. Mechanics of Metal Cutting -- 2.2. Tool Wear -- 2.3. Surface Finish -- 2.4. Chip Formers -- 2.5. The Action of Cutting Fluids -- References -- 3 The Assessment of Machinability -- 3.1. Types of Machinability Test -- 3.2. Short Machinability Tests -- 3.3. Non-Machining Tests -- 3.4. Machining Tests -- 3.5. Combination of Machining Parameters -- 3.6. Machinability Assessment for Processes Other than Single Point Turning -- 3.7. Machinability Assessment Relating One Process to Another -- 3.8. On-Line Assessment of Tool Wear -- References -- 4 Tool Materials -- 4.1. Historical Background -- 4.2. Requirements of Tool Materials -- 4.3. High-Speed Steels -- 4.4. Cemented Carbides -- 4.5. Cast Cobalt Alloys -- 4.6. Ceramic Cutting Tool Materials -- 4.7. Diamond -- References -- 5 Workpiece Materials -- 5.1. Introduction -- 5.2. Ferrous Materials -- 5.3. Titanium Alloys -- 5.4. Nickel-Based Alloys -- 5.5. Aluminium Alloys -- 5.6. Magnesium and its Alloys -- 5.7. Copper and its Alloys -- References -- 6 The ISO Machinability Test -- 6.1. Introduction -- 6.2. Reference Work pieces -- 6.3. Reference Tool Materials and Tool Geometries -- 6.4. Reference Cutting Fluids -- 6.5. Cutting Conditions -- 6.6. Tool Life Criteria and Tool Wear Measurements -- 6.7. Tool Wear Measurement -- 6.8. Equipment -- 6.9. Tool Life Test Procedure -- 6.10. Evaluation of Tool Life Data -- 7 The Effect of Machinability Data on Metal Removal Performance and Economics -- 7.1. Introduction -- 7.2. Criteria of Performance -- 7.3. Economics of Turning Operations -- 7.4. Machining for Minimum Cost -- 7.5. Machining for Maximum Production -- 7.6. Machining for Maximum Profit -- 7.7. Machinability Data Applied to Milling -- 7.8. Reliability of Machinability Data -- Reference -- Appendix 1 Analysis to Determine Cutting Temperatures in Single Point Metal Cutting -- Appendix 2 Analyses for Two Short Absolute Machinability Tests -- A2.1 The Variable-Rate Machining Test -- A2.2 The Step Turning Test.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 84
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400959781
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Engineering Description of Rocks -- 1.1 Rock testing -- 1.2 Uniaxial or unconfined strength -- 1.3 Empirical field and laboratory tests -- 1.4 Porosity and permeability -- 1.5 Discontinuous rock -- 2 Stress and Strain -- 2.1 Stress at a point -- 2.2 Pore pressure and effective stress -- 2.3 Strain at a point -- 2.4 Representation of stress and strain -- 2.5 Relation between stress and strain -- 2.6 Geostatic stresses -- 2.7 Measurement of in situ stress -- 3 Rock Deformation -- 3.1 Rock tests in compression -- 3.2 Rock deformation in compression -- 3.3 Mechanics of microfracture -- 3.4 Rock macrofracture -- 3.5 The complete rock deformation curve -- 4 Rock Strength and Yield -- 4.1 Rock strength criteria -- 4.2 Yield criteria -- 4.3 The critical state concept -- 4.4 Triaxial testing -- 4.5 Axial and volumetric strain data -- 4.6 The Hvorslev surface in rocks -- 5 Time Dependency -- 5.1 Creep strain -- 5.2 Phenomenological models of creep -- 5.3 Time-dependent deformation -- 5.4 Time-dependent strength reduction -- 5.5 Cyclic loading -- 5.6 Rapid loading -- 6 Discontinuities in Rock Masses -- 6.1 Discontinuity measurement -- 6.2 Discontinuity orientation data -- 6.3 Shear resistance of a rock containing a discontinuity -- 6.4 Shear resistance of a discontinuity -- 6.5 A critical state model for rock discontinuity strength -- 6.6 Measurement of discontinuity shear resistance -- 7 Behaviour of Rock Masses -- 7.1 Discontinuity frequency -- 7.2 Rock mass classification systems -- 7.3 Rock mass strength criterion -- 7.4 The relevance of rock mass strength -- References -- Author Index.
    Abstract: The first edition of this book was received more kindly than it deserved by some, and with some scepticism by others. It set out to present a simple, concise and reasonably comprehensive introduction to some of the theoretical and empirical criteria which may be used to define rock as a structural material. The objectives - reinforced by the change in title - remain the same, but the approach has been changed considerably and only one or two sections have been retained from the first edition. The particular aim in this edition is to provide a description of the mechanical behaviour of rocks, based firmly upon experimental data, which can be used to explain how rocks deform, fracture and yield, and to show how this knowledge can be used in design. The major emphasis is on the behaviour of rocks as materials, although in the later chapters the behaviour of discontinuities in rocks, and the way in of rock masses, is considered. which this can affect the behaviour If this edition is an improvement on the first edition it reflects the debt lowe to numerous people who have attempted to explain the rudiments of the subject to me. I should like to thank Peter Attewell and Roy Scott in particular. I should also like to thank Tony Price and Mike Gilbert whose work at Newcastle I have used shamelessly.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Engineering Description of Rocks1.1 Rock testing -- 1.2 Uniaxial or unconfined strength -- 1.3 Empirical field and laboratory tests -- 1.4 Porosity and permeability -- 1.5 Discontinuous rock -- 2 Stress and Strain -- 2.1 Stress at a point -- 2.2 Pore pressure and effective stress -- 2.3 Strain at a point -- 2.4 Representation of stress and strain -- 2.5 Relation between stress and strain -- 2.6 Geostatic stresses -- 2.7 Measurement of in situ stress -- 3 Rock Deformation -- 3.1 Rock tests in compression -- 3.2 Rock deformation in compression -- 3.3 Mechanics of microfracture -- 3.4 Rock macrofracture -- 3.5 The complete rock deformation curve -- 4 Rock Strength and Yield -- 4.1 Rock strength criteria -- 4.2 Yield criteria -- 4.3 The critical state concept -- 4.4 Triaxial testing -- 4.5 Axial and volumetric strain data -- 4.6 The Hvorslev surface in rocks -- 5 Time Dependency -- 5.1 Creep strain -- 5.2 Phenomenological models of creep -- 5.3 Time-dependent deformation -- 5.4 Time-dependent strength reduction -- 5.5 Cyclic loading -- 5.6 Rapid loading -- 6 Discontinuities in Rock Masses -- 6.1 Discontinuity measurement -- 6.2 Discontinuity orientation data -- 6.3 Shear resistance of a rock containing a discontinuity -- 6.4 Shear resistance of a discontinuity -- 6.5 A critical state model for rock discontinuity strength -- 6.6 Measurement of discontinuity shear resistance -- 7 Behaviour of Rock Masses -- 7.1 Discontinuity frequency -- 7.2 Rock mass classification systems -- 7.3 Rock mass strength criterion -- 7.4 The relevance of rock mass strength -- References -- Author Index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 85
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401092319
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. The Composition and Structure of Milk Lipids -- 2. Influence of Nutritional Factors on the Yield, Composition and Physical Properties of Milk Fat -- 3. Origin of Milk Fat Globules and the Nature of the Milk Fat Globule Membrane -- 4. Physical Chemistry of Milk Fat Globules -- 5. Physical Properties and Modification of Milk Fat -- 6. Lipolytic Enzymes and Hydrolytic Rancidity in Milk and Milk Products -- 7. Lipid Oxidation -- 8. The Nutritional Significance of Lipids.
    Abstract: Many of the desirable flavour and textural attributes of dairy products are due to their lipid components; consequently, milk lipids have, tradi­ tionally, been highly valued, in fact to the exclusion of other milk components in many cases. Today, milk is a major source of dietary lipids in western diets and although consumption of milk fat in the form of butter has declined in some countries, this has been offset in many cases by increasing consumption of cheese and fermented liquid dairy products. This text on milk lipids is the second in a series entitled Developments in Dairy Chemistry, the first being devoted to milk proteins. The series is produced as a co-ordinated treatise on dairy chemistry with the objective of providing an authoritative reference source for lecturers, researchers and advanced students. The biosynthesis, chemical, physical and nutritional properties of milk lipids have been reviewed in eight chapters by world experts. However, space does not permit consideration of the more product-related aspects of milk lipids which play major functional roles in several dairy products, especially cheese, dehydrated milks and butter.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. The Composition and Structure of Milk Lipids2. Influence of Nutritional Factors on the Yield, Composition and Physical Properties of Milk Fat -- 3. Origin of Milk Fat Globules and the Nature of the Milk Fat Globule Membrane -- 4. Physical Chemistry of Milk Fat Globules -- 5. Physical Properties and Modification of Milk Fat -- 6. Lipolytic Enzymes and Hydrolytic Rancidity in Milk and Milk Products -- 7. Lipid Oxidation -- 8. The Nutritional Significance of Lipids.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 86
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401160018
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Earth structures and air photo interpretation -- 1.1 Earth materials: soils and rock -- 1.2 Basic information sources -- 1.3 Air photo interpretation -- 1.4 Rock landforms -- 1.5 Glacial landforms -- 1.6 Lacustrine, marine and alluvial landforms -- 1.7 Eolian and residual landforms -- 1.8 Uses of air photos in earth structures engineering -- 1.9 Other remote sensing and probing techniques -- 1.10 Problems on air photo interpretation -- 2 Earth mechanics in earth structures engineering -- 2.1 Strength and deformation of earth materials -- 2.2 Ground water and earth structures -- 2.3 Settlement of earth structures -- 3 Embankments and tunnels -- 3.1 Embankments on soft ground -- 3.2 Soft-ground tunneling -- 3.3 Problems on bearing capacity and tunnels -- 4 Slope stability -- 4.1 Types of slope movements -- 4.2 Slope stability analyses -- 4.3 Design charts for slopes in homogeneous materials -- 4.4 Crest loadings, dynamic loadings, submergence and drawdown -- 4.5 Recommended design factors of safety and procedures -- 4.6 Construction considerations and remedial measures -- 4.7 Permanent retaining walls -- 4.8 Problems on slope stability -- 5 Earth dams -- 5.1 Types of earth dams -- 5.2 Dam design considerations -- 5.3 Foundation treatments and efficiencies -- 5.4 Dam settlements and distortion -- 5.5 Earthquake and rapid drawdown design -- 5.6 Some special considerations in construction of earth dams -- 5.7 Monitoring, performance and maintenance of earth dams -- 5.8 Mine-tailings dams and process-water impoundments -- 5.9 Problems on earth dams -- 6 Ground subsidence and mine backfill -- 6.1 Ground control using backfill -- 6.2 Cemented tailings backfill design -- 6.3 Use of uncemented tailings backfill -- 6.4 Subsidence and surface effects -- 6.5 Problems on mine backfill and subsidence -- Appendix: units and symbols -- References -- Answers to problems.
    Abstract: Earth structures engineering involves the analysis, design and construction of structures, such as slopes and dams, that are composed mainly of earth materials, and this is a growth area in geotechnical engineering practice. This growth is due largely to increased involvement in designing various types of earth structures for the resources industries (slopes, impoundment structures, offshore islands, mine backfills), to the development of increas­ ingly large hydroelectric projects, to the need for more freshwater storage and diversion schemes, and to the need for transportation, communications and other facilities in areas where the natural earth materials are occasionally subject to mass instabilities. Although geotechnical engineering transects traditional disciplinary boundaries of civil, geological and mining engineering, the majority of geotechnical engineers are graduates from civil engineering schools. Here the geotechnical instruction has been concentrated on soil mechanics and foundation engineering because foundation engineering has traditionally been the major component of geotechnical practice. Geotechnical special­ ists, however, generally have acquired considerable formal or informal training beyond their first engineering degree, and an advanced degree with considerable cross-discipline course content is still considered an advantage for a young engineer entering a career in geotechnical engineering. Practical job experience is, of course, a necessary part of professional development but is readily interpreted and assimilated only if the required background training has been obtained.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Earth structures and air photo interpretation1.1 Earth materials: soils and rock -- 1.2 Basic information sources -- 1.3 Air photo interpretation -- 1.4 Rock landforms -- 1.5 Glacial landforms -- 1.6 Lacustrine, marine and alluvial landforms -- 1.7 Eolian and residual landforms -- 1.8 Uses of air photos in earth structures engineering -- 1.9 Other remote sensing and probing techniques -- 1.10 Problems on air photo interpretation -- 2 Earth mechanics in earth structures engineering -- 2.1 Strength and deformation of earth materials -- 2.2 Ground water and earth structures -- 2.3 Settlement of earth structures -- 3 Embankments and tunnels -- 3.1 Embankments on soft ground -- 3.2 Soft-ground tunneling -- 3.3 Problems on bearing capacity and tunnels -- 4 Slope stability -- 4.1 Types of slope movements -- 4.2 Slope stability analyses -- 4.3 Design charts for slopes in homogeneous materials -- 4.4 Crest loadings, dynamic loadings, submergence and drawdown -- 4.5 Recommended design factors of safety and procedures -- 4.6 Construction considerations and remedial measures -- 4.7 Permanent retaining walls -- 4.8 Problems on slope stability -- 5 Earth dams -- 5.1 Types of earth dams -- 5.2 Dam design considerations -- 5.3 Foundation treatments and efficiencies -- 5.4 Dam settlements and distortion -- 5.5 Earthquake and rapid drawdown design -- 5.6 Some special considerations in construction of earth dams -- 5.7 Monitoring, performance and maintenance of earth dams -- 5.8 Mine-tailings dams and process-water impoundments -- 5.9 Problems on earth dams -- 6 Ground subsidence and mine backfill -- 6.1 Ground control using backfill -- 6.2 Cemented tailings backfill design -- 6.3 Use of uncemented tailings backfill -- 6.4 Subsidence and surface effects -- 6.5 Problems on mine backfill and subsidence -- Appendix: units and symbols -- References -- Answers to problems.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 87
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401160322
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Mammalian Thermogenesis: An Introduction -- 2 Cellular Mechanisms of Heat Dissipation -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 The thermodynamics of heat dissipation -- 2.3 Extra-mitochondrial ATP-hydrolysing mechanisms: general considerations -- 2.4 The status of ATP-hydrolysing mechanisms in brown fat -- 2.5 Mitochondrial dissipatory mechanisms: general considerations -- 2.6 The proton short-circuit of brown-fat mitochondria -- 2.7 The molecular basis for the adaptive cold- and diet-induced increase in brown-fat thermogenic capacity -- 2.8 The acute regulation of the proton short-circuit in brown-fat mitochondria -- 2.9 Conclusions -- References -- 3 Brown Fat: An Energy Dissipating Tissue -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 The survival value of an energy dissipator -- 3.3 Anatomy -- 3.4 The capacity for heat production -- 3.5 Evidence for a concerted regulation between substrate supply and respiration rate -- 3.6 Tissue blood flow -- 3.7 The adaptive response to cold exposure -- 3.8 The acute thermogenic response -- 3.9 Alpha- and beta-adrenergic mediated membrane potential changes and metabolism -- 3.10 Sodium pump and thermogenesis -- 3.11 Control of brown-fat thermogenesis -- References -- 4 Autonomic Regulation of Thermogenesis -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Cold exposure -- 4.3 Diet -- 4.4 Summary and conclusions -- References -- 5 Thyroid Hormones and Thermogenesis -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Role of thyroid hormones in thermogenesis -- 5.3 Summary -- References -- 6 Energetics of Maintenance and Growth -- 6.1 Measurement of energy exchange -- 6.2 The energy cost of maintenance and fattening -- 6.3 Food intake and heat production -- 6.4 Eating and rumination -- 6.5 Efficiency of utilization of absorbed nutrients -- 6.6 Regulatory dietary-induced thermogenesis -- 6.7 Body size and heat production -- 6.8 The energetics of growth -- 6.9 Conclusions -- References -- 7 Diet-Induced Thermogenesis -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Force-feeding and diet-induced thermogenesis -- 7.3 Voluntary hyperphagia and diet-induced thermogenesis -- 7.4 Mechanism of diet-induced thermogenesis -- 7.5 Other factors affecting diet-induced thermogenesis -- 7.6 Reduced thermogenesis -- 7.7 Summary -- References -- 8 Thermogenesis and Obesity -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Energy balance in genetically obese rodents -- 8.3 Mechanisms of heat production -- 8.4 Thermogenesis in man -- 8.5 Concluding comments -- References -- 9 Hypermetabolism in Trauma -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Afferent mediators of metabolic alterations -- 9.3 Neuroendocrine responses -- 9.4 Metabolic responses -- 9.5 Cardiovascular responses -- 9.6 Thermoregulatory response -- 9.7 Treatment -- 9.8 Summary -- References -- 10 Thermogenesis and Fever -- 10.1 Temperature regulation as a reflex -- 10.2 The biology of fever -- 10.3 The biology of malignant hyperthermia -- References -- 11 Pharmacology of Thermogenesis -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Central control of thermogenesis -- 11.3 Neural control of shivering and non-shivering thermogenesis -- 11.4 Receptors mediating thermogenic responses in brown adipose tissue -- 11.5 Intracellular mediators of the acute, subacute and chronic effects of sympathetic stimulation -- 11.6 Impact of various pharmacological agents on thermogenesis -- 11.7 Hormonal control of thermogenesis -- 11.8 A rationale for selecting thermogenic agents -- References.
    Abstract: an attempt to rationalize these terminological and conceptual difficulties we have considered the origins of mammalian heat production from two different points of view. The scheme depicted in Fig. 1. 1 illustrates the fate of energy in the body as seen by the nutritionist. After allowing for losses of energy in faeces and urine, the metabolizable energy obtained from food is utilized for main­ taining and increasing body energy content (maintenance, external work, growth and production). The transformation of metabolizable energy into these forms of net energy also involves inevitable energy losses in the form of heat - thermic energy. Similarly, maintaining homeothermy in cold en­ vironments involves shivering and non-shivering thermogenesis (NST) and the energy costs of assimilating nutrients and retaining net energy results in obligatory heat losses due to diet-induced thermogenesis (DIT). This obligatory DIT is mainly due to the energy cost of protein and fat synthesis but, in addition to this, there is an adaptive component of DIT that helps maintain body energy content (i. e. body weight) by dissipating the metabolizable energy consumed in excess of the requirements for maintenance, growth and production. In Fig. 1. 2, we have converted this nutritionist's scheme (A) into one that A B r-------. . . , I I Production, Growth I I External work I I I I Essential energy expenditure NET BASAL Obligatory 1 I ENERGY Maintenance HEAT heat I FASTING at (BMR) productlpn for t ROC thermoneutrallty homeothermia r.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Mammalian Thermogenesis: An Introduction2 Cellular Mechanisms of Heat Dissipation -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 The thermodynamics of heat dissipation -- 2.3 Extra-mitochondrial ATP-hydrolysing mechanisms: general considerations -- 2.4 The status of ATP-hydrolysing mechanisms in brown fat -- 2.5 Mitochondrial dissipatory mechanisms: general considerations -- 2.6 The proton short-circuit of brown-fat mitochondria -- 2.7 The molecular basis for the adaptive cold- and diet-induced increase in brown-fat thermogenic capacity -- 2.8 The acute regulation of the proton short-circuit in brown-fat mitochondria -- 2.9 Conclusions -- References -- 3 Brown Fat: An Energy Dissipating Tissue -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 The survival value of an energy dissipator -- 3.3 Anatomy -- 3.4 The capacity for heat production -- 3.5 Evidence for a concerted regulation between substrate supply and respiration rate -- 3.6 Tissue blood flow -- 3.7 The adaptive response to cold exposure -- 3.8 The acute thermogenic response -- 3.9 Alpha- and beta-adrenergic mediated membrane potential changes and metabolism -- 3.10 Sodium pump and thermogenesis -- 3.11 Control of brown-fat thermogenesis -- References -- 4 Autonomic Regulation of Thermogenesis -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Cold exposure -- 4.3 Diet -- 4.4 Summary and conclusions -- References -- 5 Thyroid Hormones and Thermogenesis -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Role of thyroid hormones in thermogenesis -- 5.3 Summary -- References -- 6 Energetics of Maintenance and Growth -- 6.1 Measurement of energy exchange -- 6.2 The energy cost of maintenance and fattening -- 6.3 Food intake and heat production -- 6.4 Eating and rumination -- 6.5 Efficiency of utilization of absorbed nutrients -- 6.6 Regulatory dietary-induced thermogenesis -- 6.7 Body size and heat production -- 6.8 The energetics of growth -- 6.9 Conclusions -- References -- 7 Diet-Induced Thermogenesis -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Force-feeding and diet-induced thermogenesis -- 7.3 Voluntary hyperphagia and diet-induced thermogenesis -- 7.4 Mechanism of diet-induced thermogenesis -- 7.5 Other factors affecting diet-induced thermogenesis -- 7.6 Reduced thermogenesis -- 7.7 Summary -- References -- 8 Thermogenesis and Obesity -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Energy balance in genetically obese rodents -- 8.3 Mechanisms of heat production -- 8.4 Thermogenesis in man -- 8.5 Concluding comments -- References -- 9 Hypermetabolism in Trauma -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Afferent mediators of metabolic alterations -- 9.3 Neuroendocrine responses -- 9.4 Metabolic responses -- 9.5 Cardiovascular responses -- 9.6 Thermoregulatory response -- 9.7 Treatment -- 9.8 Summary -- References -- 10 Thermogenesis and Fever -- 10.1 Temperature regulation as a reflex -- 10.2 The biology of fever -- 10.3 The biology of malignant hyperthermia -- References -- 11 Pharmacology of Thermogenesis -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Central control of thermogenesis -- 11.3 Neural control of shivering and non-shivering thermogenesis -- 11.4 Receptors mediating thermogenic responses in brown adipose tissue -- 11.5 Intracellular mediators of the acute, subacute and chronic effects of sympathetic stimulation -- 11.6 Impact of various pharmacological agents on thermogenesis -- 11.7 Hormonal control of thermogenesis -- 11.8 A rationale for selecting thermogenic agents -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 88
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400959156
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 Food -- 2.1 Termites as decomposers -- 2.2 Wasps and ants as predators -- 2.3 Sugars as fuel save prey -- 2.4 Seed eaters -- 2.5 Leaf eaters -- 2.6 Pollen eaters -- 3 Foraging by individuals -- 3.1 Foraging strategy -- 3.2 Worker variability -- 4 Foraging in groups -- 4.1 Communication about food -- 4.2 Group slave-raiding -- 4.3 Tunnels and tracks -- 4.4 Nomadic foraging -- 5 Cavity nests and soil mounds -- 5.1 Cavities and burrows -- 5.2 Soil mounds -- 6 Nests of fibre, silk and wax -- 6.1 Mounds of vegetation and tree nests -- 6.2 Combs of cells -- 7 Microclimate -- 7.1 Environmental regulation -- 7.2 Metabolic regulation -- 8 Defence -- 8.1 Painful and paralysing injections -- 8.2 Toxic smears and repellants -- 9 Food processing -- 9.1 Mastication, extraction and regurgitation -- 9.2 Yolk food supplements -- 9.3 Head food glands -- 10 Early population growth -- 10.1 Food distribution -- 10.2 Colony foundation -- 10.3 The growth spurt -- 11 Maturation -- 11.1 Simple models of reproduction -- 11.2 Social control over caste -- 11.3 Males in social Hymenoptera -- 11.4 Maturation in general -- 12 Reproduction -- 12.1 Caste morphogenesis -- 12.2 Copulation and dispersal -- 12.3 Production -- 12.4 Summary -- 13 Evolution of insect societies -- 13.1 Theories of individual selection -- 13.2 Models of these theories -- 13.3 Group selection -- 13.4 Conclusions -- 14 Colonies -- 14.1 The colony barrier -- 14.2 Queen number and species ecology -- 14.3 Queen interaction and queen relatedness -- 15 Comparative ecology of congeneric species -- 15.1 Ant and termite races -- 15.2 Desert ants and termites -- 15.3 Ants and termites in grassland -- 15.4 Forest ants and termites -- 15.5 Wasps and bumblebees -- 15.6 Advanced bees -- 16 Communities -- 16.1 Temperate zone communities in grass and woodland -- 16.2 Desert communities -- 16.3 Tropical rain forest -- 16.4 Conclusions -- 17 Two themes -- 17.1 Plant mutualism -- 17.2 Social organization -- References -- Author index.
    Abstract: Here is a guide to the ecology of social insects. It is intended for general ecologists and entomologists as well as for undergraduates and those about to start research on social insects; even the experienced investigator may find the comparison between different groups of social insects illuminating. Most technical terms are translated into common language as far as can be done without loss of accuracy but scientific names are unavoidable. Readers will become familiar with the name even though they cannot visualize the animal and could reflect that only a very few of the total species have been studied so far! References too are essential and with these it should be possible to travel more deeply into the vast research literature, still increasing monthly. When I have cited an author in another author's paper, this implies that I have not read the original and the second author must take responsi­ bility for accuracy! Many hands and heads have helped to make this book. I thank all my colleagues past and present for their enduring though critical support, and I thank with special pleasure: E. ]. M. Evesham who fashioned the diagrams; ]. Free, D. J. Stradling and]. P. E. C. Darlington who supplied photographs; D. Y. Brian and R. A. Weller who were meticulous on the linguistic side; and G. Frith and R. M. Jones who collated the references. List of plates 1. Fungus combs of Acromyrmex octospinosus and Macrotermes michaelseni. 13 2. Mouthparts of larval Myrmica.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 Food -- 2.1 Termites as decomposers -- 2.2 Wasps and ants as predators -- 2.3 Sugars as fuel save prey -- 2.4 Seed eaters -- 2.5 Leaf eaters -- 2.6 Pollen eaters -- 3 Foraging by individuals -- 3.1 Foraging strategy -- 3.2 Worker variability -- 4 Foraging in groups -- 4.1 Communication about food -- 4.2 Group slave-raiding -- 4.3 Tunnels and tracks -- 4.4 Nomadic foraging -- 5 Cavity nests and soil mounds -- 5.1 Cavities and burrows -- 5.2 Soil mounds -- 6 Nests of fibre, silk and wax -- 6.1 Mounds of vegetation and tree nests -- 6.2 Combs of cells -- 7 Microclimate -- 7.1 Environmental regulation -- 7.2 Metabolic regulation -- 8 Defence -- 8.1 Painful and paralysing injections -- 8.2 Toxic smears and repellants -- 9 Food processing -- 9.1 Mastication, extraction and regurgitation -- 9.2 Yolk food supplements -- 9.3 Head food glands -- 10 Early population growth -- 10.1 Food distribution -- 10.2 Colony foundation -- 10.3 The growth spurt -- 11 Maturation -- 11.1 Simple models of reproduction -- 11.2 Social control over caste -- 11.3 Males in social Hymenoptera -- 11.4 Maturation in general -- 12 Reproduction -- 12.1 Caste morphogenesis -- 12.2 Copulation and dispersal -- 12.3 Production -- 12.4 Summary -- 13 Evolution of insect societies -- 13.1 Theories of individual selection -- 13.2 Models of these theories -- 13.3 Group selection -- 13.4 Conclusions -- 14 Colonies -- 14.1 The colony barrier -- 14.2 Queen number and species ecology -- 14.3 Queen interaction and queen relatedness -- 15 Comparative ecology of congeneric species -- 15.1 Ant and termite races -- 15.2 Desert ants and termites -- 15.3 Ants and termites in grassland -- 15.4 Forest ants and termites -- 15.5 Wasps and bumblebees -- 15.6 Advanced bees -- 16 Communities -- 16.1 Temperate zone communities in grass and woodland -- 16.2 Desert communities -- 16.3 Tropical rain forest -- 16.4 Conclusions -- 17 Two themes -- 17.1 Plant mutualism -- 17.2 Social organization -- References -- Author index.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 89
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401163705
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Origins And Development Of Small-Scale Steelmaking -- 1.1 The Mini-Steelworks—What is it? -- 1.2 Equipment for Mini-Steelworks—An Historical Perspective -- 1.3 Mini-Steelworks in the 1960s and Later -- 1.4 Technological Developments -- 1.5 Future Prospects -- References -- 2 Arc Furnace Feedstock -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Influence of Process Route and Other Factors on Scrap Availability -- 2.3 The Origins of Steel and Cast Iron Scrap -- 2.4 Scrap Preparation Plant and Associated Equipment -- 2.5 Technical Specification for Ferrous Scrap -- 2.6 Influence of Residuals on Steelmaking Practice -- 2.7 Other Sources of Iron -- 2.8 Other Materials -- References -- 3 Electric Arc Furnaces in Mini-Steelplants -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Scope -- 3.3 Electrical Requirements -- 3.4 Furnace Design -- 3.5 Water-Cooled Panels -- 3.6 Computer Control of Electric Arc Melting Operations -- 3.7 Oxy-Fuel Burners -- 3.8 Scrap Preheating -- 3.9 Continuous Feeding -- 3.10 Foaming Slag -- 3.11 De-Oxidation Practice -- 3.12 Performance Criteria -- 3.13 Ladle Refining -- 3.14 Steels Produced in the Mini-Plant Arc Furnace -- 3.15 The Future of the Arc Furnace in the Mini-Steelplant -- References -- 4 Casting Methods -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Choice of Casting Route -- 4.3 The Ladle -- 4.4 Ingot Casting -- 4.5 Continuous Casting -- 4.6 In-Line Rolling -- 4.7 Horizontal Continuous Casting -- References -- 5 Rolling Mills for Mini-Steelplants -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Product Classification -- 5.3 The Steel Stock -- 5.4 Heating of the Steel for Rolling -- 5.5 Mill Layouts for Small-Scale Steelmaking -- 5.6 Roller Tables, Cooling Beds and Coilers -- 5.7 Shears and Saws -- 5.8 Mill Rolls -- 5.9 Mill Guides -- 5.10 Pass Design -- 5.11 Mill Drives -- 5.12 High Reduction Mills -- References -- 6 Energy Requirements and Environmental Constraints -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Overall Energy Requirements for Steelmaking -- 6.3 Steelmaking and the Environment -- References.
    Abstract: The contents of this volume cover all the major activities associated with small-scale steelmaking in mini-steelworks (except Direct Reduction, on which two comprehensive volumes have recently appeared - see refs 11 & 12, Chapter 2). There is, of course, an immediate problem of agreeing on a suitable definition of mini-steelworks and the entrepreneurial nature of many businesses based on the mini-steelplant route compounds this problem. Nevertheless, as is shown by the lucid review in the opening chapter, it is quite possible to derive a working definition of a mini­ steelworks. The succeeding chapters deal with steelmaking in a linear fashion; a survey of raw materials supply being followed by independent analyses of arc furnace practice, casting and rolling. The volume is rounded off by a consideration of the important topics of energy costs and environmental factors. As anyone associated with iron and steelmaking well knows, the indus­ try is not the exclusive preserve of the metallurgist, although he plays a prominent role in its activities. For this reason, it is hoped that the level of treatment will commend the book to a wide readership. that includes non-metallurgical professionals in plant management and elsewhere, as well as industrial metallurgists. Lecturers in universities, polytechnics and colleges of further education should find this volume useful as a course reader for final year and postgraduate studies of steelmaking.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Origins And Development Of Small-Scale Steelmaking1.1 The Mini-Steelworks-What is it? -- 1.2 Equipment for Mini-Steelworks-An Historical Perspective -- 1.3 Mini-Steelworks in the 1960s and Later -- 1.4 Technological Developments -- 1.5 Future Prospects -- References -- 2 Arc Furnace Feedstock -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Influence of Process Route and Other Factors on Scrap Availability -- 2.3 The Origins of Steel and Cast Iron Scrap -- 2.4 Scrap Preparation Plant and Associated Equipment -- 2.5 Technical Specification for Ferrous Scrap -- 2.6 Influence of Residuals on Steelmaking Practice -- 2.7 Other Sources of Iron -- 2.8 Other Materials -- References -- 3 Electric Arc Furnaces in Mini-Steelplants -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Scope -- 3.3 Electrical Requirements -- 3.4 Furnace Design -- 3.5 Water-Cooled Panels -- 3.6 Computer Control of Electric Arc Melting Operations -- 3.7 Oxy-Fuel Burners -- 3.8 Scrap Preheating -- 3.9 Continuous Feeding -- 3.10 Foaming Slag -- 3.11 De-Oxidation Practice -- 3.12 Performance Criteria -- 3.13 Ladle Refining -- 3.14 Steels Produced in the Mini-Plant Arc Furnace -- 3.15 The Future of the Arc Furnace in the Mini-Steelplant -- References -- 4 Casting Methods -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Choice of Casting Route -- 4.3 The Ladle -- 4.4 Ingot Casting -- 4.5 Continuous Casting -- 4.6 In-Line Rolling -- 4.7 Horizontal Continuous Casting -- References -- 5 Rolling Mills for Mini-Steelplants -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Product Classification -- 5.3 The Steel Stock -- 5.4 Heating of the Steel for Rolling -- 5.5 Mill Layouts for Small-Scale Steelmaking -- 5.6 Roller Tables, Cooling Beds and Coilers -- 5.7 Shears and Saws -- 5.8 Mill Rolls -- 5.9 Mill Guides -- 5.10 Pass Design -- 5.11 Mill Drives -- 5.12 High Reduction Mills -- References -- 6 Energy Requirements and Environmental Constraints -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Overall Energy Requirements for Steelmaking -- 6.3 Steelmaking and the Environment -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 90
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401169400
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 408 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 The Past, Present and Future of the Surface Coatings Industry -- 2 Introduction to Polymer Science -- 3 Vegetable Oils -- 4 Oleoresinous Media -- 5 Alkyd Resin Technology -- 6 Manufacture of Alkyd Resins -- 7 Applications of Alkyd Resins -- 8 Polyesters -- 9 Amino Resins -- 10 Phenolic Resins -- 11 Polyurethane Resins -- 12 Epoxy Resins -- 13 Water Dispersible Epoxy Coatings -- 14 Silicone Resins -- 15 Acrylic Solution Resins -- 16 Emulsion Polymerization Theory -- 17 Emulsion Properties 1: Effect of Monomer Composition -- 18 Emulsion Properties 2: Effect of Water Phase and Particle Size -- 19 Emulsion Properties 3: Film Formation -- 20 Emulsion Polymers: Manufacture and Testing -- 21 Applications of Emulsion Polymers -- 22 Water-Reducible Resins -- 23 Water-Soluble Polymers -- 24 Solvents -- 25 Inorganic Pigments -- 26 Titanium Dioxide Pigments -- 27 Organic Pigments -- 28 Extender Pigments -- 29 Paint Driers -- 30 Paint Additives -- Contributors and Reviewers.
    Abstract: Arising from an examination in 1969 of the education and trammg opportumtles for paint industry technicians, it was recognized that the various courses available at that time did not fully serve their needs. While a few large companies had developed in-house training arrangements, the many medium and smaller fi.rms in the raw material supply, paint manufacturing or paint user industries, were unable to provide their own comprehensive training programs. With a view to improving this situation, an advisory committee comprising ofrepresentatives of the Australian Paint Manufacturers' Federation and the Oil and Colour Chemists' Association Australia was established to liaise directly with the New South Wales Department of Technical and Further Education. As a result plans were developed for the introduction of a Special Course in 'Surface Coatings Technology' in 1971, conducted by the Sydney Technical College. The scope of the course was designed to cover all aspects of surface coatings technology ranging from raw materials and formulations to the production, testing, evaluation, application and use of finished products. The course proved to be highly successful and in 1973 a similar syllabus was introduced by the Melboume School of Painting, Decorating and Signcrafts in Victoria. In 1980, New Zealand followed suit with a similar course conducted by the Auckland Technical Institute.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 The Past, Present and Future of the Surface Coatings Industry2 Introduction to Polymer Science -- 3 Vegetable Oils -- 4 Oleoresinous Media -- 5 Alkyd Resin Technology -- 6 Manufacture of Alkyd Resins -- 7 Applications of Alkyd Resins -- 8 Polyesters -- 9 Amino Resins -- 10 Phenolic Resins -- 11 Polyurethane Resins -- 12 Epoxy Resins -- 13 Water Dispersible Epoxy Coatings -- 14 Silicone Resins -- 15 Acrylic Solution Resins -- 16 Emulsion Polymerization Theory -- 17 Emulsion Properties 1: Effect of Monomer Composition -- 18 Emulsion Properties 2: Effect of Water Phase and Particle Size -- 19 Emulsion Properties 3: Film Formation -- 20 Emulsion Polymers: Manufacture and Testing -- 21 Applications of Emulsion Polymers -- 22 Water-Reducible Resins -- 23 Water-Soluble Polymers -- 24 Solvents -- 25 Inorganic Pigments -- 26 Titanium Dioxide Pigments -- 27 Organic Pigments -- 28 Extender Pigments -- 29 Paint Driers -- 30 Paint Additives -- Contributors and Reviewers.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 91
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400959606
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Corporate Planning: Case Study of Corporate Planning, Income Planning and Control -- 2. Organization -- 3. Management by Objectives -- 4. The Performance Appraisal Process -- 5. Education, Training and Development -- 6. Providing Management Information -- 7. Labour Standard Costing -- 8. Establishing Standards For Labour Cost Control -- 9. Using Standards For Labour Cost Control -- 10. Underground Incentive Bonus Systems -- 11. Maintenance Management -- 12. Materials Management -- 13. Compensation Management -- 14. Industrial Relations -- 15. Summary.
    Abstract: This book had its start when Douglas A. Sloan and the late Ralph Davies first decided to share our firm's experience in mine manage­ ment consulting assignments by using this experience as the basis for a mine management and productivity course. Over the years with more and more assignments, the course text notes were continuously updated and improved. However, the notes only reached the relatively few persons in the mining industry who attended each year's courses. The purpose of this book is to make this experience and knowledge available to everyone who has an interest in systematic mine management. The book is based on nearly 500 mine management consulting assignments which over the years were carried out by too many consultants to begin to mention names. However, some of the international experts whose work was used or who directly contrib­ uted must be mentioned. First would be Col. 1. F. Urwick whose books, articles and personal guidance of the author have had a general influence on the whole book and a specific influence on the Organization chapter. Others are John Humble whose work in developing Management by Objectives (MBO) is reflected in that chapter and Patrick H. Irwin for his work in Corporate Planning, which he has written of in that chapter.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Corporate Planning: Case Study of Corporate Planning, Income Planning and Control2. Organization -- 3. Management by Objectives -- 4. The Performance Appraisal Process -- 5. Education, Training and Development -- 6. Providing Management Information -- 7. Labour Standard Costing -- 8. Establishing Standards For Labour Cost Control -- 9. Using Standards For Labour Cost Control -- 10. Underground Incentive Bonus Systems -- 11. Maintenance Management -- 12. Materials Management -- 13. Compensation Management -- 14. Industrial Relations -- 15. Summary.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 92
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401173766
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Photosynthesis -- Role of Chlorophyll -- Chemistry of Photosynthesis -- Summary -- 2. Water and Solutions -- The Structure of Water -- Solutions -- Summary -- 3. Colloids -- What Are Colloids? -- Behavior of Colloids in an Electric Field -- Syneresis -- Imbibition -- Emulsions -- Breaking of Emulsions -- Foams -- Viscosity -- Summary -- 4. Carbohydrates -- Monosaccharides -- Structure of Carbohydrates -- Carbohydrate Reactions -- Oligosaccharides -- Polysaccharides -- Digestion of Carbohydrates -- Qualitative Tests -- Quantitative Tests -- Summary -- 5. Lipids -- Simple Lipids -- Composite Lipids -- Derived Lipids -- Oxidation of Lipids -- Summary -- 6. Proteins -- Amino Acids -- Classification of Proteins -- Structure of Proteins -- Properties of Proteins -- Protein Synthesis -- Proteins in Foods -- Summary -- 7. Enzymes -- Classification -- Enzyme Composition -- Properties of Enzymes -- Enzyme Reactions -- Some Enzyme Applications in Food -- Summary -- 8. The Vitamins -- The Water-Soluble Vitamins -- The Fat-Soluble Vitamins -- Vitamins and Malnutrition -- Summary -- 9. Minerals -- Occurrence of Minerals -- Anionic Minerals -- Minerals in Canned Foods -- Summary -- 10. Flavor -- The Basic Tastes -- Flavors and Volatiles -- Flavor Enhancement -- Flavor Restoration and Deterioration -- Summary -- 11. Natural Colors -- Chemistry of Natural Coloring Matters -- Caramels and Melanoidins -- Color Determination -- Summary -- 12. Browning Reactions -- Enzymatic Browning -- Non-enzymatic Browning -- The Formation of Brown Pigments -- Inhibition of Browning -- Summary -- 13. Food Colorings -- Color Safety and Regulations -- Colors Exempt from Certification -- Color Analysis and Desired Properties -- Summary -- 14. Alcoholic Fermentation -- Wine -- Beer and Brewing -- Distilled Products -- Vinegar -- Summary -- 15. Baked Products -- Flour -- Leavening -- Summary -- 16. Milk and Milk Products -- Milk Composition -- Rancidity and Off-Flavor in Milk -- Cheese and Cheese Chemistry -- Fermentation in Milk -- Milk Products Other than Cheese -- Determination of Fat in Dairy Products -- Total Solids Analysis -- Summary -- 17. Coffee -- Composition of the Green Coffee Bean -- Changes During Roasting -- Roasted Coffee -- Coffee Products -- Summary -- 18. Tea -- Methods of Preparation -- Chemical Components of Tea -- Amino Acids -- Chemistry of Tea Manufacture -- Tea Aroma -- Summary -- 19. Cocoa and Chocolate -- Manufacture of Cocoa and Chocolate -- Chemical Composition -- Changes During Manufacture of Cocoa and Chocolate -- Volatiles and Chocolate Flavor -- Chocolate and Cocoa Products -- Summary -- 20. Meat and Meat Products -- Muscle Composition -- Changes in Muscle After Slaughter and During Processing -- Effect of Ionizing Radiation -- Summary -- 21. Fruits and Vegetables -- Ripening and Post Harvest Changes -- Storage -- Chemistry Involved in the Texture of Fruits and Vegetables -- Summary.
    Abstract: Food chemistry has grown considerably since its early foundations were laid. This has been brought about not only by research in this field, but also, and more importantly, bYiadvances in the basic sciences involved. In this second edition, the chapters dealing with fundamentals have been rewritten and strengthened. Three new chapters have been added, Water and Solutions, Colloids, and Minerals. The chapter on Fruits and Vegetables has been expanded to cover texture. Other chapters discuss flavor and colors, together with one on brown­ ing reactions. The last seven chapters give the student a background of the classes offood products and beverages encountered in everyday use. Each chapter includes a summary and a list of references and sug­ gested readings to assist the student in study and to obtain further information. Basic Food Chemistry is intended for college undergraduates and for use in food laboratories. The author wishes to express his appreciation to the following people, who reviewed the chapters on their respective specialties: Doctors L.R. Hackler, M. Keeney, B. Love, L.M. Massey, Jr., L.R. Mattick, W.B. Robinson, R.S. Shallenberger,D.F. Splittstoesser, E. Stotz, W.L. Sulz­ bacher, and J. Van Buren. In addition, the author wishes to express his appreciation to Dr. H.O. Hultin and Dr. F.W. Knapp for their reviews of the entire original manuscript and for their helpful comments. The author welcomes notices of errors and omissions as well as sug­ gestions and constructive criticism.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. PhotosynthesisRole of Chlorophyll -- Chemistry of Photosynthesis -- Summary -- 2. Water and Solutions -- The Structure of Water -- Solutions -- Summary -- 3. Colloids -- What Are Colloids? -- Behavior of Colloids in an Electric Field -- Syneresis -- Imbibition -- Emulsions -- Breaking of Emulsions -- Foams -- Viscosity -- Summary -- 4. Carbohydrates -- Monosaccharides -- Structure of Carbohydrates -- Carbohydrate Reactions -- Oligosaccharides -- Polysaccharides -- Digestion of Carbohydrates -- Qualitative Tests -- Quantitative Tests -- Summary -- 5. Lipids -- Simple Lipids -- Composite Lipids -- Derived Lipids -- Oxidation of Lipids -- Summary -- 6. Proteins -- Amino Acids -- Classification of Proteins -- Structure of Proteins -- Properties of Proteins -- Protein Synthesis -- Proteins in Foods -- Summary -- 7. Enzymes -- Classification -- Enzyme Composition -- Properties of Enzymes -- Enzyme Reactions -- Some Enzyme Applications in Food -- Summary -- 8. The Vitamins -- The Water-Soluble Vitamins -- The Fat-Soluble Vitamins -- Vitamins and Malnutrition -- Summary -- 9. Minerals -- Occurrence of Minerals -- Anionic Minerals -- Minerals in Canned Foods -- Summary -- 10. Flavor -- The Basic Tastes -- Flavors and Volatiles -- Flavor Enhancement -- Flavor Restoration and Deterioration -- Summary -- 11. Natural Colors -- Chemistry of Natural Coloring Matters -- Caramels and Melanoidins -- Color Determination -- Summary -- 12. Browning Reactions -- Enzymatic Browning -- Non-enzymatic Browning -- The Formation of Brown Pigments -- Inhibition of Browning -- Summary -- 13. Food Colorings -- Color Safety and Regulations -- Colors Exempt from Certification -- Color Analysis and Desired Properties -- Summary -- 14. Alcoholic Fermentation -- Wine -- Beer and Brewing -- Distilled Products -- Vinegar -- Summary -- 15. Baked Products -- Flour -- Leavening -- Summary -- 16. Milk and Milk Products -- Milk Composition -- Rancidity and Off-Flavor in Milk -- Cheese and Cheese Chemistry -- Fermentation in Milk -- Milk Products Other than Cheese -- Determination of Fat in Dairy Products -- Total Solids Analysis -- Summary -- 17. Coffee -- Composition of the Green Coffee Bean -- Changes During Roasting -- Roasted Coffee -- Coffee Products -- Summary -- 18. Tea -- Methods of Preparation -- Chemical Components of Tea -- Amino Acids -- Chemistry of Tea Manufacture -- Tea Aroma -- Summary -- 19. Cocoa and Chocolate -- Manufacture of Cocoa and Chocolate -- Chemical Composition -- Changes During Manufacture of Cocoa and Chocolate -- Volatiles and Chocolate Flavor -- Chocolate and Cocoa Products -- Summary -- 20. Meat and Meat Products -- Muscle Composition -- Changes in Muscle After Slaughter and During Processing -- Effect of Ionizing Radiation -- Summary -- 21. Fruits and Vegetables -- Ripening and Post Harvest Changes -- Storage -- Chemistry Involved in the Texture of Fruits and Vegetables -- Summary.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 93
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401179072
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: I Introduction -- 1 Vegetables and the World Food Supply -- 2 Origin and Evolution of Vegetables -- 3 Vegetable Classifications -- 4 Importance of Vegetables in Nutrition -- 5 Toxic Substances and Folk Medicinal Uses of Vegetables -- II Principles of Growing Vegetables -- 6 Environmental Factors Influencing the Growth of Vegetables -- 7 Devices and Means of Controlling Climate for Vegetable Production in Adverse Climates and During Off Seasons -- III World Vegetables -- 8 Global View of Vegetable Usage -- A Starchy Roots, Tubers and Fruits -- 9 White or Irish Potato -- 10 Sweet Potato -- 11 Cassava (Manioc) -- 12 Yam -- 13 Edible Aroids: Taro, Yautia, and Others -- 14 Other Starchy Underground Vegetables -- 15 Sweet Corn -- 16 Plantain (Starchy Banana) and Breadfruit -- B Succulent Roots, Bulbs, Tops, and Fruits -- 17 Alliums: Onion, Garlic, and Others -- 18 Composites -- 19 Crucifers -- 20 Umbellifers: Carrot, Celery, and Condiment Herbs -- 21 Vegetable Legumes -- 22 Solanaceous Fruits: Tomato, Eggplant, Peppers, and Others -- 23 Cucurbits -- 24 Chenopods -- 25 Other Succulent Vegetables.
    Abstract: This text and reference book was written because of the urgings of my colleagues here and abroad and also by my students to fill the need for a comprehensive book describing vegetables important as food crops of the world. in this book was first used as outlines for the course on The material world vegetables taught by the staff of the Department of Vegetable Crops at the University of California at Davis. Over the course of the decade the author taught the course, new topics were added with each succeeding year. In 1978 the handouts were revised and compiled into a syllabus. In addition to the students taking the course, the syllabus was purchased and used by others as a reference book. Word ofits existence travelled far; the syllabus is presently used by one other university in the United States and by another in a foreign country. This edition has been extensively revised; many new materials and references have been added. Included are many photographs taken by the author in his travels abroad. The book has three parts. The first is introductory and background meant for students who are not familiar with vegetables as food crops.
    Description / Table of Contents: I Introduction1 Vegetables and the World Food Supply -- 2 Origin and Evolution of Vegetables -- 3 Vegetable Classifications -- 4 Importance of Vegetables in Nutrition -- 5 Toxic Substances and Folk Medicinal Uses of Vegetables -- II Principles of Growing Vegetables -- 6 Environmental Factors Influencing the Growth of Vegetables -- 7 Devices and Means of Controlling Climate for Vegetable Production in Adverse Climates and During Off Seasons -- III World Vegetables -- 8 Global View of Vegetable Usage -- A Starchy Roots, Tubers and Fruits -- 9 White or Irish Potato -- 10 Sweet Potato -- 11 Cassava (Manioc) -- 12 Yam -- 13 Edible Aroids: Taro, Yautia, and Others -- 14 Other Starchy Underground Vegetables -- 15 Sweet Corn -- 16 Plantain (Starchy Banana) and Breadfruit -- B Succulent Roots, Bulbs, Tops, and Fruits -- 17 Alliums: Onion, Garlic, and Others -- 18 Composites -- 19 Crucifers -- 20 Umbellifers: Carrot, Celery, and Condiment Herbs -- 21 Vegetable Legumes -- 22 Solanaceous Fruits: Tomato, Eggplant, Peppers, and Others -- 23 Cucurbits -- 24 Chenopods -- 25 Other Succulent Vegetables.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 94
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789401169790
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 472 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: The Handbook of Electronics Packaging Design and Engineering has been writ­ ten as a reference source for use in the packaging design of electronics equip­ ment. It is designed to provide a single convenient source for the solution of re­ curring design problems. The primary consideration of any design is that the end product meet or exceed the applicable product specifications. The judicious use of uniform design practices will realize the following economies and equipment improvements: • Economics of design. Uniform design practices will result in less engineering and design times and lower costs. They will also reduce the number of changes that may be required due to poor reliability, maintainability, or producibility. • Improved design. Better designs with increased reliability, maintainability, and producibility will result from the use of uniform design practices. • Production economies. Uniform designs employing standard available tools, materials, and parts will result in the cost control of manufacturing. The Handbook is intended primarily for the serious student of electronics packaging and for those engineers and designers actively engaged in this vital and interesting profession. It attempts to present electronics packaging as it is today. It can be used as a training text for instructional purposes and as a reference source for the practicing designer and engineer
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Electronics Packaging Design and Engineering: Definition and purpose of electronics packaging and the role of the Designer and Engineer.2 Project Planning: Defining the task to be performed, estimating the documentation, labor, costs, and scheduling. -- 3 Human Factors Engineering: Designing the man-machine interface. Achieving success through the integration of the Human into the system. -- 4 Fabrication Processes: The Designer and Engineer must have a good knowledge of the manufacturing processes used in the production of electronics equipment. -- 5 Mechanical Fasteners: Reliability of available mechanical fastening devices and their applications, strength, and protective finishes. -- 6 Heat Transfer and Thermal Control: One of the most critical problems in electronics packaging is the removal of excessive heat. A simplified method of Thermal design. -- 7 Shock and Vibration Design: Shock and vibration become problems long before the equipment is installed. A quick empirical method of evaluating the mechanical stability of the equipment. -- 8 Subassemblies and Assemblies: Experience has shown that the so-called “scrambled” parts and wiring are not acceptable for reliable electronics equipment. -- 9 Design Considerations for Space Electronics: Equipment must be protected from the harsh environments of Space. Some of this data is useful in ground installations where severe environments may be encountered. -- 10 Environmental Protection: Methods and materials for the protection of equipment in harsh applications, including rain, dust, heat, salt water atmosphere, etc. -- 11 Radio Frequency and Electromagnetic Shielding: An ideal equipment would not radiate unwanted energy, nor would it be susceptable to unwanted radiations. Designing seals and enclosures for EMI/RFI environments. -- 12 Design and Development of Miniature Electronics Systems: The advantage of the miniaturized, compact equipment is the ease with which it can be ruggedized. In modern electronics space is often limited. -- 13 Wiring and Cabling: Conductors play an important role in reliable electronics equipment. Conductor variation have become as complex as the electronics they serve. -- 14 Materials and Processes: Material availability and the applications they serve. How and what to use in specific designs. -- 15 Safety: The design of every electronics equipment must employ features to protect the operating and maintenance personnel. Protection must also be enforced to prevent inadvertant damage to the machine. -- 16 Printed Circuits: Printed wiring can produce a more reliable and lower cost product. -- 17 Reference Tables and and Figures: Standard data of commercially available and military hardware. Engineering standards and measures. -- 18 Terminology: Terminology used in Engineering design and manufacturing. Communications.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 95
    ISBN: 9789400957787
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- References to Preface and Chapter 1 -- I: Methods -- 2 Extraction of Organic Acids from Physiological Fluids -- 3 Derivatives of Organic Acids -- 4 Separation, Quantification and Identification -- 5 Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry -- 6 Volatile Carboxylic Acids -- References to Part I -- II: Organic Acids in Physiological Fluids from Normal Subjects -- 7 Organic Acids in Blood and Urine from Normal Healthy Adults and Children -- 8 Organic Acids in Physiological Fluids Other than Urine and Blood -- References to Part II -- III: Organic Acids in Human Metabolic Diseases (The Organic Acidurias) -- 9 Organic Acids in the Study of Metabolic Diseases -- 10 Disorders of Branched-Chain Amino Acid Metabolism -- 11 Disorders of Propionate and Methylmalonate Metabolism -- 12 Specific Causes of Congenital Keto Acidosis in Infants -- 13 Disorders of l-Lysine Metabolism -- 14 The Dicarboxylic Acidurias -- 15 Congenital Lactic Acidurias and Disorders of Pyruvate Metabolism -- 16 Organic Acidurias due to Disorders in Other Metabolic Pathways -- Appendix of Mass-Spectrometric and Gas-Chromatographic Data.
    Abstract: The writing of this book was prompted by the need for a comprehensive of current data on organic acids suitable for both newcomers and collection established researchers in this field. The only previous text of the kind was the excellent review by Nordmann and Nordmann (1961), and at that time the main method of analysis was paper chromatography with liquid chromatography being used in a limited way. Only three diseases in which organic acids accumulate were known (primary hyperoxaluria, phenylketonuria and alcaptonuria). Since then, with the development of gas chromatography and mass spectrometry, and the further development ofliquid chromatography, knowledge concerning the nature of the organic acids in physiological fluids has been greatly extended. At the same time, the number of organic acidurias has increased dramatically, there being now some 40-50 known diseases of this type. During the past 15 years or so, there have been several reviews, dealing with either specific diseases or groups of diseases (Gompertz, 1972, 1974; Tanaka, 1975), or presenting the proceedings of symposia (Stern and Toothill, 1972) or workshops (Marner et al. , 1974). This present text deals comprehensively and in detail with the organic acids in human physiological fluids in health and in disease states, and is particularly concerned with the methods necessary for their separation, determination and indentification.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 IntroductionReferences to Preface and Chapter 1 -- I: Methods -- 2 Extraction of Organic Acids from Physiological Fluids -- 3 Derivatives of Organic Acids -- 4 Separation, Quantification and Identification -- 5 Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry -- 6 Volatile Carboxylic Acids -- References to Part I -- II: Organic Acids in Physiological Fluids from Normal Subjects -- 7 Organic Acids in Blood and Urine from Normal Healthy Adults and Children -- 8 Organic Acids in Physiological Fluids Other than Urine and Blood -- References to Part II -- III: Organic Acids in Human Metabolic Diseases (The Organic Acidurias) -- 9 Organic Acids in the Study of Metabolic Diseases -- 10 Disorders of Branched-Chain Amino Acid Metabolism -- 11 Disorders of Propionate and Methylmalonate Metabolism -- 12 Specific Causes of Congenital Keto Acidosis in Infants -- 13 Disorders of l-Lysine Metabolism -- 14 The Dicarboxylic Acidurias -- 15 Congenital Lactic Acidurias and Disorders of Pyruvate Metabolism -- 16 Organic Acidurias due to Disorders in Other Metabolic Pathways -- Appendix of Mass-Spectrometric and Gas-Chromatographic Data.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 96
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400959491
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1 Introduction -- 2 Biological membranes -- 2.1 Components of biological membranes -- 2.2 The phospholipid bilayer -- 2.3 Fluidity of the bilayer -- 2.4 Reservations on the fluid mosaic model of membrane structure -- References -- 3 Membrane lipids -- 3.1 Fatty acyl chains -- 3.2 Phase transitions -- 3.3 Trans-bilayer asymmetry -- References -- 4 Membrane proteins -- 4.1 Integral membrane proteins -- 4.2 Peripheral membrane proteins -- References -- 5 Membrane biosynthesis -- 5.1 Membrane lipid synthesis -- 5.2 Membrane protein synthesis -- 5.3 Integral protein synthesis -- 5.4 Peripheral membrane proteins -- 5.5 Factors affecting intracellular localization -- 5.6 Membrane turnover -- References.
    Abstract: The student of biological science in his final years as an undergraduate and his first years as a graduate is expected to gain some familiarity with current research at the frontiers of his discipline. New research work is published in a perplexing diversity of publications and is inevitably concerned with the minutiae of the subject. The sheer number of research journals and papers also causes confusion and difficulties of assimilation. Review articles usually presuppose a background knowledge of the field and are inevitably rather restricted in scope. There is thus a need for short but authoritative introductions to those areas of modern biological research which are either not dealt with in standard introductory textbooks or are not dealt with in sufficient detail to enable the student to go on from them to read scholarly reviews with profit. This series of books is designed to satisfy this need. The authors have been asked to produce a brief outline of their subject assuming that their readers will have read and remembered much of a standard introductory textbook of biology. This outline then sets out to provide by building on this basis, the conceptual framework within which modern research work is progressing and aims to give the reader an indication of the problems, both conceptual and practical, which must be overcome if progress is to be maintained.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 Introduction2 Biological membranes -- 2.1 Components of biological membranes -- 2.2 The phospholipid bilayer -- 2.3 Fluidity of the bilayer -- 2.4 Reservations on the fluid mosaic model of membrane structure -- References -- 3 Membrane lipids -- 3.1 Fatty acyl chains -- 3.2 Phase transitions -- 3.3 Trans-bilayer asymmetry -- References -- 4 Membrane proteins -- 4.1 Integral membrane proteins -- 4.2 Peripheral membrane proteins -- References -- 5 Membrane biosynthesis -- 5.1 Membrane lipid synthesis -- 5.2 Membrane protein synthesis -- 5.3 Integral protein synthesis -- 5.4 Peripheral membrane proteins -- 5.5 Factors affecting intracellular localization -- 5.6 Membrane turnover -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 97
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400957268
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Background and outline -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 History of research on modern offshore tidal current sedimentation -- 1.3 A depositional surface for late Holocene deposits -- 1.4 Limits and outline of the book -- 2. Tidal currents of the continental shelf -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Tide generating forces and the ocean’s response -- 2.3 Tidal currents in shelf seas -- 2.4 Net sand transport caused by tidal current asymmetries -- 2.5 Flow near the sea floor -- 2.6 Internal tides -- 2.7 Tides past -- 2.8 Main conclusions -- 3. Bedforms -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Relevant flume bedforms -- 3.3 Transverse bedforms of the continental shelf 34 -- 3.4 Longitudinal bedforms of the continental shelf -- 3.5 Relationship between bedforms -- 3.6 Aeolian equivalents -- 3.7 Main conclusions -- 4. Sand transport -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Relation of sand transport rate to tidal current speed -- 4.3 Geographical variation in sand transport rate -- 4.4 Net sand transport by tidal currents -- 4.5 Temporal variations of sand transport rate and direction in a tidal sea -- 4.6 Growth, migration and decay of sand waves in the Southern Bight of the North Sea by total water movements -- 4.7 Local sand transport on modern sand banks -- 4.8 Main conclusions -- 5. Offshore tidal deposits: sand sheet and sand bank facies -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Late Holocene sand and gravel sheet facies -- 5.3 Sand bank facies -- 5.4 Sediment and faunal indicators of shape, depth and exposure of continental shelves -- 5.5 Longer term evolution of the deposits -- 5.6 Sand and gravel deposits of non-tidal marine currents -- 5.7 Main conclusions -- 6. Shelly faunas associated with temperate offshore tidal deposits -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Faunal associations -- 6.3 Bioturbation -- 6.4 Topics and areas excluded -- 6.5 Temperate water regions studied and their geological importance -- 6.6 Faunas in shallow nearshore waters -- 6.7 Faunas of the middle and outer continental shelf -- 6.8 Faunas of a bed-load parting -- 6.9 Faunas associated with bedform zones in the Western English Channel -- 6.10 Faunas associated with bedform zones in the Bristol Channel -- 6.11 Faunas associated with bedform zones in the Southern North Sea -- 6.12 Faunas associated with bedform zones on the Atlantic continental shelf between Brittany and Scotland -- 6.13 Faunas of active sand banks -- 6.14 Faunal evidence for stability of sand waves -- 6.15 Faunas as environmental indicators -- 6.16 Factors determining the faunal composition of death assemblages in shell gravels -- 6.17 Age of temperate water carbonates -- 6.18 Relative proportions of the major carbonate producers in death assemblages of continental shelf carbonates -- 6.18.1 Faunal composition of death assemblages in shell gravels in the strong current areas, Western English Channel and Celtic Sea -- 6.18.2 Faunal composition of death assemblages in shell gravels on the continental shelf west of Scotland -- 6.19 Temporal changes in the faunal composition of shell gravels -- 6.20 Long term evolution of temperate shelf carbonates -- 6.21 Applications to the fossil record -- 6.22 Main conclusions -- 7. Ancient offshore tidal deposits -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Recognition of ancient offshore tidal current activity -- 7.3 Structures preserved in ancient offshore tidal current deposits -- 7.4 Tidal currents aided by storm processes -- 7.5 Factors controlling the structure and composition of offshore tidal sediments through geological time -- 7.6 Some possible palaeotidal regimes -- 7.7 Sedimentology of a tidal sea: the Lower Greensand of southern England -- 7.8 Tidal currents through geological time: implications for future studies -- 7.9 Main conclusions -- REFERENCES.
    Abstract: In the early 1970s a start was made on a broad review of what was known or could be surmised about sedimentation by strong tidal currents on modern continental shelves. This task was initiated because of the need to define the next phase of research in this field by the Marine Geology Group of the Institute of Oceano­ graphic Sciences. Related indications of the longer term evolution of the deposits were sought by close reference to the nature of modern tidal currents and the supposedly offshore tidal deposits of ancient seas. As the review grew in completeness it became of increasing relevance to a wider audience so it was amalgamated with the new results and shaped as a book. The fruits of the long-continued discussions within and outside the Geology Group have served to improve understanding of the processes and products of offshore tidal current sedimentation. On the other hand, the discussions have blurred the parts played by the people concerned. This applies to all chapters in varying degrees, but is especially true for Chapters 3, 4 and 5. The authorship attributed to each chapter therefore seeks to reflect those who were most con­ cerned with it.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Background and outline1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 History of research on modern offshore tidal current sedimentation -- 1.3 A depositional surface for late Holocene deposits -- 1.4 Limits and outline of the book -- 2. Tidal currents of the continental shelf -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Tide generating forces and the ocean’s response -- 2.3 Tidal currents in shelf seas -- 2.4 Net sand transport caused by tidal current asymmetries -- 2.5 Flow near the sea floor -- 2.6 Internal tides -- 2.7 Tides past -- 2.8 Main conclusions -- 3. Bedforms -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Relevant flume bedforms -- 3.3 Transverse bedforms of the continental shelf 34 -- 3.4 Longitudinal bedforms of the continental shelf -- 3.5 Relationship between bedforms -- 3.6 Aeolian equivalents -- 3.7 Main conclusions -- 4. Sand transport -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Relation of sand transport rate to tidal current speed -- 4.3 Geographical variation in sand transport rate -- 4.4 Net sand transport by tidal currents -- 4.5 Temporal variations of sand transport rate and direction in a tidal sea -- 4.6 Growth, migration and decay of sand waves in the Southern Bight of the North Sea by total water movements -- 4.7 Local sand transport on modern sand banks -- 4.8 Main conclusions -- 5. Offshore tidal deposits: sand sheet and sand bank facies -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Late Holocene sand and gravel sheet facies -- 5.3 Sand bank facies -- 5.4 Sediment and faunal indicators of shape, depth and exposure of continental shelves -- 5.5 Longer term evolution of the deposits -- 5.6 Sand and gravel deposits of non-tidal marine currents -- 5.7 Main conclusions -- 6. Shelly faunas associated with temperate offshore tidal deposits -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Faunal associations -- 6.3 Bioturbation -- 6.4 Topics and areas excluded -- 6.5 Temperate water regions studied and their geological importance -- 6.6 Faunas in shallow nearshore waters -- 6.7 Faunas of the middle and outer continental shelf -- 6.8 Faunas of a bed-load parting -- 6.9 Faunas associated with bedform zones in the Western English Channel -- 6.10 Faunas associated with bedform zones in the Bristol Channel -- 6.11 Faunas associated with bedform zones in the Southern North Sea -- 6.12 Faunas associated with bedform zones on the Atlantic continental shelf between Brittany and Scotland -- 6.13 Faunas of active sand banks -- 6.14 Faunal evidence for stability of sand waves -- 6.15 Faunas as environmental indicators -- 6.16 Factors determining the faunal composition of death assemblages in shell gravels -- 6.17 Age of temperate water carbonates -- 6.18 Relative proportions of the major carbonate producers in death assemblages of continental shelf carbonates -- 6.18.1 Faunal composition of death assemblages in shell gravels in the strong current areas, Western English Channel and Celtic Sea -- 6.18.2 Faunal composition of death assemblages in shell gravels on the continental shelf west of Scotland -- 6.19 Temporal changes in the faunal composition of shell gravels -- 6.20 Long term evolution of temperate shelf carbonates -- 6.21 Applications to the fossil record -- 6.22 Main conclusions -- 7. Ancient offshore tidal deposits -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Recognition of ancient offshore tidal current activity -- 7.3 Structures preserved in ancient offshore tidal current deposits -- 7.4 Tidal currents aided by storm processes -- 7.5 Factors controlling the structure and composition of offshore tidal sediments through geological time -- 7.6 Some possible palaeotidal regimes -- 7.7 Sedimentology of a tidal sea: the Lower Greensand of southern England -- 7.8 Tidal currents through geological time: implications for future studies -- 7.9 Main conclusions -- REFERENCES.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 98
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400958869
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Multiple Forms of Enzymes and the Emergence of the Isoenzyme Concept -- 2. Origins and Structures of Multiple Forms of Enzymes -- Origins of isoenzymes -- Structural differences between isoenzymes and their investigation -- Non-isoenzymic multiple forms of enzymes -- 3. Differences in Properties between Multiple Forms of Enzymes -- Catalytic differences between multiple forms of enzymes -- Physicochemical differences between multiple forms of enzymes -- Immunochemical differences between multiple forms of enzymes -- Properties of multiple forms of enzymes: general considerations -- 4. Distribution and Biological Functions of Multiple Forms of Enzymes -- Distribution of enzymes determined by multiple gene loci -- Physiological function of multiple forms of enzymes -- 5. Multiple Forms of Enzymes in Phylogeny and Genetics -- Gene duplication and the evolution of multiple loci -- Genetics of isoenzymes -- 6. Multiple Forms of Enzymes in Ontogeny -- Changes during normal development -- Changes associated with abnormal development -- 7. Multiple Forms of Enzymes in Diagnostic Enzymology -- Lactate dehydrogenase isoenzymes -- Creatine kinase isoenzymes -- Multiple forms of alkaline phosphatase -- Acid phosphatase isoenzymes -- Other isoenzymes -- References.
    Abstract: The increased interest in multiple forms of enzymes that began with the application of new methods of fractionation to preparations of enzymes and other proteins some 25 years ago led quickly to an appreciation that the existence of enzymes in multiple forms, or isoenzymes, is a general phenomenon. The results of pioneering studies and those which followed in the early years of isoenzyme research consisted, not surprisingly, mainly of descriptions of the existence and characteristics of hetero­ geneity in various enzyme systems. Summaries of these results were provided in books such as J . H. Wilkinson's I soenzymes, the first edition of which appeared in 1965. Some clearer ideas of the nature of the phenomena had become apparent by the time that the second edition of Isoenzymes was called for in 1970, and a limited use of the word isoenzymes itself, to describe only certain of the various categories of enzyme multiplicity then recognized, was already being proposed. Nevertheless, a largely enzyme-by-enzyme oTganization of the contents of the book was still appropriate. Considerable advances, both experimental and conceptual, were made in isoenzyme research in the 1970s, and in 1977 Professor Wilkinson suggested to the present author that these should be taken into account in a joint revision of Isoenzymes. Professor Wilkinson's untimely death put. an end to this project and the present book is therefore the work of a single author.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Multiple Forms of Enzymes and the Emergence of the Isoenzyme Concept2. Origins and Structures of Multiple Forms of Enzymes -- Origins of isoenzymes -- Structural differences between isoenzymes and their investigation -- Non-isoenzymic multiple forms of enzymes -- 3. Differences in Properties between Multiple Forms of Enzymes -- Catalytic differences between multiple forms of enzymes -- Physicochemical differences between multiple forms of enzymes -- Immunochemical differences between multiple forms of enzymes -- Properties of multiple forms of enzymes: general considerations -- 4. Distribution and Biological Functions of Multiple Forms of Enzymes -- Distribution of enzymes determined by multiple gene loci -- Physiological function of multiple forms of enzymes -- 5. Multiple Forms of Enzymes in Phylogeny and Genetics -- Gene duplication and the evolution of multiple loci -- Genetics of isoenzymes -- 6. Multiple Forms of Enzymes in Ontogeny -- Changes during normal development -- Changes associated with abnormal development -- 7. Multiple Forms of Enzymes in Diagnostic Enzymology -- Lactate dehydrogenase isoenzymes -- Creatine kinase isoenzymes -- Multiple forms of alkaline phosphatase -- Acid phosphatase isoenzymes -- Other isoenzymes -- References.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 99
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400959439
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVI, 398 p) , online resource
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: 1. Materials (A) -- 1.1 Heat treatment -- 1.2 Materials and testing -- 1.3 Metal fatigue -- 1.4 Safety factor -- 1.5 Shear strain -- 1.6 Punching holes in a material -- 1.7 Bending and torsion -- Exercises -- 2. Engine indicator diagrams (B2) -- 2.1 Engine indicators -- 2.2 Converting an indicator diagram -- 2.3 Interpretation of indicator diagrams -- 3. Combustion processes (B3) -- 3.1 Specific heat capacity of a gas -- 3.2 Expansion and compression of gases -- 3.3 Engine temperature and pressure calculations -- 3.4 Efficiency of an engine -- 3.5 General comparison between petrol and compression ignition engines -- 3.6 Octane rating -- 3.7 Cetane number and diesel index -- 3.8 Detonation -- 3.9 Fuel additives -- 3.10 Volumetric efficiency -- Exercises -- 4. Air-fuel ratios and exhaust products (B4) -- 4.1 Air-fuel ratios: petrol engine -- 4.2 Air-fuel ratios: CI oil engine -- 4.3 Determination of air-fuel ratios -- 4.4 Mixture strength and side effects -- 4.5 Air-fuel ratio and power output -- 4.6 Combustion calculations -- 4.7 Consumption loop or hook curve -- Exercises -- 5. Archimedes’ Principle (B5) -- 5.1 Hydrostatics and hydraulics -- 5.2 Archimedes’ principle -- 5.3 Floating bodies -- Exercises -- 6. Fluids and energy (B6) -- 6.1 Pressure -- 6.2 The manometer -- 6.3 Energy of liquids -- 6.4 Bernoulli’s law -- 6.5 Quantity flow -- 6.6 The Venturi unit -- 6.7 Actual flow of liquids through an orifice -- 6.8 Gas velocities -- Exercises -- 7. Hydraulic mechanisms and machines (B7) -- 7.1 Hydraulic machines -- 7.2 Hydraulic intensifier -- 7.3 Hydraulic brakes -- 7.4 The law of a machine -- Exercises -- 8. Variable torque, force and work done (C8) -- 8.1 Variable torque -- 8.2 Work done -- 8.3 Couples -- Exercises -- 9. Angular motion (C9) -- 9.1 Angular velocity and angular acceleration -- 9.2 Power -- Exercises -- 10. Inertia force, mass and acceleration (C10) -- 10.1 Mass -- 10.2 Newton’s first and second laws of motion -- 10.3 Momentum -- 10.4 Braking efficiency and stopping distance -- 10.5 Newton’s third law of motion -- Exercises -- 11. Potential and kinetic energy (C11) -- 11.1 Potential energy -- 11.2 Kinetic energy -- 11.3 Conservation of energy -- 11.4 Conservation of momentum -- 11.5 Energy loss when bodies collide -- 11.6 Moment of inertia -- 11.7 Kinetic energy of a rotating body -- 11.8 Radius of gyration -- Exercises -- 12. Tractive effort and tractive resistance (C12) -- 12.1 Tractive effort -- 12.2 Tractive resistance -- 12.3 Undergeared and overgeared vehicles -- 12.4 Engine characteristics and gear ratios -- 12.5 Constant power and tractive-effort/road-speed curves -- 12.6 Data and methods for setting final drive and gearbox ratios -- Exercises -- 13. Centripetal force and balancing (C13) -- 13.1 Centripetal acceleration -- 13.2 Centripetal and centrifugal force -- 13.3 Balancing of rotating masses -- 13.4 Piston movement and inertia -- 13.5 Engine balance -- Exercises -- 14. Stability of vehicles in curved paths (C14) -- 14.1 Vehicle on curved level road -- 14.2 Vehicle on curved banked track -- 14.3 Vehicle on a reversed banked track -- 14.4 Arched or hump-back bridges -- 14.5 Road dip or depression -- Exercises -- 15. Transference of wheel loading (C15) -- 15.1 Vehicle weight transfer: retardation -- 15.2 Vehicle weight transfer: acceleration -- 15.3 Maximum possible acceleration: level road -- 15.4 Transferred weight: vehicle in curved path -- Exercises -- 16. Simple harmonic motion (C16) -- 16.1 The conical pendulum -- 16.2 The Watt centrifugal governor -- 16.3 The simple pendulum -- Exercises -- 17. Relative velocity (C17) -- 17.1 Definition and diagrams -- 17.2 Angular velocity of a link or lever -- 17.3 Relative velocity of points on a wheel -- Exercises -- Answers to Exercises.
    Abstract: A motor vehicle technician has to attain high technological skills to enable him or her to diagnose faults and service transport vehicles and their components. Science is a branch of study concerned with the systematic investigation of observed facts, and forms an important foundation on which to build sound engineering practice. Such a background will stimulate personal development by increasing confidence and intellectual ability. This is the second of two books which have been planned to cover the TEe U77/413 and 415 Motor Vehicle Science II and III Model programmes of study. Part 2 covers the requirements of Motor Vehicle Science III. The fundamental principles of engineering science have been applied to the motor vehicle in a systematic and progressive manner to enable the reader to follow most of the work on his or her own initiative. Emphasis has again been placed on the provision of many fully worked examples, some having more than one method of solution. These together with a large number of exercise examples enable the student to improve subject knowledge and gain that vital confidence so necessary for examinations. The book is aimed mainly at the student who is attending a recognized college course leading to full Technician qualification. It is designed to become a valid source of information to assist the student both in and out of the classroom environment, but the importance of the college lecturer and his or her individual method of teaching the subject remains of prime importance to the student.
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Materials (A)1.1 Heat treatment -- 1.2 Materials and testing -- 1.3 Metal fatigue -- 1.4 Safety factor -- 1.5 Shear strain -- 1.6 Punching holes in a material -- 1.7 Bending and torsion -- Exercises -- 2. Engine indicator diagrams (B2) -- 2.1 Engine indicators -- 2.2 Converting an indicator diagram -- 2.3 Interpretation of indicator diagrams -- 3. Combustion processes (B3) -- 3.1 Specific heat capacity of a gas -- 3.2 Expansion and compression of gases -- 3.3 Engine temperature and pressure calculations -- 3.4 Efficiency of an engine -- 3.5 General comparison between petrol and compression ignition engines -- 3.6 Octane rating -- 3.7 Cetane number and diesel index -- 3.8 Detonation -- 3.9 Fuel additives -- 3.10 Volumetric efficiency -- Exercises -- 4. Air-fuel ratios and exhaust products (B4) -- 4.1 Air-fuel ratios: petrol engine -- 4.2 Air-fuel ratios: CI oil engine -- 4.3 Determination of air-fuel ratios -- 4.4 Mixture strength and side effects -- 4.5 Air-fuel ratio and power output -- 4.6 Combustion calculations -- 4.7 Consumption loop or hook curve -- Exercises -- 5. Archimedes’ Principle (B5) -- 5.1 Hydrostatics and hydraulics -- 5.2 Archimedes’ principle -- 5.3 Floating bodies -- Exercises -- 6. Fluids and energy (B6) -- 6.1 Pressure -- 6.2 The manometer -- 6.3 Energy of liquids -- 6.4 Bernoulli’s law -- 6.5 Quantity flow -- 6.6 The Venturi unit -- 6.7 Actual flow of liquids through an orifice -- 6.8 Gas velocities -- Exercises -- 7. Hydraulic mechanisms and machines (B7) -- 7.1 Hydraulic machines -- 7.2 Hydraulic intensifier -- 7.3 Hydraulic brakes -- 7.4 The law of a machine -- Exercises -- 8. Variable torque, force and work done (C8) -- 8.1 Variable torque -- 8.2 Work done -- 8.3 Couples -- Exercises -- 9. Angular motion (C9) -- 9.1 Angular velocity and angular acceleration -- 9.2 Power -- Exercises -- 10. Inertia force, mass and acceleration (C10) -- 10.1 Mass -- 10.2 Newton’s first and second laws of motion -- 10.3 Momentum -- 10.4 Braking efficiency and stopping distance -- 10.5 Newton’s third law of motion -- Exercises -- 11. Potential and kinetic energy (C11) -- 11.1 Potential energy -- 11.2 Kinetic energy -- 11.3 Conservation of energy -- 11.4 Conservation of momentum -- 11.5 Energy loss when bodies collide -- 11.6 Moment of inertia -- 11.7 Kinetic energy of a rotating body -- 11.8 Radius of gyration -- Exercises -- 12. Tractive effort and tractive resistance (C12) -- 12.1 Tractive effort -- 12.2 Tractive resistance -- 12.3 Undergeared and overgeared vehicles -- 12.4 Engine characteristics and gear ratios -- 12.5 Constant power and tractive-effort/road-speed curves -- 12.6 Data and methods for setting final drive and gearbox ratios -- Exercises -- 13. Centripetal force and balancing (C13) -- 13.1 Centripetal acceleration -- 13.2 Centripetal and centrifugal force -- 13.3 Balancing of rotating masses -- 13.4 Piston movement and inertia -- 13.5 Engine balance -- Exercises -- 14. Stability of vehicles in curved paths (C14) -- 14.1 Vehicle on curved level road -- 14.2 Vehicle on curved banked track -- 14.3 Vehicle on a reversed banked track -- 14.4 Arched or hump-back bridges -- 14.5 Road dip or depression -- Exercises -- 15. Transference of wheel loading (C15) -- 15.1 Vehicle weight transfer: retardation -- 15.2 Vehicle weight transfer: acceleration -- 15.3 Maximum possible acceleration: level road -- 15.4 Transferred weight: vehicle in curved path -- Exercises -- 16. Simple harmonic motion (C16) -- 16.1 The conical pendulum -- 16.2 The Watt centrifugal governor -- 16.3 The simple pendulum -- Exercises -- 17. Relative velocity (C17) -- 17.1 Definition and diagrams -- 17.2 Angular velocity of a link or lever -- 17.3 Relative velocity of points on a wheel -- Exercises -- Answers to Exercises.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
  • 100
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Dordrecht : Springer Netherlands
    ISBN: 9789400959101
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , online resource
    Edition: Second Edition
    Edition: Springer eBook Collection. Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Science (General) ; Social sciences. ; Humanities.
    Abstract: General Considerations -- The phase rule -- The ternary space model -- 2 Systems Containing Two Phases -- 3 Systems Containing Three Phases -- Systems Containing Three Phases -- Systems containing a eutectic reaction L ?? + #x03B2; -- Systems containing a peritectic reaction L + ? ? #x03B2; -- Transition between eutectic and peritectic three-phase reactions -- Systems containing a monotectic reaction L1? L2 + ? -- Systems containing a solid state miscibility gap that closes within 36 the system -- 4 Systems Containing Four Phases -- Systems containing a ternary eutectic reaction -- 4.2 Fundamental (2,2) Two-Dimensional Lattice Structures -- 5 Reversible Logic: Fundamentals and New Results -- An intermediate phase stable up to its melting point (i.e. con- 66 gruently melting) exists in one of the binary systems -- An intermediate phase formed by a peritectic reaction exists in one of the binary systems -- More than one binary intermediate phase exists in the system -- Ternary intermediate phases are present -- 6 Reversible Lattice Structure -- Primary phase fields on a liquidus projection -- Curves on a liquidus projection -- Points on a liquidus projection -- Non-equilibrium cooling -- 7 Selected Case Studies of Ternary Systems -- C-Nb-ta -- As-Ga-Zn -- Au-Pb-Sn -- Al-Cr-Ni -- C-Cr-Fe, Cr-Fe-Ni and C-Cr-Fe-Ni -- Fe-O-S -- Ag-Pb-Zn -- Al203-MgO-Si02 -- Answers to Problems -- References -- Graph Paper for Calculations.
    Abstract: INFORMATION concerning phase equilibria, such as can be represented by equilibrium diagrams is important in a number of fields of scientific study, and especially in metallurgy, ceramics, and chemistry. Materials of interest in these fields range through single-component to multi-component sys­ tems, the latter often being very complex. While many industrially im­ portant systems can be represented adequately by binary equilibrium diagrams, ternary diagrams provide a basis for studying a wide range of the more complex systems, such as are encountered in certain industrial alloys, and in slags and ceramics. A number of texts dealing with ternary systems are already available (see for example references 2-8). Some of these are very comprehensive and include many diagrams, and their use will take the student of the sub­ ject to an advanced and detailed level of understanding. The present mono­ graph is intended primarily as an introductory text, which it is hoped will prove useful for undergraduate and postgraduate students of metallurgy and ceramics, in particular. Special attention is given to the requirement of the metallurgist and ceramist to use phase diagrams as a means of under­ standing phase changes that occur during heating and cooling, as in solidi­ fication and heat treatment of alloys. This aspect is emphasized in terms of the principles of solidification reactions in relation to solid state constitu­ tion, particularly making use of liquidus and solidus projections.
    Description / Table of Contents: General ConsiderationsThe phase rule -- The ternary space model -- 2 Systems Containing Two Phases -- 3 Systems Containing Three Phases -- Systems Containing Three Phases -- Systems containing a eutectic reaction L ?? + #x03B2; -- Systems containing a peritectic reaction L + ? ? #x03B2; -- Transition between eutectic and peritectic three-phase reactions -- Systems containing a monotectic reaction L1? L2 + ? -- Systems containing a solid state miscibility gap that closes within 36 the system -- 4 Systems Containing Four Phases -- Systems containing a ternary eutectic reaction -- 4.2 Fundamental (2,2) Two-Dimensional Lattice Structures -- 5 Reversible Logic: Fundamentals and New Results -- An intermediate phase stable up to its melting point (i.e. con- 66 gruently melting) exists in one of the binary systems -- An intermediate phase formed by a peritectic reaction exists in one of the binary systems -- More than one binary intermediate phase exists in the system -- Ternary intermediate phases are present -- 6 Reversible Lattice Structure -- Primary phase fields on a liquidus projection -- Curves on a liquidus projection -- Points on a liquidus projection -- Non-equilibrium cooling -- 7 Selected Case Studies of Ternary Systems -- C-Nb-ta -- As-Ga-Zn -- Au-Pb-Sn -- Al-Cr-Ni -- C-Cr-Fe, Cr-Fe-Ni and C-Cr-Fe-Ni -- Fe-O-S -- Ag-Pb-Zn -- Al203-MgO-Si02 -- Answers to Problems -- References -- Graph Paper for Calculations.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
Close ⊗
This website uses cookies and the analysis tool Matomo. More information can be found here...